Home

FQ2-CH Optical Character Recognition Sensor User`s Manual

1. NPN PNP 4 fee ee 3 Brown Power supply 24 VDC ee ey et Brown Power supply 24 VDC anm 1 Dii f Pink TRIG ____ i Black OUTO OR i Ni i Gray INO Y Lg Orange OUT1 BUSY i FGreen IN Y g Light blue OUT2 ERROR i Red IN2 ud J an o White _ INS K i 24 VDC FE i Purple IN4 E Blue GND 0V ijg ii Yellow IN5 gi g i Pink TRIG t af My i Gray INO i S Let 24VDC 7 Ny Green N1 h iE HHE Light blue OUT2 ERROR M Red IN2 Orange OUT1 BUSY White N3 Y Black _ OUTO OR Any Purple IN4 i i Load Yellow INS nf Blue GND OV Preventing Chattering e The Sensor is equipped with an anti chattering function but if the chattering is 100 us or longer a faulty input may occur Input signals of 99 us or shorter are ignored Signals of 100 us or longer are treated as input signals e Use no contact output devices e g SSR or PLC transistor output for the input signals If contacts e g relay are used chattering may cause the trigger to be input again during execution of a measurement Power Supply Specifications When a Switching Regulator Is Connected Use a power supply that meets the following specifications The power supply is sold separately Item Description FQ2 CH Power
2. Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 Ss E S Insp region Moves the measurement region or Scene p 101 8 S elo adjusts the size of the measurement 2 D 5 region i Z For L 1 to L 4 Sets the character format for recogni 32 alphanumeric characters Scene mat tion Camera setup Same as Camera adjustments on the Image Tab Page Scene p 52 S Charac Sets the color of the characters to Black default or White Scene p 106 2 ter color detect oO amp Printing Sets the type of printing of the charac Solid character default or Dot charac Scene 5 type ters to detect ter oO 2 Dot ver Adjusts the vertical dot interval of the O default to vertical width of input Scene interval characters to detect This parameter is image enabled only when Printing type is set to Dot character Dot hor Adjusts the horizontal dot interval of O default to horizontal width of input Scene interval the characters to detect This parame image ter is enabled only when Printing type is set to Dot character Char Sets the thickness of the characters 255 to 255 default 0 Scene thick th Negative numbers indicate thinner characters Positive numbers indicate thicker characters Noise fil Sets the size of the filter Larger values 60 to 440 default 0 Scene ter size eliminate wide areas of noise Small values eliminate narrow areas of noise Bou
3. Waterproof sheet 2 Power Supply Connection and Wiring When using a commercially available switching regulator make sure that the FG terminal is grounded e If surge currents are present in the power lines connect surge absorbers that suit the operating environment e Before turning ON the power after the product is connected make sure that the power supply voltage is correct there are no incorrect connections e g load short circuit and the load current is appropriate Incorrect wiring may result in breakdown of the product e For cables use only the special products specified in this manual e Do not subject the Cables to twisting stress Doing so may damage the Cables e Always turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting Cables The Sensor may fail if a Cable is connected or disconnected while power is being supplied LT p 428 p 429 p 430 p 431 e Use only combinations of the Sensor and Touch Finder specified in this manual Using other combinations may cause malfunction or damage e Do not turn the power OFF in the following instances Doing so will damage data that is in the process of being saved FQ2 CH User s Manual While data is being saved in internal memory While data is being saved on the SD card e The LCD panel has been made using precision technology and sometimes a few pixels are missing in the panel This is due to the structure of the L
4. calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the Y coordinate X0 Edge 0 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position YO Edge 0 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position X1 Edge 1 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position Y1 Edge 1 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position MX Midpoint X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 999 sured edge midpoint position MY Midpoint Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 999 sured edge midpoint position SX0 Edge0 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position X SYO Edge0 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position Y SX1 Edge1 ref position X This is the X coordinate of th
5. External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual Two edge Midpoint Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logged data only 99 999 9999 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 XO Logged data X0 only 99 999 9999 8 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 YO Logged data YO only 99 999 9999 9 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x1 Logged data x1 only 99 999 9999 10 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y1 Logged data Y1 only 99 999 9999 11 Detected edge mid Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 MX Logged data point position X only 99 999 9999 12 Detected edge mid Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 MY Logged data point position Y only 99 999 9999 13 Standard position XO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Standard positio
6. External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 0 Measurement Judgement Acquisition only 2 No judgement not measured 2 JG Logged result 0 Judgement is OK data 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 16 Measurement timeout error 17 Format not entered error 5 Index number Acquisition only 2 Verification result is OFF or read 2 IN Logged was NG data 1 Verification result is NG 0 to 31 Master data number 6 Number of charac Acquisition only 0 to 128 0 N Logged ters data ra Read character Acquisition only 128 characters max 0 string 8 Similarity Acquisition only 0 to 100 0 SIM Logged data 9 Stability Acquisition only 0 to 100 0 STB Logged data 103 Output parame Reflect Setting Acquisition 0 Yes 1 No 0 ter 120 Measurement Character color Setting Acquisition 0 Black 1 White 0 conditions 121 Dot horizontal inter Setting Acquisition 0 to 30 0 F Sp val 122 Dot vertical interval Setting Acquisition 0 to 30 0 123 Character thickness Setting Acquisition 255 to 255 0 threshold 124 Boundary correc Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 tion 125 Filter size Setting Acquisition 60 to 440 0 126 Slender character Setting Acquisition 1to10 3
7. Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 3 Output data set Data 0 to data 31 i p 311 2 S5 p 312 al 3 S gt Data settings Sets data to output to selected data num Text strings for the filter items position p 314 O fl ala ber compensation items inspection items i Ali Multi data and expression that are set so 2 S setting O s Rename Changes the name of the selected data The name can be changed to a name 3 number with up to 15 alphanumeric characters Copy Copies the contents registered in the selected data number to another data number Delete Clears the content of the selected data on number Output form p 291 Output form Selects the format of the data to be out ASCII default or Binary Scene p 314 put 5 Digits of inte Sets the digits of the integer part 1 to 10 Default 6 Scene 2 ger including the sign However is not out Oo put for positive numbers E Example Setting 4 digit data 5963 is output as 999 fe 5 Digits of dec Sets the output digits for the decimal 0 to 4 default 4 Scene S imal part If it is set to 0 the decimal part is 2 rounded off before the data is output Negative Selects what to display as the sign when Default or 8 Scene the number is negative 0 suppress Selects the method to adjust unused dig ON or OFF default Scene its on the left in output data ON Zeros are
8. 1 Turn ON INO and turn OFF IN1 to IN4 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the Wiring Color Signal State Gray INO ON Command parameters for saving data to the Sensor Refer to the following Green IN1 OFF Red IN2 OFF White IN3 OFF Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for saving data to the Sensor Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart INO to IN4 signals i IN5 signal OFF BUSY signal OFF ON ON m gt Allow 5 ms min and then BUSY signal is OFF to save the data in the Sensor turn ON INS ON for 1 ms min Saving data Saving data in in Sensor started Sensor completed FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 211 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Executing External Teaching You can use the image that is currently being input to execute teaching for all of the registered inspection items e Application is possibly only from the Run Mode If the parameter is applicable to more than one inspection item it will be external teaching for all inspection items Settings p gt In Out I O setting Press Expand mode I O setting Input Input mode Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left are Gray INO ON Command parameter for external teaching used Refer to the fo
9. Data 0 DOO This is the result of expression 0 Data 1 D01 This is the result of expression 1 Data 2 D02 This is the result of expression 2 Data 3 D03 This is the result of expression 3 Data 4 D04 This is the result of expression 4 Data 5 D05 This is the result of expression 5 Data 6 DO6 This is the result of expression 6 Data 7 D07 This is the result of expression 7 Data 8 D08 This is the result of expression 8 Data 9 D09 This is the result of expression 9 Data 10 D10 This is the result of expression 10 Data 11 D11 This is the result of expression 11 Data 12 D12 This is the result of expression 12 Data 13 D13 This is the result of expression 13 Data 14 D14 This is the result of expression 14 Data 15 D15 This is the result of expression 15 Data 16 D16 This is the result of expression 16 Data 17 D17 This is the result of expression 17 Data 18 D18 This is the result of expression 18 Data 19 D19 This is the result of expression 19 Data 20 D20 This is the result of expression 20 Data 21 D21 This is the result of expression 21 Data 22 D22 This is the result of expression 22 Data 23 D23 This is the result of expression 23 Data 24 D24 This is the result of expression 24 Data 25 D25 This is the result of expression 25 Data 26 D26 This is the result of expression 26 Data 27 D27 This is the result of expression 27 Data 28 D28 This is the result of expression 28 Data 29 D29 This is the result of expression 29 Data
10. First word of Bits Contents a 12to 15 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 45 0000 0000 0000 gooo Om number 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Paneo Pri Pe Response Vision Sensor to PLC Firstwordof Bits Contents O ee ne eos 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0100 0000 sealed ne 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 K nig 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 1 000 times the 47 0000 0000 0000 ooo0 Yaue Set Image Adjustment Data Command Code 1010 0050 Command PLC to Vision Sensor Firstwordof Bits Contents O soles 12to 15 8 to 11 4107 Oto 3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 5 0000 0000 0000 ooo0 teM number 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Paneo ira mening 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 1 000 times the 9 0000 0000 0000 ooo0 Value 302 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of response area Bits Contents 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0
11. e Application is possibly only from the Run Mode If the parameter is applicable to more than one inspection item it will be re registered for all inspection items Seitings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left are Gray INO OFF Command parameter for registering the model used ee again Refer to the following information for Green IN1 OFF a signal wiring Red IN2 OFF White IN3 ON T 2 4 wiring p 35 Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for registering the model again Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart 1 Turn OFF IN O to IN4 and turn ON IN3 INDtoIN4signals KK Turn ON tthe INS signal while the en Allow 5 ms min and then turn BUSY signal is OFF to register the ON INS model data again from the image that ON IN5 signal lez ON for 1 ms min was just input OFF 3 The BUSY signal turns ON while the parameters are being re registered ON BUSY signal OFF Start re registering 1 End re registering FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 207 8 UONDBUUOD J eed e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado ulijonuonp Sample Ladder Program This sample program is used to input IN5 to re register a mo
12. FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 407 z L seolpueddy 408 External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 400 Verification con Verification master Setting Acquisition 2 OFF 2 ditions data 1 All master data 0 to 31 Selected master data 410 Auto master data Setting Acquisition 1 OFF aA te number 0 to 31 Selected master data 500 Selected master Setting Acquisition 0 to 31 0 Be ane data number 700 Similarity display Setting Acquisition 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 701 Stability display Setting Acquisition 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 703 Character display Setting Acquisition 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 1001 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 0 0 to 31 1002 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit ON to 3 1003 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 i x2 N 0 ning digit ON to 3 1011 N Master data ON Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1021 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF af ae ane number 1 0 to 31 1022 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 1N to 3 1023 N Verification begin Setting Acquisitio
13. 56 3 4 Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images cece eens 58 Delaying the Image Capture Timing from the Trigger Input 58 Adjusting External Lighting Timing 0 000002 cece eee eee 59 Preventing Mutual Interference of Multiple Sensors 59 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 2000seeeeeee 60 Imaga Adjustment isa eee a ane Pe eee SO Stes 60 Filtering the Images Filter Items 0 0 00 00 e eee eee eee 61 Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items 65 Edge Rotation Position Compensation 000000000000 91 4 Setting Up Inspections 4 1 Setup Procedure for Inspection liems 0 200eee eee 96 4 2 Configuring Inspection Items 0 00 e eee 97 Adding New Inspection Items 00 0000 cece 97 Modifying Existing Inspection Items 00000 e eee eee 98 Deleting Inspection Items 0 0 0 98 4 3 Reading and Verifying Character StringS 0 0eeeeeeeeee 99 Character String Recognition 0 0 00 cee eee eee 99 Characters That Can Be Recognized 000000200005 99 Setup Procedure for Character Recognition 0 100 Setup Procedure for Character Recognition 0 100 Setting the Measurement Parameters 000 00 cece eee eee 106 Changing the Output Code for Errors Default
14. External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 300 Logging condi Data logging count Setting Acquisition 1 to 128 128 tions 310 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 unit Data logging ON 311 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 minimum similar Data logging ON ity 313 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 minimum stability Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 number of charac Data logging ON ters 1 315 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 number of charac Data logging ON ters 2 316 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 number of charac Data logging ON ters 3 317 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 number of charac Data logging ON ters 4 318 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 similarity individ Data logging ON ual 319 Data logging switch Setting Acquisition 0 Data logging OFF 1 stability individ Data logging ON ual
15. 00 0 0 cece eee eee eee 308 9 4 Controlling Operation and Outpuiting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 20020005 309 Setting Up No protocol Communications 0000 cee eee eee 310 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 311 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications 317 FQ2 CH User s Manual 13 9 5 Controlling Operation and Outpuiting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 00eeeee ee enee 338 Introduction to FINS Commands 0 00 00 e ce eee eee eee 338 Setting Up Communications FINS TCP 000000 339 List of FINS Commands 0 00 nnana 340 FINS Command Details 000 ccs 341 10 Connecting with RS 232C 10 1 Introduction to RS 232C Connections 0 0 cee e eee 354 10 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications 00000 355 Setting Up No protocol Communications 00 356 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 357 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications 357 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 Error Histories 0 0 cece eee 360 11 2 Error Messages 0 0 cece eee eee eee 362 11 3 Basic Troubleshooting 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 36
16. Measurement data Calculation result Most recent 1 000 values Image data Most recent 20 images Statistical Data Touch Finder Sensor Ree Setting Logging Conditions Use the following procedure to set the conditions for the measurement data image data and statistical data that will be logged Some of these operations and settings are the same as for file logging 0J Setting Logging Conditions p 165 Item Description Statistical data Statistical data such as the number of measurements the number of NG overall judgements and the NG rate since the power supply was turned ON will be logged ON Statistical data will be displayed default e OFF Statistical data will not be displayed Logging image image data These are the same as for file logging Logging data measurement data Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Note The logging parameters for image data and measurement data are the same as those for file logging Selecting the Measurement Data To Log With recent results logging you can select what measurement data to log These settings also apply to file logging BA Selecting the Measurement Data To Log p 166 Starting Logging Logging will be started as soon as the conditions for logging have been set If the settings are saved logging will start automatically the next time the powe
17. Scene p 116 operators TJG Math Uses functions in expressions SIN COS ATAN AND OR NOT ABS Scene p 118 MAX MIN MOD SQRT ANGL angle of straight line joining two points center of gravity and model center DIST dis tance between two points calculation symbols TJG Rename Deletes copies the expression or Scene p 116 changes the expression name Copy Scene Delete oo Scene Judgement Specifies the parameters for judge Scene p 120 ment of results z amp Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 120 D 3 judgement results of a calculation in O S the overall judgement 2 g pe 2 Max Count Sets the number of retries 0 to 8 Default 4 Scene p 185 Normal retry ne g Interval Sets the retry interval msec 32 to 999 Default 100 Scene Normal retry Brightness step or Shutter Sets the exposure time step msec Brightness step Scene speed step 1 to 20 Default 2 Exposure retry shutter speed step 0 01 to 1 00 Default 0 3 Increment count Sets the increment count for the 0 to 10 2 default Scene Exposure retry brightness shutter speed step Decrement count Sets the decrement count for the 0 to 10 2 default Scene Exposure retry brightness shutter speed step In Out Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 Statistical data Sets whether to record the number of ON default or OFF System p 170
18. Note e Returning to Setup Mode Press and press Sensor settings e Signal Status When Moving to Run Mode When moving to Run Mode the signal will change as shown below and data can be input from and output to an external device Display Setup Mode xX Run Mode The BUSY signal that was ON always ON will turn OFF BUSY signal OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual Starting Operation ikr uoneiado 9 There are six types of displays that can be used as shown below Select the display as desired Checking the Judgement Results of Inspection Items Checking the Overall Judgement Result History Graphics Graphics Details Statistical data 0 NG rate 0 000 The image and region currently being In addition to Graphics display indi The currently measured image and history of measured will appear vidual judgement results and measure the overall judgement results measurement ment values of selected inspection count NG count and NG rate will appear items will appear Checking the Judgements of All Inspection Items in a List Displaying Measurement Result Histories All results region Trend monitor Histogram Standard Models and High resolution Models Only The judgement results of all inspection The statistical data for the currently The distribution of measurement results of the items can be checked in a list selected inspection item can be currently selected inspection item can be checke
19. o 6 1 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model L FQ VP1002 2m FQ VP1005 5m FQ VP1010 10m Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual Parallel Cable for FQ SDU2 FQ VP2002 VP2005 VP2010 30 pin flat cable connector 24 9 oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo Unit mm ary e 6 1 C 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model L FQ VP2002 2m FQ VP2005 5m FQ VP2010 10m AC Adapter FQ AC1 1 800 to 2 000 78 Unit mm FQ2 CH User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions 431 z L seolpueddy 12 4 Updating the Software The most recent version of the software and PC Tool can be downloaded from the following website for OMRON members Refer to the Member Registration Sheet that is enclosed with the Sensor http www omron cxone com vision_sys After you download the software use the following procedure to update When you update the software always update the software for the Touch Finder or PC Tool first and then update the software for the Sensor Step 1 Update the software for the PC Tool or Touch Finder e Update the PC Tool Install the PC Tool that was downloaded e Update the software for the Touch Finder 1 Place the update file that you obtained directly in the root folder of an SD card 2 Insert the SD card into the Touch Finder 3 Press Setup Mode
20. 0000 eee ee eee 174 Restoring Data to the Sensor from External Memory 175 7 8 SD Card Operations 20 0 cece eee eee 176 Inserting and Removing SD Cards 00 0 0 00 0000 0 177 Checking the Available Space on the SD Card 0 0 178 Formatting an SD Card 2 0 eee 178 7 9 Convenient Functions for Operation 000 eee eee eee 179 Setting a Password to Prevent Unwanted Changes 179 Capturing the Displayed Image 0 0 0 0 2 eee eee 180 Saving the Currently Displayed Camera Image 0 180 Setting the Startup Run Display Pattern 0 181 Specifying the Sensors to Connect Continuously 05 181 Monitoring and Setting Up a Sensor from Two Touch Finders 181 7 10 Convenient Functions for Setup 20 c eee eee eee eee 183 Making Settings with Stored Images 0 000 cece eee eee ee 183 7 11 Setting the Retry Function 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 185 Retry Function seiss cee acee tet eve a ee eee PER va ee ee 185 7 12 Functions Related to the System 0 000 cee eee eee 189 Turning OFF the Integrated Sensor Lighting Only Sensors with Built in Lighting 0 0 0 000000000 189 Switching the Display Language 00 0 0 c eee eee eee 189 Setting the Time on the Touch Finder 00 0c cece eee eens 189 Initi
21. 5 3 wx FOI gt 426 z z Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual System Requirements for PC Tool for FQ The system requirements for the PC Tool are given in the following table Item Requirement OS Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional SP2 or higher 32 bit edition Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium or higher 32 bit edition or 64 bit edition Hardware CPU Core 2 Duo 1 06 GHz or the equivalent or higher RAM 1 GB min f HDD 500 MB min available space Monitor 1 024 x 768 dots min x Available space is also required separately for data logging Options Specifications I O Cables Item Model FQ WD002 FQ WD010 FQ WD020 Cable length 2m 10m 20m Cable type Robot cable Wire gauge Power line AWG24 AWG24 to AWG20 Other lines AWG28 Cable diameter 6 4 6 4 to 6 7 Minimum bending radius 41 4 mm Weight 100g 500 g 1500 g FQ Ethernet Cable Item Model FQ WN002 FQ WN010 FQ WN020 Cable length 2m 10m 20m Cable type Robot cable Minimum bending radius 40 mm Weight 125g 620 g 1780 g e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU1 Item Model FQ VP1002 FQ VP1005 FQ VP1010 Applicable Units FQ SDU1 Cable length 2m 5m 10m gt
22. Ethernet PLC Link communications FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 283 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 284 You must specify in advance the data to output after measurements You must also specify in advance the Output Area in I O memory to store the data in the PLC After a single measurement or continuous measurements the data is automatically stored in the Output Area of the PLC via Ethernet For PLC Link communications the following three communications areas are set in the PLC to perform communications Command response 1 Command area communications This is the area to which you write control commands for the Vision Sensor to execute 2 Response area This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes the results of control commands executed from the Command Area Data output after mea 3 Output area surements This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes output data for measurements after an inspection is performed You can set the area and address settings in the communications specifications of the Vision Sensor to assign the above three communications areas in the I O memory of the PLC PLC master Command response communi cations Command area The following control commands are written to the Vision Sensor e Control signals Command code e Command parameters Response area The execution results from the Vision
23. Item Description OUT1 Polarity Positive default The BUSY signal is ON while the Sensor is processing data Negative The BUSY signal is ON while the Sensor can receive a trigger signal Important All timing charts in this manual show the operation of the BUSY signal with positive polarity the default setting If you change the polarity of the BUSY signal take this into consideration when reading the timing charts Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the End Timing of the BUSY Signal The end timing of the BUSY signal can be changed p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output Tab Page BUSY output Item Description BUSY output Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable between the Sensor and the Touch Finder if the Sensor and Touch Finder are connected through an Ethernet switch and the BUSY output condition is set to Data logging Image Measurement default The BUSY signal turns OFF when the measurement is completed Data logging The BUSY signal turns OFF when data logging is completed Image logging The BUSY signal turns OFF when image logging is completed Result display The BUSY signal turns OFF when the result display is completed logging or Result display The Sensor will wait for the Touch Finder to answer and the results and measurement time will be affected To disconn
24. NG String output on off Yes default No Sets whether to output an NG string Note Endian Little endian data is output Code Conversion The converted codes are outputted for the following character codes Character code Before conversion After conversion CR amp hOD amp h8541 LF amp hOA amp h8542 DEL amp h7F amp h8543 FF amp hFF amp h8544 Character Output Example When both the data and character string are output the character string is output after the data Example Read result 1 ABC Read result 2 0123 Data output Data 0 3 Number of characters 1 Data output Data 1 4 Number of characters 2 The following information will be output for the above Increment from first Output data Assigned output data address in output area 0 Data0 4 bytes inspection item 0 Number of characters 1 2 Data 1 4 bytes Inspection item 1 Number of characters 3 4 AN Inspection item 0 Characters ABC 5 B 6 7 0 Inspection item 1 Characters 0123 8 T 9 2 10 3 FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 257 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 11 00 Filled with zeros Only when the character string length is not a multiple of 4 8 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP
25. 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 16 Measurement timeout error 17 Format not entered error Index IN 2 Verification OFF or reading error 2 1 Verification is NG 0 to 31 Master data No Number of read charac N 0 to 128 0 ters Similarity SIM 0 to 100 Stability STB 0 to 100 Number of read charac N1 32 characters max 0 ters line 1 N1 Number of read charac N2 32 characters max 0 ters line 2 N2 Number of read charac N3 32 characters max 0 ters line 3 N3 Number of read charac N4 32 characters max 0 ters line 4 N4 Individual similarity SM 0 to 100 0 Individual stability SB 0 to 100 The following values can be specified as calculation data to output them Data name Expression text string Description Judgement JG This is the judgement result It is the OR logic of the judgement results of all expressions Judgement 0 J00 This is the judgement results of expression 0 Judgement 1 J01 This is the judgement results of expression 1 Judgement 31 J31 This is the judgement results of expression 31 FQ2 CH User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data ize suonoedsu dN Buiyjes y 124 Data name Expression text string Description
26. FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 381 z L seolpueddy 382 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence S 3 2 8 amp Sets the area to write execution results PLC Link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One System p 287 S S S 2 from the Sensor CIO Area CIO default Work Area Bl la 2 2 amp Control outputs command codes WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary S a lt response codes and response data Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area n QO 0 2 amp xl az EMO to EMC 8 5 PLC Link MELSEC QnU Q QnAS Data Register File Register Link Register 2 Set the first address of the response 0 to 99999 default 100 System 5 area To lt 5 amp Sets the area to write output data from PLC Link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One System p 287 5 measurements CIO Area CIO default O Output data 0 to 31 Work Area WR lt Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO EM Area EM1 EM Area EMC PLC Link MELSEC QnU Q QnAS Data Register File Register Link Register 2 Set the first address of the output area O to 99999 default 200 System ne lt Output hand Sets whether to establish an interlock No default or Yes System p 287 shake with the PLC when data is output Retry details Enables or disables retrying communica ON or OFF default System p 287 tions This can be set only when the communi
27. p 126 results for the inspection items and to adjust the judgement parameters Graphic Displays the input image Graphics Details Displays the inspection item individual judgement results and measurement val ues All results Region Displays the inspection item individual p 132 judgement results for all inspection items Trend Monitor Displays the individual judgement results p 126 saved in the Sensor in a trend monitor Histogram Displays the individual judgement results saved in the Sensor in a histogram Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence D Model region Same as for the Search Position Compensation item settings Scene 3 g Insp region Scene Adjust judgement Adjusts judgement parameters without Scene p 130 8 stopping measurements Auto adjustment Automatically adjusts the judgement OK Teach NG Teach parameters by using actual workpieces which are considered as good or faulty products Display setting Specifies whether to display individual Depends on the measurement data item inspection results for the inspection item Method Selects the expression to use to auto Threshold minimum Threshold aver matically adjust the judgement parame age default or Threshold maximum ters Auto display trend Same as the trend monitor and histogram for Run Mode
28. p 140 monitor and histo p 141 gram only Display range trend monitor and histo gram only Number of data p 140 trend monitor only Number of data p 141 histogram only Erase display Save data Saves scene data Calibration data and p 133 system data Run Tab Page from Setup Display Menu command Switch to Run mode Switches to Run Mode a E Refer ence p 136 Tool Setup Mode Menu command Select scene Description Setting range Select Switches to a registered scene Rename Used to delete copy or change the 15 alphanumeric characters name of a scene Copy Clear Data Refer ence p 146 z L saolpueddy FQ2 CH User s Manual 377 Menu Tables 378 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 6 Select Sets a registered calibration pattern Calibration data 0 to 31 Scene T 2 Modify Used to edit calibration data Calibration data 0 to 31 Scene oe oO Specify point Sets the type of calibration data to set Specify point No 1 to No 9 p 150 g Reference sa p 152 Parameter a p 154 Modify Sets the parameters for the calibration g data z p Sets the Camera coordinates Calibra p 150 2i 8 tion data gt E a 3 Z a o GE na P Sets the Camera coordinates
29. Output Results The expression is registered in the output area as shown below Output area data Assigned data Output data 0 4 bytes PO X 0 Position X 1st point Output data 1 4 bytes PO Y 0 Position Y 1st point Output data 2 4 bytes PO SX 0 Reference SX 1st point Output data 3 4 bytes PO SY 0 Reference SY 1st point Output data 6 4 bytes Output data 7 4 bytes Output data 8 4 bytes Output data 4 4 bytes Output data 9 4 bytes Output data 5 4 bytes 0 Output data 10 4 bytes Output data 11 4 bytes Output data 12 4 bytes Output data 13 4 bytes Output data 14 4 bytes w les aa ee ee Output data 15 4 bytes PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Output Data Size and Number of Output Data Upper Value Setting When more than one inspection result is output the size of the data that is output for the data output settings could exceed the limit that is set in the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting If that occurs increase the set value of the number of output data upper value setting or adjust the output data settings so that data output size is not exceeded If the size of data that is output does exceed the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting the
30. Description Setting range Data Refer ence Data output period Sensor settings Data output Link data output Set the period for outputting measure ment results This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to EtherNet IP 2 to 5 000 ms default 40 ms System p 249 GATE signal ON period Set the time to turn ON the GATE signal This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to EtherNet IP 1 to 1 000 ms default 20 ms System p 249 Communication mode This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Comm type is set to PLClink MELSEC TCP server default or TCP client System p 287 Initialize Initializes the Sensor settings and saved data Restart Restarts the Sensor p 189 Update Updates the Sensor system to the most recent data p 432 FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 383 z L seolpueddy Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Information Used to check the Touch Finder informa System p 189 tion D Oooo L Model Used to check the Touch Finder model Ver
31. Example 1 Changing Scenes Scene number 1 is specified S1 OK Single byte space Example 2 Acquiring inspection item data Acquires the judgement result for a search registered to inspection item 10 ITEMDATA 100 Single byte space 0 OK Example 3 Measurement when Data Output Is Not Set M OK Example 4 Measurement when Data Output Is Set M OK 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 306 0000 M OK 2 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 337 yeusauy yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 338 9 5 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands Introduction to FINS Commands FINS is a communications command system for a message service that is commonly used on OMRON networks Data can be sent and received and various controls such as changing the operating mode setting resetting bits and file operations can be performed when necessary For details on FINS command specifications the commands that are sent from a CPU Unit and other information refer to the SYSMAC CS CJ CP NSJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual Cat No W342 Range for Receiving FINS Commands The FQ2 can receive FINS commands that are sent by an OMRON CPU Unit on the same Ethernet network The FQ2 can send responses to the received commands to the CPU Unit that sent the comm
32. Installation Procedure A QN N Lock the sliders at the top and bottom of the Sensor Data Unit Press the slider on the Sensor Data Unit to the top Hook the clip at the top of the Sensor Data Unit on to the DIN Track Press the Sensor Data Unit onto the DIN Track until the bot tom clip clicks into place e Attach End Plates sold separately on the sides of the Sensor Data Unit on the DIN Track Always hook the clip at the top of the Sensor Data Unit on the DIN Track first If the lower clip is hooked on first the Touch Finder will not be mounted very securely Removal Procedure 1 2 34 Pull down on the slider on the Sensor Data Unit Lift the Sensor Data Unit at the bottom and remove it from the DIN Track Installation FQ2 CH User s Manual 2 4 Wiring Wiring the Sensor Connect the I O Cable to the I O Cable connector located at the bottom of the Sensor FQ2 CHUOUUUUL M Brown Power supply Blue GND Black OUTO OR Orange OUT1 BUSY Light blue OUT2 ERROR Pink TRIG Gray INO FQ WDOI Green IN1 I O Cable Red IN2 White IN3 Purple IN4 Yellow IN5 Cut off lines that are not required so that they do not come into contact the other signal lines Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA Classifi
33. LT Output Data Size and Number of Out put Data Upper Value Setting p 256 Set the input connection input tag set to 16 bytes greater than the size that you set for this parameter 32 bytes 64 bytes 128 bytes or 256 bytes default 32 bytes Refreshing task period Set the communications cycle for cyclic tag data link communications for the Vision Sensor Set the same value as you set for the requested packet interval RPI on the Network Configura tor e Set this parameter to the same value as you set for the requested packet interval RPI in the PLC This parameter is necessary for the FQ2 to synchronize with the communications cycles of the cyclic tag data link communications that are set for tag connections on the Net work Configurator and in the PLC If the value in the FQ2 is longer than the value in the PLC cyclic data exchange will not be performed according to the expected communications cycle The smaller the setting of this parameter is the more the measurement processing time will be affected For the lowest setting of 4 ms the processing time will increase by approximately 5 to 10 4 to 10 000 ms default 10 ms Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Parameter Description Setting range Timeout This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to Yes A timeout error will occur if th
34. These are the calibration conversion values These values are used to convert the Camera coordinates to the actual coordinates The following formulas are used to convert to actual coordinates X Y Camera coordinates of measurement position Unit pixels X Y Converted coordinates actual coordinates X AxX BxY C Y DxX ExY F With this method the calibration settings are based on measurement results When you enter the actual coordinates of the position that results from searching for a registered model the calibration parameters are calculated automatically The position resulting from the search is found at the subpixel level rel Same Te in X and Y Directions Measure two positions and enter the actual coordinates of them Different Magnifications in X and Y Directions Calibration gO Measure three positions and enter the actual coordinates of them FQ2 CH User s Manual p gt Setup Mode Calibration 1 Select the data region to set from Calibration data 0 far to Calibration data 31 2 Press Modify Q Press lt Reference on the right of the display 4 Press No 1 and then press Modify 5 Movethe rectangular frame to specify the model region Mude Note e You can edit the model region The procedure is the same as that for the Search Position Compensation item LT Eaiting the Model and Measurement Regions p 72 6 Press OK
35. p 141 togram only surement values i e the vertical display range of the histogram Clear results Clears the measurement results of the graphic or graphic inspection items details list Clear results Clears the total results of the inspection items Delete stats total Clears the Statistical data data 2 Image logging Starts and stops logging in external ON Start or OFF Stop p 169 gt memory 8 Data logging ON Start or OFF Stop TF settings The same as for Setup Mode This does not apply to the PC Tool p 189 The resolution of the measurement image can be set on the PC Tool Sensor setting Switches to Setup Mode p 136 386 Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 Multi sensor Simultaneously displays the images for p 139 E multiple connected Sensors z NG sensor From multiple connected Sensors dis 2 plays the image of only the Sensors with oy NG results 7 S Select Switches to the selected Sensor p 50 3 Connections Displays the name of the Sensor 5 detected by the Touch Finder and the connection status Auto con g nect Automatically detects and connects the Sensors that are connected Common Menu Commands Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence CT Only im
36. 1 0CR Neas Parameter Boundary correction Rotation compensation Parameter Setting Description Character color Black default or White Sets the color of the characters to detect Printing type Solid character default or Dot character Sets the type of printing of the characters to detect Dot ver interval 0 default to vertical width of input image Adjusts the vertical dot interval of the characters to detect This parame ter is enabled only when Printing type is set to Dot character Dot hor interval 0 default to horizontal width of input image Adjusts the horizontal dot interval of the characters to detect This parameter is enabled only when Printing type is set to Dot character Char thick th 255 to 255 default 0 Sets the thickness of the characters Negative numbers indicate thinner characters Positive numbers indicate thicker characters Recognition performance will improve for positive numbers but noise will increase causing instability Noise filter size 60 to 440 default 0 Larger values eliminate wide areas of noise Small values eliminate nar row areas of noise Boundary correction ON OFF default If boundary correction is turned ON dark areas at the edges of the mea surement region will be considered to be noise and removed from the read candidates Rotation compensation ON OFF default If rotat
37. 1 Because the record separator is set to CR only one record is output for each measurement A blank line CR delimiter will therefore be entered after the record separator If you do not want a blank line set the record sepa rator to None Note The field separator is not output unless the data continues The following range of values can be output 999 999 999 9999 lt Measured value lt 999 999 999 9999 If the measured value is lower than 999 999 999 9999 then 999 999 999 9999 is output If the measured value is higher than 999 999 999 9999 then 999 999 999 9999 is output The following values are output if JG Judge is set OK 0 NG 1 Note Data that is output after measurement is output until the last data even after the measurement is finished Data out put is not interrupted midway e When Output Format Is Binary Set the numerical expression Select either fixed decimal or floating point decimal e Output Format lt Measured value of data 0 x 1 000 gt lt Measured value of data 1 x 1 000 gt lt Measured value of data 7 x 1 000 gt CR a C CM 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes Delimiter The measurement data multiplied by 1 000 is output continuously at 4 bytes per data Negative numbers are output as two s complements 315 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications u194 3 y6noy Buyosuu0D 6 E
38. 197 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Setting the Outputs Using the Overall Judgement Result When the results of the inspection items are judged if even one individual judgement result is NG the OR output signal is turned ON Individual judgement results Inspection OK Te eh ae inspection NG Overall judgement item 1 NG OR signal ON If there is even one NG judgement Inspection gt OK the overall judgement will be NG item 31 and the output will be turned ON Expression OK Note e The overall judgement result output signal can also be turned ON when all individual judgement results are OK 01 Changing the judgement output ON condition p 202 You can select whether to include the judgement result of one of the expressions 0 through 31 in the overall judgement LT Using Calculation Results without Applying Them to the Overall Judgement p 120 e You can adjust the timing for outputting the OR signal and the ON time after judgement processing LT Adjust the Judgement Output Timing p 200 Wiring Color Signal Description The signals shown at the left are used Black OUTO OR Overall judgement default Refer to the following information for signal wiring assignment LT Je Wiring p 35 Timing Chart The OR signal that is output is held until the next overall judgement is output ON TRIG signal ON for 1 ms
39. 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition X compensation amount 0 DX Logged data only 6 Scroll Y Acquisition Y compensation amount 0 DY Logged data only 7 Scroll 6 Acquisition Rotational compensation 0 DT Logged data only amount 8 Position X Acquisition Measurement value X coordi 0 x Logged data only nate 9 Position Y Acquisition Measurement value Y coordi 0 Y Logged data only nate 10 Angle Acquisition Measurement angle 0 TH Logged data only 11 Reference X Acquisition 0 to 9 999 0 SX Logged data only 12 Reference Y Acquisition 0 to 9 999 0 SY Logged data only 13 Reference angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 ST Logged data only 14 Correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CR Logged data only 120 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 precision sition 121 Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compensa 1 sition tion 1 Position compensation based on internal search 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 image sition 1 Previous image 123 Model Rotation Setting Acqui 0 No rotation 1 Rotation 1 region sition 124 Reference X Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 e sition 125 Reference Y Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 oo sition 126 Reference angle Setting Acqui 180 to 180 0 a
40. 61 340 338 52 52 178 429 37 39 156 54 38 138 138 189 224 56 158 56 141 141 141 141 35 27 427 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 159 60 165 129 129 129 157 157 156 156 157 156 156 156 40 38 Increment count individual judgements initializing Sensor and Touch Finder Input mode inputs INO to IN5 TRIG inspection items copying deleting Edge Position teaching errors renaming installation Interval IP address judgements adjusting auto adjustment method language LCD Backlight Lighting control live images Log logging deleting log recent results selecting data to be logged settings starting and stopping Logging image file MAC address Max count measurement data logging measurement time measurements continuous Median Memory state menus hiding 187 199 189 189 373 35 35 98 98 86 98 30 186 46 48 130 130 131 189 158 229 156 157 172 170 166 165 169 157 380 384 186 164 128 195 204 61 190 158 Model model position compensation 65 mounting control panel DIN Track Mounting Bracket mutual interference prevention Negative noise level no protocol command normal retry 32 32 34 27 59 203 228 85 357 186 Index 443 ch x pul NPN One shot output operation operation indicators BUSY CHARGE ERROR ETN OR POWER SD ACCESS Touch Finder Vision Sensor optical charts OR OR output
41. L FQ Series 4 Press 4q Gain on the right of the display 5 Move the bar to the left or right to adjust the gain Moving it to the right will increase the gain and make the image brighter Moving it to the left will reduce the gain and make the image darker 6 Press OK 7 Press Back Cancel Parameter Setting Description Shutter speed Range If the shutter speed is slow the image will be 1 1 to 1 50 000 bright If the shutter speed is fast the image 1 250 to 1 50 000 for Cameras with Built in Lighting will be dark Default 1 250 Gain Range 16 to 64 If the gain is high the image will be bright If Default 16 the gain is low the image will be dark Adjusting Image Quality FQ2 CH User s Manual To ensure stable operation we recommend that you set the gain to 16 If the recommended value is exceeded the brightness will not be stable and measurement values may be inconsistent We recommend that you turn ON the Brightness Connection Mode e If a slow shutter speed 1 1 to 1 10 and a high gain are set fixed pattern noise fleck and striped noise will sometimes occur Be sure to thoroughly check the images and the measurement results when you set the shutter speed and gain When HDR Is ON Set the brightness adjustment value The higher the brightness adjustment value the brighter the image Dark Bright _ Brightness of image 0 100 p gt Image Camera setup
42. LCD Backlight Brightness Display Functions FQ2 CH User s Manual 7 4 Monitoring the Signal I O Status You can check if the I O connections are working normally p gt In Out I O monitor I O monitor 1 The I O status of the external devices will be dis Input Signals TRIG and INO to IN5 played Signals that are displayed in red are 2 Press the OK Button to return to the Communica Currently being input from the tion check Display external devices to the Sensor Note 1 0 monitor Output Signals OUTO OUT1 and OUT2 Signals that are displayed in red are currently being output from the Sensor to the external devices You can turn the signals ON and OFF by pressing them to test the outputs When the Sensor Data Unit is connected the I O status of the following signals are displayed FQ SDU1 FQ SDU2 TRIG DSA RST INO to IN7 RUN OR BUSY ERR STG SHT ACK GATE and DO to D15 TRIG RST INO to IN5 RUN OR BUSY ERR STG SHT and ACK FQ2 CH User s Manual Monitoring the Signal I O Status 159 suoloun JUs UsAUOD Z 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensor You can connect up to eight Sensors to one Touch Finder or computer This sections describes how to connect more than one Sensor to a Touch Finder or computer Setting the Sensors to Connect Use the following setting to connect more than one Sensor to a Touch Finder A
43. No communi dard parallel cations communica tions Parallel Inter Yes Yes Yes Yes No No face 2 1 This applies when an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit is connected 2 This applies when a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit is connected Connections Across Network Routers You can connect to a Sensor on a different network than the Touch Finder or PC Tool through a router To connect to a Sensor directly specify the IP address of the Sensor Automatic connection to a Sensor is not possible Use a fixed IP address for the Sensor to connect to System Configuration FQ2 CH User s Manual 2 2 Part Names and Functions FQ2 CHULUULLII F No Name 1 Lighting Description LEDs for illumination 2 Camera lens This lens can be focused 3 I O Cable connector An FQ WD or FQ WU I O Cable is used to connect the Sensor to the power supply and external I O 4 Ethernet cable connector An FQ WN Ethernet Cable is used to connect the Sensor to external devices such as PLCs the Touch Finder or computers 5 Focus adjustment screw Used to adjust the focus of the image 6 Operation OR Lights orange when the overall judgement output OR signal turns ON indicators ETN Lights orange during Ethernet communications ERROR Lights red when an error occurs J 11
44. O Dictionary data0 w Reading and Verifying Character Strings FQ2 CH User s Manual 9 The extracted characters will be displayed on the up p D Dictionary datad per left of the display 12345 xtract iol n 10 Press OK to register the characters 11 The characters are registered for the corresponding character type Error Messages during Registration Failed to register data Character format is wrong The format or the number of characters did not match between the read character string and the registered charac ter string Correct the character string to register e Failed to register data Character size is too small You can register characters that are 30 x 30 pixels or larger in the dictionary Change the settings of the Sensor to increase the size of the characters e Extraction error The characters could not be extracted Correct the measurement data settings or the read region e Excess char num An attempt was made to register more than 10 characters Delete the data that does not need to be registered Displaying Registered Characters 1 To display the registered characters select the char RF acters on the upper left of the display FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings 109 suonjoedsu dN buiyjes 74 2 The registered characters will be displayed Deleting Extracted Characters 1 On the display to add and edit characters press Kl ATES Ind
45. Searching for Other Locations If the model image consists of detailed graphic images similar models may be detected In that case set the model mode to Stable p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search pos comp Details Tab Page Model parameter Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Low Contrast Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast of the mark J Adjust the brightness p 53 Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Variations in the Measurement Object Inconsistent portions can be masked so that they are omitted from matching BA Model masking p 73 Increasing Processing Speed The following two methods can be used to reduce processing time Reduce the range in which a search position compensation is performed for the model BA Changing the measurement region p 74 Reduce the angle range setting Adjust the Angle range parameter to reduce the range in which a search position compensation for the model is performed BA Setting the angle range p 71 FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 79 sobew uiye L e Editing the Model Regions and Measurement Region Changing the Model Regions This section describes how to edit the model regions You can edit the model region in the same way as for a search region Changing the Model Registration Region to a Shape Other Than a Rectangle LT p 72 Model registration region O Shape p
46. This example registers an expression to output the following inspection results for data 0 Inspection item PO Search position comp Parameters to output Position X Position Y Reference SX and Reference SY LPR 0 1 P0 X PO Y PO SX PO SY J Function Number_of_data data_A data_B data_d Detection count Start_number Output Results The data is output in the following order for the expression that is registered for data 0 Output order Assigned data 1 PO X 0 Position X 1st point 2 PO Y 0 Position Y 1st point 3 PO SX 0 Reference SX 1st point 4 PO SY 0 Reference SY 1st point 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 313 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Setting the Output Format p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Noprotocol data output 1 Press Output format 2 Set Output form to ASCII or Binary 3 Set the data format for the data form that you select ASCII ed Oulpul furmal Dutput form Commun ication type No protocol TCP Connection mode TCP server Item Description Setting range For ASCII Digits of Sets the number of digits in the integer part 1 to 10 digits integer of the number Default 6 digits Digits of Set the number of digits in the integer part O
47. This section describes the assignments for the Command Response and Data Output Areas Command Area PLC Master to Vision Sensor Slave First Bits Contents word 15 14 e 12 11 HC RE a e e e 1 0 0 ERRCLR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv EXE Control sig nals 32 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv DSA bits 2 Command code Command code 32 3 bits 4 Parameter 1 Parameter integer 5 6 Parameter 2 Spare inte ger 7 8 Parameter 3 Spare inte ger 9 Signal Signal name Function Application EXE Control Command Turn ON this signal from the PLC to send a control Command Execution Bit command for the Vision Sensor to execute response commu f nications Turn OFF the EXE signal from the PLC when the icat Control Command Completed FLG signal from the Vision Sensor turns ON Set the control command code and parameters before you turn ON this sig nal DSA Data Output Request Turn ON this signal from the PLC to request data Data output after Bit output When this signal turns ON the Vision Sen measurements sor outputs data Turn OFF the DSA signal from the PLC when the Data Output Completed GATE signal from the Vision Sensor turns ON ERRCLR Clear Error Turn ON this signal to
48. i i the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal is OFF it turns OFF the i i i j i i i i i i i i i H i i N READY signal O Control Command Completed FLG signal and the Command Execution OFF t t H Active BUSY signal and turns ON i j the READY signal ON A If the PLC does not turn OFF the l f l l l Control Command Execution Bit EXE Response code i l signal within the time that is set for the OFF i H i H retry interval in the PLC Link settings i i i i i the Control Command Completed i i i i i FLG signal and Command Execution ON H H h H H Active BUSY signal will be forced Response data i i i i i OFF i i i i i OFF i i i rit i j j i i i i i i i i i i ON i i i Control Command Completed FLG 9 j signal OFF 1 i i i i i i i j j 5 6 7 0 2 3 4 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled 1 When the PLC is ready to receive output data the Data Output Request Bit DSA is turned ON from the PLC and a request is made to the Vision Sensor to output the data 2 The Vision Sensor outputs the data First data output i i t L pt i i i i Data Output ON T i After the data is output the Data Request Bit DSA i Output Completed GATE signal turns signal OFF i ON f 3 The PLC confirms that
49. p 180 p Tool Button Used to call functions such as saving data or select scenes Note The Display Button can be used to switch between the following images e Camera The image taken by the camera is displayed Live The live image is displayed Freeze The image that was taken last is displayed e Log A log image saved in internal memory is displayed e Logging image file A log image saved in external memory is displayed Camera image file An image that was saved in external memory with Log Image Button is displayed Run Mode In Run Mode measurements are performed and measurement results are output O p 135 FQ2 CH User s Manual Startup Display and Display Elements zl 1 4 Basic Operational Flow The following flow shows the basic operation of FQ2 CH series OCR Sensors Setup Evaluation Operation 2 Connections and Wiring Section 2 Installation and Connections Section 1 Starting the Sensor 1 3 Startup Display and Display Image Setup Image Tab Page f 77 Calibration Settings J777 Image Adjustment Filtering the images filter items Compensating for position offset position compensation items Inspection Setup Inspect Tab Page Inspection Registering Inspection Items Teaching Setting Judgement Parameters Calculation Settings Inspect Tab Page Retry Details Inspect Tab Page Output Settings In Out Tab Page Testin
50. sobew uiye L 1 Press lt q Brightness on the right side of the display 2 Move the bar to the left or right to adjust the bright ness Moving it to the right will make the image brighter while moving it to the left will reduce the brightness of the im age 3 Press OK Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects For quick moving objects the effect of blurring can be reduced by decreasing the shutter speed In HDR Mode set the brightness value to a low setting e Relationship between Shutter Speed and the Brightness Adjustment Value in HDR Mode Fast Moving speed Slow 0 V Brightness 100 Sees lt ___ Shutterspeed _ gt 1 50 000 1 250 Refer to the following page for the setting methods for the shutter speed and brightness J Adjusting the Brightness p 53 FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting Image Quality 22 The lower the shutter speed gain and brightness settings are the darker the image becomes If the Sensor is used in a dark environment make sure that the darkness of the image does not cause the measurements to be unstable Improving the Image Quality of Metallic and other Shiny Surfaces When objects with shiny surfaces are being measured the lighting may be reflected off the surface and affect the image To remove reflections one of the following two functions can be used Function Description HDR High Dynamic Range If objects have contrasting light and dar
51. 1 OFF 1 number 19 0 to 31 1382 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 19N to 3 1383 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 19N to 3 1391 N Master data 19N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1401 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 20 0 to 31 1402 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 20N to 3 1403 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 20N to 3 1411 N Master data 20N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1421 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 21 0 to 31 1422 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 21N to 3 14234N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 21N to 3 1431 N Master data 21N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1441 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 22 0to 31 14424N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 22N to 3 1443 4N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 22N to 3 1451 N Master data 22N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1461 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 23 0 to 31 1462 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 dig
52. 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logged data only 99 999 9999 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X0 Logged data X0 only 99 999 9999 8 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 YO Logged data YO only 99 999 9999 9 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x1 Logged data x1 only 99 999 9999 10 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y1 Logged data Y1 only 99 999 9999 11 Standard position XO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 12 Standard position YO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SYO Logged data only 99 999 9999 13 Standard position X1 Acquisition A 99 999 9999 to 0 SX1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Standard position Y1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acq
53. 130 Setting Up the Best Judgement Parameters Automatically 130 5 4 Checking a List of All Inspection Item Results 5 132 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor 00 cece eee eee eee eee 133 6 Operation 6 1 Starting Operation 0 0 eee 136 Run Mode Display 02 eee ee eee 136 Moving to Run Mode 00 0 0 c eee eee eee 136 6 2 Configuring the Run Mode Display 0000eee eee eeneee 138 6 3 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs 140 Trend Monitor aaepe a dete ei cows ede aed oie eee lee 140 HIStOQraMS cs seeing nee ce dal cige ee Ree eS gee pea ew eee eee 141 6 4 Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation 143 Preparations s cuccy edad ob earned AoE Ree ee See arden S 143 Changing the Judgement Parameters in Run Mode 2 04 143 7 Convenient Functions 7 1 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process 146 What Are Scenes 0 0 cee ee aa a E E 146 Creating New Scenes 0 0000 c cece eee ee 146 Changing Scene Names Copying Scenes and Deleting Scenes 147 Switching Scenes from an External Device 0000 eee eee 147 Setting the Startup Scene 0 nanunua 148 T2 Calibration see cane aetna Glade Bie eet Be shira ee Hh wa anan aei 149 Calibration esn a ave ew ok eek eg OR Ae PR Ae a 149 Setting the Calibration Pattern 0 0 0 0 0 22 150 Sele
54. 1601 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 30 0to 31 1602 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 30N to 3 1603 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 30N to 3 1611 N Master data 30N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1621 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 31 0 to 31 1622 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 31N to 3 1623 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 31N to 3 1631 N Master data 31N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 2000 Measurement Number of read Acquisition only 0 to 32 0 result characters on line 1 2001 Number of read Acquisition only 0 to 32 0 m T characters on line 2 2002 Number of read Acquisition only 0 to 32 0 ace es characters on line 3 2003 Number of read Acquisition only 0 to 32 0 characters on line 4 2100 Read character Acquisition only 32 characters max ee string on line 1 2101 Read character Acquisition only 32 characters max w ce string on line 2 2102 Read character Acquisition only 32 characters max string on line 3 2103 Read character Acquisition only 32 characters max string on line 4 2500 N ndividual read Acquisition only 1 character N 0 to character 127 3000 N ndividual similarity Acquisition only 0 t
55. 2 Scene data Loads scene data p 175 E Scene group data Loads scene group data To 8 Calibration data Loads calibration data Calibration group data Loads calibration group data Dictionary data Loads dictionary data All dictionary data Loads all dictionary data Sensor system data Loads system data All Sensor data Loads all Sensor data Touch Finder data Loads Touch Finder data FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 379 z L seolpueddy Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Information Used to check the Sensor information p 189 9 Model Used to check the model and software __ System 5 version of the connected Sensor 2 Version 3 Name Displays the name of the connected Sensor MAC address Used to check the MAC address of the connected Sensor Rename Used to change the name of a con 15 alphanumeric characters max p 190 g nected Sensor Memory Used to check the status of Sensor p 190 state memory Error history View his Displays a history of errors that have System p 360 tory occurred in the Sensor Delete his Deletes the error history p 361 tory Startup set Startup Sets whether the startup scene number ON or OFF Scene number when set System p 148 tings mode is set manually tings were saved is startup scene num ber Startup Se
56. 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP an yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Reset Vision Sensor Command Code 0010 F010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 1111 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC There is no response for a reset operation If you leave the EXE signal ON when you use it to execute the Reset command the Vision Sensor will restart repeatedly After you execute the Reset command turn OFF the EXE signal before the Vision Sensor restarts Get Latest Error Information Command Code 0020 5000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0010 0000 aside ae the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 FERE nce 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 pogo Perr eer code O Errors Stored in the Error History p 360 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Get Scene Number Command Code 0020 1000 Command PLC to Vis
57. 9 previous successful scan Scene 2 Scene 3 Success count 1 Success count 50 Scene 3 Scene 1 Success count 50 Success count 25 Scene 4 Scene 4 Success count 15 Success count 15 Scene 5 Scene 2 Success count 9 Success count 1 In the default state the order is the order of the scene numbers If the power is interrupted or the sensor is restarted the success counts are initialized when adjust mode is entered Setting trigger retry e Set the retry mode to Trigger retry in Retry details p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Retry details 1 Press Trigger retry for the retry mode Important To use trigger retry the I O input mode must be set to expanded mode p gt In Out I O setting I O terminals Input tab Input mode Press Expanded mode Setting the Retry Function FQ2 CH User s Manual 7 12Functions Related to the System This section describes system settings Turning OFF the Integrated Sensor Lighting Only Sensors with Built in Lighting The internal light can be turned OFF to use external illumination p gt Image Camera setup lt lt Lighting control Press OFF Switching the Display Language Any of the following languages can be selected for display on the Touch Panel or PC Tool Japanese English German French Italian Spanish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese or Korean p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF setting
58. Acquire Sensor Model This command acquires the Sensor model lt Command Format gt Command Parameter eoa MA ylelejejejt lH forl Space Delimiter 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Model ca Or HO FQ2 cCH10 0 1 0 F cR Delimiter Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally e Delimiter O Be lt Parameter Descriptions gt Model Returns the model Example When the model is FQ2 CH10010F the response is FQ2 CH10010F yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications eo ERRGET Acquire Error Information This command acquires the latest error code from the Sensor lt Command Format gt Command E r r e E r Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Model Delimiter Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Error code Returns the latest error code If there is no error history the response is 00000000 11 1 Error Histories p 360 se Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Communications Example An example of the communications log when a computer is connected and communications is performed with a no protocol command from a terminal application is shown below
59. Default NG You can change the character string that is output for read errors The output code must be no more than 20 characters gt Inspect Inspection OCR Details Tab Page Output parameter Error string Troubleshooting Unstable Read Results The read results may be unstable if the contrast is low Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast e Adjust the detailed parameters Using Model Dictionaries to Recognize Custom Characters Characters in special fonts cannot be read correctly with the built in dictionary You can create model dictionaries to enable reading special characters You can register characters that are 30 x 30 pixels or larger Use the following procedures to create and set model dictionaries Creating a Dictionary 1 Press the Tool Button and then Model dictionary 2 Press the dictionary in which to register characters FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings 107 suojoadsu dN buiyjes 74 0 ionary data0 a a EEn Hodify the dictionary data 1 Dictionary data 4 Press Add 5 Youcan register up to 10 versions of each character p 0 Dictionary data0 0 9 and A Z 6 Press Kl Extraction reg on the right of the dis play 7 Specify the region to extract and press OK A GEE The measurement region can contain character strings 244 575 786 721 on up to four lines Each line can contain up to 32 characters 8 Press Extraction
60. If the gain is increased the brightness will not be stable and measurement values may be inconsistent We recommend that you turn ON the Brightness Connection Mode FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting Image Quality 53 sobew uiye L When HDR Is OFF The brightness of the image is adjusted by adjusting the shutter speed If the brightness cannot be improved by adjusting the shutter speed the gain is adjusted Relationship between the Shutter Speed Gain and the Image Brightness Dark Bright Brightness of image 1 60000 1 1 Shutter lt gt speed 0 con lt M gt e Adjust the shutter speed not only to adjust the brightness of the image but also to adjust for the travel speed of the measurement object Note LI Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects p 55 e Increasing the gain will make the image brighter but it will also reduce image quality to the point that the noise component in the images will stand out Select a suitable factor for the inspection p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press lt Shutter speed on the right of the dis play 2 Move the bar to the left or right to adjust the shutter mememe speed Moving it to the left will make the shutter speed slower and the image brighter Moving it to the right will make the shutter speed faster and the image darker 3 Press OK If you cannot obtain the required brightness by adjusting the shutter speed adjust the gain
61. Measurement results output 4 The overall judgement OR is output even if the DSA signal is not output by the external device DSA Signal The DSA signal is used by the external device to request the next data transmission The Sensor will not output data until the DSA signal is turned ON Turn ON the DSA signal at the following time When the external device is ready to receive data When the Sensor has completed measurements The BUSY signal will be ON while measurements are being executed Therefore you can monitor the status of the BUSY signal to detect when measurements have been completed Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Timing Chart Example Three Data Items Set for Parallel Data Output Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF ON oe ee OFF i ON while measurements are being processed ON depends on BUSY output conditions BUSY signal OFF i gt Overall judgement Output when measurements have been OR signal completed regardless of the DSA signal DO to signals i nA EN EN ON OA LON _ GATE signal root N i OFF NI 1 1 N 1 GATE og ONdelay i ON j i i DSA signal 1 OFF os Timeout Time 3 Timeout Time 1 If more than one data item is being output for one measurement and the DSA signal does not turn lt th DSA signal does fot turri ON ON within the specified time after the GATE me
62. Otherwise it is 0 NOT argument ABS Finds the absolute value ABS argument MAX Returns the larger of the two arguments MAX argument_1 argument_2 MIN Returns the smaller of the two arguments MAX argument_1 argument_2 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Function Description ANGL Finds the angle of the straight line joining two points the center of gravity and center of the model The angle against the horizontal is found The result is a value between 180 and 180 ANGL Y_component X_component Example Finding the angle of the straight line joining the centers of region 0 and region 1 ANGL R1 Y RO Y R1 X RO X Sena sS Horizontal Second point If the two arguments are both 0 the result is 0 and the judgement is NG MOD Finds the remainder after dividing a non ordinal number with an ordinal number MOD non ordinal ordinal If any of the arguments are real numbers the decimals are rounded off before calculating the remain der The remainder is the result of dividing integers Example MOD 13 4 Result 1 remainder when 13 is divided by 4 MOD 25 68 6 99 Result 5 remainder when 26 is divided by 7 SQRT Finds the square root If the argument is negative the result is 0 The judgement will be NG SQRT argument DIST e Finds the distance between two points the center of gravity and the center o
63. Parameter Setting Description Source image Camera camera The results of processing the position compensation item is applied to the image that is taken image by the Camera This setting is used when filter items or other position compensation items have been used specifically for the position compensation item LT using Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items p 67 Prev previous This setting is used when the processing results of the current position item are to be applied image default to the image that results from previous filter items or other position compensation items Using Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items To more effectively perform position compensation filter items can be used to create an image specifically for position compensation and then apply only the results of processing the position compensation to the image that will be measured The processing order of filter and position compensation items and the settings of the source images are set up as shown below sobew uiye L Processing Image processing item Source image setting order 1 0 Enhance edges Edge Source image Camera image Enhancement filter item Camera image image for processing gt Processed image results of processing 2 1 Search position comp Search Source image Camera image Position Compensation position Previous image image for processing gt C
64. SHTOUT OR DSA BUSY GATE e ERROR DO to D15 STGOUT ACK Setting the Output Time of the ACK Signal You can set the output time of the normal execution completion signal for parallel commands p gt In Out I O setting I O Output ACK signal ON period The ACK signal is not output for normal completion of continuous measurement commands Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal You can change the output settings of the STGOUT signal to adjust when and for how long the external lighting is lit Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual p gt Image Camera setup q Lighting control 1 Change the setting for lighting control Item Parameter Setting Description Lighting control Strobe output delay 0 to 65 535 us Enter the delay time from when the TRIG signal is default 0 us input until the external lighting is lit Strobe output time 0 to 65 535 us Set the pulse width of the output signal STGOUT default 1 000 us that tells the external lighting when to light When the strobe polarity is set to Negative a delay of about 200 to 300 us occurs from when the TRIG signal is input until the STGOUT signal goes low When a high speed shutter is used set the Output polarity parameter to Positive e Timing Chart for Strobe Trigger Output Signal The STGOUT signal turns ON
65. Setup Mode Sensor settings Network Ethernet IP address setting 1 Press Fixed 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask according to the network where the external devices such as PLCs are connected Note If you connect OMRON CS CJ series PLCs to the Ethernet the following default IP addresses are assigned to the PLCs IP address 192 168 250 node_address Connecting to Sensors from a Computer Using the PC Tool Configurations Consisting of Only Sensors and a Computer PC Tool If the configuration consists only of Sensors and a Touch Finder set the network settings on the computer as described below No IP address settings are required on the Sensors The following procedure is for Windows XP Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu 2 Click Network and Internet Connections in the control panel and then double click Network Connections 3 Right click the Local Area Connection Icon and select Properties Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting Up Ethernet G SUOMOBUUOD pue uonejersu 48 4 On the General Tab Page double click Internet Proto col TCP IC General Advanced Connect using This connection uses the following items M E QoS Packet Scheduler gi Install Description B Intel R 82566DM 2 Gigabit Network 4 Local Area Connection Propert
66. TRIG signal a ON for 1 ms min OFF BUSY signal os a signa OFF ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions ON OR signal NG OFF Overall judgement One shot One shot OR output ON for NG output delay output time Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output 1 Press Output mode and press Level output or One shot output 2 Press Output delay and set the one shot output de lay 3 Press OK i 4 Press Output time and set the one shot output time 5 Press OK gt PRS ion FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 201 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoju0D 202 Item Description Output mode One shot output After the measurement results are finalized if the judgement output ON condition is met the OR signal is turned ON for the one shot output time It is then turned OFF once the specified time has expired Level output default The judgement is output after measurement results are finalized and the ON OFF status of the OR signal is held until it is changed for the next measurement result Output delay When one shot output mode is selected this parameter sets the delay from when a measurement is completed until when the OR signal turns ON Setting range 0 to 1 000 ms Output time When one shot out
67. Test Continuous test 1 Press Graphics Details 2 Input an image of a previously prepared object Check the judgement results 3 When you finish checking the results press Back Judgement Similarity Stability Note The same five types of displays are available for the Continuous test on the Test Tab Page i e Graphics Graphics Details All results region Trend monitor and Histogram Press the Back Button to access the menu to change the display LI Changing the Run Mode display p 138 Performing Test Measurements with Saved Images Re measuring This Sensor can save measured images in the Sensor s built in memory or on an SD card Test measurements can be performed using these saved images This function is useful for adjusting the judgement parameters when objects are not available p gt Test Continuous test Any display 1 Press Q EJ 12 5 Performing Test Measurements FQ2 CH User s Manual 2 Select one of the following Log Images that are logged in the Sensor s internal memory Logging image file Images that are logged in the SD card Camera image file Images that were saved as logged images with the IE Log Image Button 3 The display switches to the saved image and mea surements are taken again LT saving images p 183 FQ2 CH User s Manual Select image display Test 42ms 0 cenel Performi
68. Vision Sensor slave CPU Unit 1 0 memory Communications areas BE Command gt e Switching the scene number Command area Single measurement etc Response area ay Response m OK etc Ethernet PLC Link communications After you write a control command to the specified Command Area in the I O memory of the PLC you can turn ON the Command Execution EXE Bit to send the control command to the Vision Sensor via Ethernet The Vision Sensor executes the control command and sends a response back to the PLC via Ethernet The PLC stores the response in the specified Response Area in I O memory Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single measurement or continuous measurements the Vision Sensor will automatically output to the specified I O memory in the PLC the data for measurements that are specified for output in advance This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the PLC When handshaking is enabled the data can be output from the Vision Sensor only when the condition to receive that data are met at the PLC PLC master Vision Sensor slave CPU Unit s After VO memory measurements Communications area i Mi Output area lt Q p a Data Up to 256 specified data items can be automatically output Output character string
69. default System p 200 signal and for output signals to which judgements are assigned Output delay When one shot output mode is selected 0 to 1 000 ms default 0 ms System this parameter sets the delay from when measurement processing is completed until when the OR signal turns ON Output time When one shot output mode is selected 1 to 1 000 ms default 5 ms System this parameter sets the time that the OR signal is ON BUSY output Specifies when to turn OFF the BUSY Measurement default Data logging System p 203 signal after starting measurement pro Image logging or Result display cessing OUTO Polarity You can change the polarity of the output Positive default Negative System p 203 signals that are assigned to OUTO to OUT1 Polarity OUT2 regardless of what signal is Positive default Negative System assigned to the output OUT2 Polarity Positive default Negative System BUSY LED You can change the BUSY indicator to a BUSY default RUN System p 190 RUN indicator Output control You can select the data output method None default Handshaking or Sync System p 220 Menu Tables Only when the FQ SDU1 nected is con Output FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 2 Output period Sets the period for outputting measure 2 0 to 5 000 0 ms System p
70. limit 100 Stability Sets the stability of the read charac O to 100 defaults lower limit 60 upper Scene ters that is to be judged as OK If there limit 100 is more than one candidate for the same character the difference between the first and second candi dates is numerically expressed by the stability Characters Displays the character string that was Scene read 2 T 5 Verif master data Sets whether to verify the read charac OFF default All master data or Mas Scene p 104 T 2 w ter string against a character string ter data 0 to 31 l that is registered in the master data 5 Sets the character string to use to ver ify the read character string against the master data Master data regist Registers a character string in the Master data 0 to 31 Scene master data 5 Auto Reads a character string from an input Scene a image and registers it in the master _ linea data d region E L 1 to L 4 A character string is entered directly in 32 alphanumeric characters Scene 5 the master data 3 Ref data Registers the immediately preceding Scene E read results as a verification character g string L 1 verif Sets the beginning and end characters 1 to 1024 defaults beginning 1 end Scene range to to verify 1024 L 4 verif range Copy Copies or clears registered master Scene data Delete Auto teach No Sets the character string in the master OFF or Master data 0 to 31 Scene da
71. mal 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 329 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 ITEMDATA or ID Acquire Inspection Item Data This command acquires the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item lt Command Format gt External reference Inspection item number data number Command 2 digits max 4 digits max aa oo jii rje mjolfatrya fer or Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 iyo f fer Y L Delimiter Command Inspection item External reference number data number 2 digits max 4 digits max Space Space 0x20 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally sate lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the inspection item number 0 to 31 External reference data Specifies the external reference data number 0 to 9999 number LT 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Acquired value Returns the data for the specified inspection item 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 sy Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Set Inspection Item Data This command sets the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection i
72. pensation for the Y coordinate X Position X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found Y Position Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered CR Correlation This is the correlation 0 to 100 FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 81 sobew uiye L Edge Position Compensation This position compensation item detects an edge in the set direction If the specified density is detected it is recognized as an edge When an edge is recognized the image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it was registered Measurement region Edge search direction Registered position of the edge The image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it Density of edge to be found was registered e Setup Procedure for Edge Position Compensation Step 1 Selecting the Position Compensation Items p gt Image Image adjustment Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp 2 Press Model Edge pos comp BA Registering inspection items p 97 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manu
73. threshold 127 Hyphen height Setting Acquisition 0 to 100 30 _ ai upper threshold 128 Hyphen height Setting Acquisition 0 to 100 70 lower threshold 129 Printing type Setting Acquisition 0 Solid character 1 Dot character 0 130 Rotation compen Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 sation 131 Slant compensation Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 132 Judgement con Similarity judge Setting Acquisition 0 to 100 100 Judge ditions ment upper limit men condition 133 Similarity judge Setting Acquisition 0 to 100 60 Judge ment lower limit men condition 134 Stability judgement Setting Acquisition 0 to 100 100 Judge upper limit men condition 135 Stability judgement Setting Acquisition 0 to 100 10 Judge lower limit meni condition FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 405 z L seolpueddy 406 External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 136 Output parame Line delimiter Setting Acquisition 0 None 1 Comma 2 Space 0 ter 138 String output ON Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 G OFF 139 NG error code out Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 1 put 141 Error string Setting Acquisition 20 characters max NG 142 Par
74. to 3 1531 N Master data 26N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1541 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 27 0 to 31 1542 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 27N to 3 1543 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 27N to 3 1551 N Master data 27N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1561 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 28 0to 31 1562 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 28N to 3 1563 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 28N to 3 1571 N Master data 28N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1582 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 29 0 to 31 1582 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 29N to 3 FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 413 rA L seolpueddy External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 1583 N Verification con Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ditions ning digit 29N to 3 1591 N Master data 29N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3
75. xe Cable type Flat cable T Minimum bending radius 5 5 mm S D Weight 150g 380 g 750 g n ol NO Do not bend any Cable beyond the specified minimum bending radius Doing so may damage the Cable FQ2 CH User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions Bll 428 e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU2 Item Model FQ VP2002 FQ VP2005 FQ VP2010 Applicable Units FQ SDU2 Cable length 2m 5m 10m Cable type Flat cable Minimum bending radius 5 5 mm Weight 80g 200g 400g e Sensor Data Unit Cable Item Model FQ WU002 FQ WU005 FQ WU010 FQ WU020 Cable length 2m 5m 10m 20m Cable type Robot cable Cable diameter 7 Minimum bending radius 35 mm Weight 200g 400g 800 g 1500 g Do not bend any Cable beyond the specified minimum bending radius Doing so may damage the Cable AC Adapter Item Model FQ AC1 FQ AC2 FQ AC3 FQ AC4 FQ AC5 FQ AC6 Plug type A A A 0 BF Oo Certified standards PSE UL CSA CCC mark Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC 90 to 264 VAC Input current 0 4 A max 100 VAC 50 Hz when connected to maximum load Input frequency 47 to 63 Hz Output voltage 15 VDC 5 Output current 1 A max Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 40 C Storage 20 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating and storage 35 to 80 with no conden
76. 0 0 eeeee eens 138 6 3 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs 140 6 4 Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation 143 6 1 Starting Operation When test measurements and adjustments in Setup Mode have been finished change to Run Mode and begin actual measurements In Run Mode the Sensor operates stand alone and outputs the measurement judgement results on the I O lines accordingly to the settings If the Touch Finder or the PC Tool is connected via network to the Sensor the operation of the Sensor can be monitored in the following ways Run Mode Display The present display Selected inspection item name Connected Overall judgement R Sensor name 48 Oms Selected scene Measurement processing time OD number The time taken from when an image is input until all OK measurements have been slimi i 76 0000 Sub menu completed g iji 17 0000 l ABCDE Inspection results can be 19345 displayed in six formats such fF as in a list or as a trend graph LT p 138 Tool Button or a OK Button These buttons are displayed both in Setup and Run Mode LL p 20 Moving to Run Mode You can move from Setup Mode to Run Mode by using the following procedure 1 Press Run Switch to Run mode 2 Press Switch to Run mode 3 Press Yes If you press No the setting will not be saved and you will move to Run Mode ize Starting Operation FQ2 CH User s Manual
77. 1 416 Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual Item Inspection and ID models Model NPN FQ2 CH10 M PNP FQ2 CH15 M Accessories Mounting Bracket FQ XL 1 Polarizing Filter Attachment FQ XF1 1 Instruction Manual Quick Startup Guide Member Registration Sheet Warning Label LED class 2 Class 2 Applicable standards EN standard EN 61326 and EC Directive No 2004 104 EC Table 1 350 000 pixel Models Field of view Installation dis Num Weight HxV 1 tance ber of NPN PNP LEDs FQ2 CH10010F M FQ2 CH15010F M 7 5 x 4 7 to 38 to57mm 4 Approx 13 x 8 2 mm 160g FQ2 CH10050F M FQ2 CH15050F M 13 x 8 2 to 56 to215mm 4 53 x 33 mm FQ2 CH10100F M FQ2 CH15100F M 53 x 33 to 220 to 970 mm 8 Approx 240 x 153 mm 150g FQ2 CH10100N M FQ2 CH15100N M 29 x 18 to 32 to 380mm 8 300 x 191 mm 1 Tolerance 10 max 2 Applicable standards IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 EN 60825 1 1994 A1 2002 A2 2001 and JIS C 6802 2005 Table 2 Item NPN PNP Input specifi ON Shorted to 0 V or 1 5 V max cations OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max ON Shorted to power supply voltage or power supply volt age 1 5 V max OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max Output speci NPN open collector fications 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 2 0 V max PNP open collector 30 VDC 50
78. 1 Error Histories p 360 BUSY Lights green when the Sensor is executing a process You can change the BUSY indicator to a RUN indicator This indicator is set by default to a BUSY indicator but if you change it to a RUN indicator it will light green during operation OJ Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator p 190 7 Mounting Bracket FQ2 CH User s Manual Used to mount the Sensor The Mounting Bracket can be attached to the front left side right side or back of the Sensor Part Names and Functions 27 G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejersu Touch Finder No Name Description 1 Operation POWER Lights green when the Touch Finder is turned ON poicators ERROR Lights red when an error occurs LI 11 1 Error Histories p 360 SD ACCESS Lights yellow when an SD card is inserted Flashes yellow when the SD card is being accessed CHARGE Lights orange when the Battery is charging 2 LCD touch panel Displays the setting menu measurement results and images input by the camera 3 SD card slot An SD card can be inserted 4 Battery cover The Battery is inserted behind this cover Remove the cover when mounting or removing the Battery 5 Power supply switch Used to turn t
79. 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD Interface Status Flag 3 Get Physical Address ARRAY of 6 MAC layer address USINTs Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 01 hex Get_Attribute_All No Yes OE hex Get_Attribute_Single Yes Yes Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications FQ2 CH User s Manual 1 6 04h Assembly Object Class Attributes 1 Revision UINT Revision of the object 2 Instance Attributes O to T Instance ID 100 ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 3 Get Set Data BYTE array Byte data Data format is Refer to Memory defined by application Assignments input connection to Sen sor 4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes O to T data size Set before going online Instance Attributes T to O Instance ID 101 ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 3 Get Data BYTE array Byte data Data format is Refer to Memory defined by application Assignments input connection to Sen sor 4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes O to T data size Set before going online Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks OE hex Get_Attribute_Single Yes Yes 10 hex Set_Attribute_Single No Yes z L seolpueddy FQ2 CH User s Manual Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications gai Index AC Adapter AC power supply connector Touch Finder ACK ACK signal ON period adjusting parameters adjustme
80. 220 a a ment results Only when the FQ SDU1 10 0 ms default n on i olo is connected GATE ON delay Sets the time from when the result is out 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms System p 221 put to the parallel interface until the 1 0 ms default GATE signal turns ON Only when the FQ SDU10 is con nected Output time Sets the time to turn ON the GATE sig 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms System p 221 nal 5 0 ms default Only when the FQ SDU1L is con nected Timeout Sets the timeout time for output control 0 5 to 120 0 s System p 221 Only when the FQ SDU1L is con 10 0 s default nected Number of delay Set the number of times to ignore the 1 to 15 default System p 221 TRIG signal turning ON between when the TRIG signal turns ON and the mea surement results are output Only when the FQ SDU1L is con nected ACK signal ON Sets the output time of the normal execu 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms System p 228 period tion completion signal for parallel com 5 0 ms default mands Only when the FQ SDU is connected Output polarity Sets the ON OFF polarity for all of the Positive default Negative System p 228 output signals Only when the FQ SDU is connected 2 Input mode Specifies whether to use functions other Standard mode default or Expanded System p 205 mode than scene switching for external parallel commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 373 z L seolpueddy 374
81. 255 255 254 System 380 Menu Tables the IP address setting is set to Fixed Default 10 5 5 7 FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 2 amp Communication Sets the communications type to use to Invalid default No protocol TCP No System p 310 2 type output no protocol data protocol FINS No protocol RS 232C p 356 a wl 8 5 5 2 When the com 2 Q munications type 8 6 is TCP no proto col or FINS TCP no protocol Connec Sets whether to communicate with the TCP server default TCP client System p 310 tion mode communications devices as a server device or a client device IP address Sets the IP address to which to output a b c d System p 310 no protocol data a 1 to 223 Setting is not possible if the connection b 0 to 255 mode is set to a TCP server c 0 to 255 d 1 to 254 Default 10 5 5 111 Port No Sets the output port number 0 to 65535 Default 9600 System p 310 Setting is not possible if the connection mode is set to a TCP server 5 3 When the com 5 S munications type S 8 lis RS 232C no Oo 8 5 protocol Q Baud rate Set the baud rate to use for RS 232C 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 System p 356 Z communications or 115200 default 38400 Data Sets the data length 7bit or 8bit default 8bit System p 356 length Pa
82. 30 Description Sets the brightness or shutter speed step msec Increment count 0 to 10 default 2 Sets the brightness shutter speed increment count Decrement count 0 to 10 default 2 Setting scene retry Sets the brightness shutter speed decrement count e Set the retry mode to Scene retry in Retry details p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Retry details 1 Press Scene retry for the retry mode 2 Set the switch order 3 Set the scenes that are switched through Parameter Switch Order Settings Auto default Fixed Description Sets the scene switching order Auto Switches through the scenes in the order of highest frequency of use Fixed Switches through the scenes in the order that the scenes were registered for scene switching Retry scene 1st to 32nd FQ2 CH User s Manual Register the scenes for scene switching Register the scenes to switch in order from Ag1st If there are any scenes for scene switching that are not registered the remaining scenes are ignored Setting the Retry Function 187 suoljoun JUs UsAUOD Z 188 Auto scanning order The scanning procedure when the sort order is set to auto is shown below 1st The immediately previous scene that scanned successfully 2nd and following Order of largest number of successful scans Scene 1 Scene 5 Scan condition of immediately Success count 25 Success count
83. 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FEFFFFFF NG Get Inspection Item Data Command Code 0040 1020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command EA 12to 15 8to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents eee ae oe lame toto ts 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 47 0000 0000 0000 Gono 1000 times the value FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 275 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Set Inspection Item Data Command Code 0050 1020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents eye 12 to 15 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6
84. 60 E aes For the I O connector harness use an FQ VP1 Parallel Cable for the FQ SDU1 or a MIL standard harness such as the OMRON XZ2F The Cables are sold separately Signal Power supply 24 V Application These terminals are for the external power supply 24 V Power supply 0 V Important e Wire the power supply separately from other devices If the wiring for other devices is placed together or in the same duct as the wiring for the Vision Sensor the influence of electromagnetic induction may cause the Sensor to malfunction or may damage it e Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA Frame ground FQ2 CH User s Manual This is the frame ground terminal Connect it to the ground wire Wiring 37 G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu FQ SDU10 SDU15 Terminal Signal Names Pin Signal IN Function Pin Signal IN Function OUT OUT 1 COMOUT1 Output signal common DOO to 31 COMINO Input signal common all inputs DO15 except TRIG 2 Nc 32 COMIN1 Input signal common TRIG 3 DO OUT Data output 33 TRIG IN Measurement trigger input 4 D1 OUT Data out
85. 7 Press a reference sample to get the Camera coordi nates 8 Enter the actual coordinates of the specified position Press lt q Actual coord on the right of the display 9 Enter the actual X and Y coordinates and press OK mm 10 Repeat the above steps 4 to 8 to set the coordinates of the remaining positions FQ2 CH User s Manual reg 0 Calibration un 1016 344 1246 FQ Serie Cance 0 Calibration VELEL Mode reginn Insp region Reference samoling courd setting O Calibratiun VELEL Calibration 153 suoljoun JUs UsAUODD Z 11 When you have finished setting the coordinates for all of the positions press Generate parameters iu 2 No 4 N Unconf iaured 12 The calibration parameters will be displayed The items in the calibration parameters are the same as those for point specification No 5 Mud ify Coefficient Uneontigured l O Calibration datali Parameter Coett ic lente CPT TT Coeff ic lentig 0 000000 0 000000 Cueff icient E With this method you directly enter values to set calibration The calibration parameters will be automatically calculated when you enter the following three parameters Parameter Setting Coordinate coor Righthand or Lefthand dinate system Default Lefthand Description Lefthand The positive direction is clockwise when coordinates are specified Righthand The positive direction
86. All Data File Logging Large amounts of measurement and image data can be saved in files in external memory SD cards or computer Touch Finder Image logging file FQ2 Vision Sensor Data logging file Saved for X f each Computer 1 measurement mj i Harddisk drive _ disk drive 1 Image data and measurement data can be logged in the same way as for the Touch Finder by installing the PC Tool for FQ O1 System Configuration p 24 Only the data for the Sensor that is currently being displayed will be logged even if more than one Sensor is con nected If multiple sensors are displayed or if the most recent NG sensor is displayed only the results of the sensor that was displayed before changing to the other sensor monitor screen will continue to be logged Simultaneous logging of the results of multiple sensors is not possible Setting Logging Conditions Use the following procedures to set the conditions to log data p gt In Out Log setting Image Data 1 Press Image logging 2 Change the logging conditions and then press Pg Back the kind OF image max 20 i All linly Nb Cancel f FQ2 CH User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 165 suoljoun JUs UsAUODD Z Measurement Data 1 Press Data logging Condition 2 Change the logging conditions and then press Back Dale lugging ect the kind Of data max 1000 Cancel f Ite
87. Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the Y coordinate X0 Edge 0 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position YO Edge 0 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position X1 Edge 1 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position Y1 Edge 1 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position SX0 Edge0 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position X SYO Edge0 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position Y SX1 Edge1 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 re
88. Command Is Processed Normally o Jor Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the inspection item number 0 to 31 External reference data Specifies the external reference data number 0 to 999 number LT Refer to 12 2 External Reference Parameters for details Text string data Specifies the text string data for the specified inspection item BA Refer to 12 2 External Reference Parameters for details FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 333 u194 4 yBnoiy Buoauuog 6 VERGET Acquire Software Version This command acquires the version information of the Sensor software lt Command Format gt Command Parameter o_o Sr OO yleferjelejt fs forl Space Delimiter 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Software version Date Space Delimiter jo k or Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r or Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Software version Returns the software version Example When the software version is 1 60 the response is 1 60 Date Returns the date Example When the date is 13 May 2012 the response is 2012 05 13 oo Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual
89. Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Position compensation item number Specifies the number of the position compensation item or filter item to set External reference num ber Specifies the external reference number 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Set value Specifies the set value 11 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Getting the Inspection Item Data 280F 00401020 This command acquires the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Inspection item number 4 bytes External reference 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes number 4 bytes 28 OF 00401020 Inspection item number from 00 External reference to 1F 2 digits max number Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Acquired value 4 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes bytes 28 OF End code 00401020 Acquired value 1 000 times the actual value End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Parameter Descriptions Inspection item number Command execution ended in an error Specifies the number of the inspection item for which to acquire the data External ref
90. Connection method Special connector cables Power supply and I O 1 cable FQ WDLILIL Touch Finder and computer 1 cable FQ WNLILIL Indications BUSY indicator BUSY green Judgement result indicator OR orange error indicator ERROR red Ethernet communications indicator ETN orange Note The assignment of the BUSY indicator can be changed to a RUN indi cator display color green Ratings Power supply voltage 21 6 to 26 4 VDC including ripple Insulation resistance Between all lead wires and case 0 5 MQ at 250 V Current consumption 2 4 A max Environmental Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 50 C immunity Storage 25 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensation Ambient atmosphere No corrosive gas Vibration resistance destruction 10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0 35 mm X Y Z directions 8 min each 10 times Shock resistance destruction 150 m s 3 times each in 6 direction up down right left forward and backward Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP67 Except when Polarizing Filter Attachment is mounted or connector cap is removed Materials Sensor PBT PC SUS Mounting Bracket PBT Polarizing Filter Attachment PBT PC Ethernet connector Oil resistance vinyl compound O connector Lead free heat resistant PVC Weight Depends on field of view and installation distance Refer to Table
91. I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 ClO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 ClO 1 15 Note The BUSY signal will remain ON while external teaching is being executed If the cycle time is too long the PLC may not be able to detect when the BUSY signal is ON If necessary turn OFF W0 00 after a suitable time elapses FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D 213 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Overview If you mount a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit in addition to outputting OR judgement results you can also use the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to output the judgement results of judgement conditions that you set for parallel output called parallel judgement output and the results of measurement values and expressions for inspection items called parallel data output Measurement trigger Sensor Data Unit External device single continuous measurements e Control commands Output Data OR judgement result Parallel judgement output e Parallel data output Setting the Measurement Trigger The measurement trigger can be chosen from the following two t
92. Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Dictionary 3 Used to edit the dictionary data in the e p 107 data 0 to 31 ie model dictionary for character recogni 3 tion using custom characters o Ko e Changes the name of dictionary data 15 characters max Q oO o o Copies dictionary data iS g Clears the settings of dictionary data 8 2 2 Scene data Saves scene data with an SCN file name p 174 15 extension g N amp Scene group data Saves all scene data with an SGP file name extension Calibration data Saves calibration data with an CLB file name extension Calibration group Saves calibration group data with an data CGP file name extension Dictionary data Saves dictionary data with a DIC file name extension All dictionary data Saves all dictionary data with a DGP file name extension Sensor system data Saves system data with an SYD file name extension All Sensor data Saves all Sensor data with a BKD file name extension Touch Finder data Saves Touch Finder data with an MSD file name extension Statistical data Saves statistical data with a CSV file a5 p 165 gt name extension p 166 fo i Logging image Saves image data with an IFZ file name extension Logging data Saves measurement data with a CSV file name extension
93. NC 25 RUN OUT ON during measurement mode 11 NC 26 BUSY OUT ON during process execution 12 NC 27 OR OUT Overall judgement result 13 Nc 28 ERROR OUT ON during error 14 Nc 29 STGOUT OUT Strobe trigger output 15 Nc 30 SHTOUT OUT Shutter trigger output 16 NC 31 NCT 32 COMOUTO Output signal common ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT and SHTOUT 1 Leave all signal terminals that are labeled NC open FQ SDU20 SDU25 RS 232C Pin Signal Names RS 232C Connector NOAA Pin No Signal name Function 1 NC Not connected 2 RD For RS 232C 9 3 SD For RS 232C 8 4 NC Not connected 7 5 GND Signal ground 6 NC Not connected 6 7 NC Not connected 8 NC Not connected 9 NC Not connected Pin numbers will depend on the external device being connected Refer to the manual for the personal computer or PLC being connected Use a compatible connector Recommended items Manufacturer Model Socket OMRON Corporation XM3D 0921 Hood OMRON Corporation XM2S 0913 Wiring FQ2 CH User s Manual Wiring The maximum cable length is 15m RS 232C Controller External device to be connected Signal name _ Pin No Pin No Signal name RD 2 id RD SD 3 SD GND 5 i GND RS CS control cannot be used Use a shielded cable Connection Method Align the connector with the socket and press it
94. OR signal OR NOT OUTO to OUTS output polarity OUT1 Polarity Output delay Output mode Output polarity Output time outputs BUSY ERROR OR OUTO OUT1 OUT2 overall judgement Panel Mounting Adapter Parallel Cable for FQ SDU1 Parallel Cable for FQ SDU2 parallel data output parallel I O connector 36 42 201 135 27 28 27 28 27 27 28 28 28 27 30 38 40 202 192 73 203 202 201 202 228 201 35 35 35 35 35 35 198 32 423 430 431 217 29 Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 214 parallel judgement outputs password PC Tool PNP Polarizing Filter using Position compensation position compensation items Position X Position Y Positive power supply and ground terminal block power supply switch Touch Finder preventing mutual interference of multiple Sensors Record separator Index 216 179 25 427 36 42 57 139 65 69 77 83 69 77 83 203 228 29 28 59 168 reference color re registering 204 RESET 38 40 restarting Sensor and Touch Finder 189 Retry Function 185 RS 232C connections 354 RS 232C connector 29 RS 232C no protocol commands 357 RS 232C no protocol communications 355 RUN 38 40 Run Mode 21 saved images displaying 157 saving data 133 174 saving image data 183 scene data saving 174 scene group data saving 174 scene retry 187 scenes changing 146 changing names 147 copying 147 deleting 147 switching 204 SD card available
95. Output 1 Press OUTO 2 Press OR2 Item 2 judgement OR2 output signal was assigned to OUTO 3 Assign the others in the following manner OUT1 OR5 OUT2 OR14 Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing The output timing of the OR signal or ORO to OR31 signals can be selected from two modes depending on the external device Selecting the OFF Timing e Level output default The status of the output OR signal is held until the next OR signal is output ON TRIG signal E ON for 1 ms min OFF d d ON BUSY signal ESS OFF ON while measure ments are being i 1 processed depends i on BUSY output ON conditions OR signal NG OK Overall judgement OR output ON for NG Held until the next judgement result is output uly Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual e One shot output The status of the output OR signal is turned OFF after a specified time has passed Setting range 0 to 1 000 ms ON TRIG signal ON for 1 ms min OFF 3 BUSY signal ON while OFF measurements are being processed depends on BUSY ON output conditions OR signal NG OK OFF i Overall judgement sh OR output ON for NG One shot output time Turns OFF Delaying the Output Timing When using one shot output the output timing of the OR signal can be delayed Setting range 0 to 1 000 ms ON
96. Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv GATE 32 bits 2 Command code Command code 32 43 bits 4 Response code Response code 32 45 bits 6 Response data Response data 32 a7 bits Signal Signal name Function Application method FLG Control Command This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor completes Command Completed execution of the control command response com This signal turns ON after the control command code munications response code and response data have been stored This signal automatically turns OFF when the Control Command Execution Bit EXE is turned OFF by the user PLC BUSY Command Execu This signal is ON while the Vision Sensor cannot execute Command tion Active a control command response com ms munications This signal is OFF while the Vision Sensor can execute a control command READY Ready This signal turns OFF when the Vision Sensor cannot Command execute a control command response com aaa EE munications This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor can execute acai a control command OR Overall judgement This signal turns ON when the overall judgement is NG Command Even if the OR output of parallel signals is set for a one response com shot output this signal will not be output at the same time munications This signal turns OFF when overall judgement is OK ERR Error This signal turns ON when an error is detected in the Sensor status Vision Se
97. Scene p 57 tion Partial input Used to make the image input range 752x8 to 752x480 Scene p 129 smaller Rotate 180 You can rotate the Camera image by ON or OFF default Scene p 190 180 Calibration setting Sets a registered calibration pattern Unregistered default New Calibra Scene p 155 tion or Calibration Data 0 to 31 Strobe output delay Sets the delay time for the strobe output 0 to 65 535 us default 0 us Scene p 228 E signal STGOUT in response to the trig ger signal 2 Strobe output time _ Sets the output time of the strobe output 0 to 65 535 us default 1 000 us Scene p 228 D signal STGOUT Trigger delay Adjusts the time until the Camera shutter 0 to 163 ms default 0 System p 58 opens after the trigger signal is received Add filter These commands are used to add mod Weak Smoothing Strong Smoothing Scene p 62 ify delete copy or change the name of Dilate Erosion Median Extract filter items and position compensation Edges Extract Horiz Edges Extract items vertical edges Enhance edges Back ground Suppression Image adjustment Trigger setup Add pos comp Model Shape Sear pos comp Search posi Scene p 65 tion comp Edge Edge position comp 2Edge position Scene p 65 comp 2ed midp comp Edge rot pos Comp Modify p 62 Delete p 62 Copy Bi E p 62 Rename 15 alphanumeric char
98. Sensor are written here Data output after measure ments Output area Output data from the Vision Sensor is written here Vision Sensor slave Command The control commands written to the Command Area are executed w Execution Measurement results are written to Response the Response Area of the PLC e Vision Status Flags e Command code e Response code e Response data After measurements Measurement results are written to the Output Area e Output data 0 to 31 e Character string to output Note A PLC Link uses three link areas to perform communications the Command Area Response Area and Output Area A PLC Link is not the same as the Serial PLC Link protocol used to connect PLCs together with serial communications An FQ2 Sensor operates as a TCP server Therefore the TCP connection must be made from the PLC Refer to the manual for the PLC for TCP connection methods The port number on the FQ2 Vision Sensor is always 9877 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link compatible Models OMRON Series SYSMAC CJ2 Interface CJ2 CJ2M CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W ETN21 Built in port in CPU Unit Supported Built in port only Ethernet Unit SYSMAC Cu1 CJ1H CJ1G CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W ETN21 CJ1M Supported Built in port only CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W ETN21 SYSMAC CS CS1H C
99. Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 706 Measurement angle Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 display sition Search Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 DX Logged data only 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 DY Logged data only 8 Position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 x Logged data only 9 Position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 Y Logged data only 11 Reference X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 SX Logged data only 12 Reference Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 SY Logged data only 14 Correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CR Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 122 condi Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 tions image sition 1 Previous image External Reference Parameter
100. Switching Hub HA Standard Ethernet cable Trigger sensor 1 O control PLC 24 V power supply a FL STC Special Ethernet Cable 1 0 cable RJ45 M12 Lighting Controller External Lighting eeen ie FL series 24 V power supply Parallel Interface Connection Connection through a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Setup Tool al Touch Finder FQ2 CH1 or PC Tool Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Trigger sensor Sensor control PLC 1 0 control PLC Special Sensor Data Parallel cable a Reena Unit cable for FQ SDUt lal FL STC Lighting Controller External Lighting Gy ce FL series 24 V power supply Connection with Standard Parallel Interface of the Vision Sensor Setup Tool Touch Finder FQ2 cH100000 M rigger sensor Sensor control PLC iii or PC Tool 1 0 control PLC J Special Ethernet VO cable a m Cable l RJ45 M12 a FL STC FL series Lighting Controller External Lighting 24 V power supply 24 V power supply RS 232C Serial Connection Setup Tool Touch Finder FQ2 CH100000 M RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit or PC Tool i RS 232C cable Sensor Data
101. TCP no protocol commands p 338 PLC Link You can control the Sensor and obtain measurement results simply by p 283 manipulating bits and words in the memory of the PLC EtherNet IP tag data links When you turn ON the Command Execution Bit at a specific memory p 241 address in the PLC a command in a specified memory area e g the DM Area or CIO Area in the PLC is read and sent to the Sensor The results of executing the command are written to specified words in the memory of the PLC These words are specified in advance You can use this method when the external device is a PLC a A PLC Link uses three link areas to perform communications the Command Area Response Area and Data Output Area A PLC Link is not the same as the Serial PLC Link protocol used to connect PLCs together with serial communications 2 The signal timing is equivalent to parallel I O i e command execution and data output are performed independently Note You can also use the parallel interface for other controls such as controlling measurements changing scenes clear ing errors and clearing measurement values If a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit is mounted you can output the judgement results of judgement conditions the measurement values from measurement items and the results of expressions through the parallel interface LT 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data U
102. TRIG signal S ON A When the measurement BUSY signal OFF 7 trigger is received the BUSY ON while measurements are in progress 99 signal turns ON and the READY signal turns OFF ON READY signal OFF while measurements are in progress OFF 192 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual e Create the ladder program to control the TRIG and IN5 input signals so that they do not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON If not a TRIG input error will occur and the ERROR signal will turn ON Operation When the Sensor Power Supply Is Turned ON The BUSY signal will operate as shown below when the Sensor s power supply is turned ON Create the ladder program in the PLC or other external device so that the BUSY signal is ignored while it turns OFF ON and OFF again for up to 5 s after the power supply is turned ON 24V Power supply 1 15s 1 3 5 s Turns OFF when the lq pig Sensor is ready for ON BUSY OFF Depends on the scene data Note Ve A J ki Sensor system is initializing You can mount a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to enable using other signals and increase the number of sig nals that you can use with parallel communications And in addition to outputting OR judgement results you can also use a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to output the judgement results of judgement conditions that you
103. The command code response code and response data are set when the Vision Sensor completes execution of the command 5 The Control Command Completed FLG signal turns ON 6 When the PLC detects that the Control Command Completed FLG signal is ON it turns OFF the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal 7 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Control Command Completed FLG signal The BUSY signal remains ON until continuous measurements are completed 8 During continuous measurements an OR of the measurement results is output each time a measurement is completed 279 FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP jeuseu y yBnosy Buyoauu0D 6 Note During execution of continuous measurements the BUSY signal remains ON The Vision Sensor will acknowledge the EXE signal only after the End Continuous Measurements command is executed Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled First data output Second data output j i i i i i i Io I H H gt i i TH EOE gon i k gt ae Dey Data Output ON i i i i Command Request Bit DSA Area signal OFF i ai i I i j i i i hat i i Data Output ON Response Completed GATE Area signal 1 1 OFF i j i i i i i i i i i i I i on h
104. Unit cable Parallel cable Special Ethernet Q i for FQ SDU2 Cable RJ45 M12 Sensor control PLC Q i 24 V power supply rigger sensor Sensor control PLC 1 0 coni rol PLC Connecting More Than One Sensors San i n FQ2 Vision Sensors 8 max V power supply g V FL STC FL series Setup Finder eee Lighting Controller External Lighting or PC Tool Special Ethernet Cable Switching Hub RJ45 M12 he Setup Tool can detect up to 32 Sensors and can connect to up to eight Sensors at the same time System Configuration FQ2 CH User s Manual Product Model number Remarks FQ Vision Sensor FQ2 CH1 M This is the Vision Sensor Touch Finder FQ2 D This is a setup console PC Tool The PC Tool can be used instead of the Touch Finder If you register as a member you can download the free PC Tool as a special service to purchasers Refer to the Member Registration Sheet that is enclosed with the Sensor for the member registration procedure and the download procedure for special member soft ware Parallel Interface FQ SDU1 You can connect a Sensor Data Unit to the I O cable connector on the Vision Sensor Sen
105. a ag Note The measurement results are written to the output area if data output is set The measurement results are not output if data output is not set BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 288 End Continuous Measurements Command Code 1030 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents ee 12 to 15 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0011 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents response aea OS 8to11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0011 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 at A the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 a 298 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Clear Measurement Values Command Code 2010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 ee ie a he 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 15 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Save Data in Sensor Command Code 3010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000
106. a BUSY signal OFF ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions Turned ON when overall judgement is NG Polarity of all output signals Positive signals OR signal ON GATE signal Gee GATE ON delay Output time 7 Output period pi f The total output time is as follows Output period x Number of output data items The RUN signal turns ON when measurements are enabled and the Sensor is in Run Mode Turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF Measurement begins and the BUSY signal is turned ON during the measurement process ROD When the measurement has been finished the measurement results are output using an OR sig nal and the DO to D15 signals and the BUSY signal is turned OFF A You can also set the BUSY output parameter so that the BUSY signal is turned OFF after the completion of data logging image logging or displaying results 5 After the BUSY signal turns OFF the GATE signal is turned ON when the time that is set in the GATE ON delay parameter in the communications settings has elapsed 2 6 The GATE signal is turned ON and then the GATE signal is turned OFF when the time that is set in the Output time parameter in the communications settings has elapsed 2 Set the GATE ON delay and output time for the GATE signal so that the total time does not exceed the output period Important Data Output Time and TRIG Signal Input Interval
107. and the Point coordinate 0 to 9999 Calibra 3 actual coordinates Actual coordinate 0 to 99999 9999 tion data T r xs lt Generate Used to create calibration parameters Calibra parame tion data ters Used to edit the model regions Calibra p 153 gt The procedure is the same as for setting tion data the model region for a Search Position v 3 Compensation item 3 S 5 5 Changes the size and position of the Calibra e gt measurement region tion data zi 3 N P Sets the Camera coordinates and the Point coordinate 0 to 9999 Calibra S actual coordinates Actual coordinate 0 to 99999 9999 tion data 5 lt Generate Used to create calibration parameters Calibra parame tion data ters s Coordi Used to edit the model regions The pro Righthand Lefthand default Calibra p 154 D nate cedure is the same as for setting the tion data 5 model region for a Search Position Com amp pensation item Origin Select the location of the origin of the Lowerleft Upperleft default or Center Calibra coordinate system tion data Magnifica Set the actual dimension that corre 0 0001 to 9 9999 default 1 0000 Calibra tion sponds to one pixel tion data Clear Clears the parameter settings for the cal ibration data Copy Copies the calibration data 5 Rename Changes the name of the calibration 15 alphanumeric characters max data s oO S
108. area in I O memory Bits Contents 18 i i a2 a ie 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 Output data DATA 0 0 32 bits 9 22 Output data DATA 7 7 32 bits 23 38 Output data ak DATA 15 15 32 bits 39 70 Output data eed DATA 31 31 32 bits 71 134 Output data DATA 63 63 32 bits 135 Signal Signal name Function Application DATA0 63 Output data 0 to 63 These I O ports output the output data that is Command specified for the data output method response commu The data that can be output is determined by nications the set value of the Output data size setting as follows 32 bytes Output data 0 to 7 64 bytes Output data 0 to 15 128 bytes Output data 0 to 31 256 bytes Output data 0 to 63 262 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Accessing Communications Areas Using Variables with NJ series Controllers With an NJ series Controller only variables can be used to access from the user program the I O memory addresses that are assigned to the communications areas Use the following settings Using Network Variables for Access Create user defined variables that match the structures of the communications areas of the Sensor Use the Sysmac Studio to define the variables Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual Cat No W504 for Sysmac Studio operating p
109. be set for each connection each application can communicate at its ideal refresh cycle For example interprocess interlocks can be transferred at high speed while the production commands and the status monitor information are transferred at low speed Important On a network to which many devices are connected performance may drop e g responses may be delayed or packets lost or communications errors may occur when there is temporarily high traffic on the network Test the operation under actual conditions before you start actual operation of the system FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 241 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 242 Data Exchange with EtherNet IP Data is exchanged cyclically between Ethernet devices on the EtherNet IP network using tag data links as shown below cc Target gt PLC Vision Sensor Input tag set name A Connection Output tag set name Connection from Input_101 FQ2 to PLC Tag DO Tag Input_101 Output tag set name B Connection Input tag set name Connection from Output_100 PLC to FQ2 Ethernet EtherNet IP Data Exchange Method To exchange data a connection is opened between two EtherNet IP devices One of the nodes requests the connection to open a connection with a remote node The node that requests the connection is called the originator and the node that receives the request is called the target Data Exchange Mem
110. byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes bytes 28 OF End code 00401010 Acquired value End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Parameter Descriptions Position compensation item number Command execution ended in an error Specifies the number of the position compensation item or filter item for which to acquire the data External reference num ber Specifies the external reference number 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Acquired value Returns the image adjustment data or threshold value 11 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 347 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 348 Set Image Adjustment Data 280F 00501010 This command sets parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Position compensation item filter External reference Set value 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes item number 4 bytes number 4 bytes 28 OF 00501010 Position compensation item filter External reference Setting item number 0 to 7 1 digit max number Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00501010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000
111. can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of PO Search P comp to data 0 for a binary output p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set Press 0 Data 0 Press Data setting Press P0 Search P comp KR NH s Press Position X X Settings fudcenert 8 A scroll DY Cance PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor Assigning More Than One Inspection Result to the Same Output Data You can assign more than one inspection result to the same data output to output all of the assigned results This is possible for the following inspection results Parameters for the same inspection item You can assign up to five inspection results The following procedure shows how to assign more than one inspection result to data 0 p gt In Out I O settings Output data setting Link data output Output data set 1 Press 0 Data 0 2 Press Multi data 3 Set the following items on the display to set expres sions Item Description Expression Register the expression to use to output multiple data Examples LPR 0 1 PO X PO Y LPC 0 1 PO X PO Y Const Used to insert
112. continuous measure ments are being performed 3 When measurement results are output the GATE signal is turned ON when the time that is set in the GATE ON delay parameter in the communications settings has elapsed 4 The GATE signal is turned ON and then the GATE signal is turned OFF when the time that is set in the Output time parameter in the communications settings has elapsed Al Set the GATE ON delay and output time for the GATE signal so that the total time does not exceed the output period 5 Continuous measurements end when the IN7 signal is turned OFF Note The ERROR signal will turn ON if the input command is not executed normally Set at least one data output for parallel judgement output and then read the OR signal when the GATE signal turns ON FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 223 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D 224 Outputting Measurement Results for Data Send Requests from the External Device Handshaking With handshaking measurement results are output after there is a data send request DSA signal from the external device Handshaking is effective for sequentially outputting many measurement results and it is a reliable way to transfer data 1 Measurement i processing External devica 1 completed BUSY signal 2 DSA signal turned OFF sent lt 3
113. corner of the figure 3 Use the cross key to align the figure with the search object The position of the figure can be adjusted by pressing the cross key Pressing it once will change the coordinate values by one pixel Hodel region FQ2 CH User s Manual Coordinates O Search p comp 56 235 97 8 849 Cancel 73 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken sobew uiye L e Changing the Measurement Region The region within which the model is searched can be changed In the default settings the whole display is set as the measurement region p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page Teach 1 Press lt Insp region on the right of the display The Insp region Display will appear Be nan 2 Adjust the size and position of the measurement re gion Change the size Press the frame at one corner The processing time can be shortened by making the region smaller Change the position Drag the figure to move it ABCDE 12345 Changing Output Coordinate Positions You can specify which part of the model to detect as coordinates during inspections Normally the center position of the registered model is used as the detection point p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Detection point 1 Use one of the following
114. data for the measurement p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach Drag the rectangle Drag a corner to 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure t Move it size ie Teena ment reference in front of the camera dodel region hp come 3 Move the rectangle to the location to be measured 4 Press OK ABCIDE 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display 12345 The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed Cancel 6 Press Back to end teaching The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Model image This is the partial image that is stored as the reference Reference position X These are coordinates of the model image that are stored as reference Reference position Y Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual 1 Press Judgement 2 Press each parameter and set the range that is to be judged as OK Set the range for each of the following parameters Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are taken Note Judgement O Search p comp Jud cement You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on
115. for character recognition and the actual result of reading the characters are detected and conditions are set to determine how accurately characters are read gt Inspect Inspection OCR Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement 2 Press each parameter and set the range that is to be judged as OK Set the range for each of the following parameters Con tinuous measurements will be performed for the images that are displayed Note Judgement e You can change measurement values that appear on the display on the Display Settings Display Press Kl Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display e You can automatically adjust the judgement conditions by using OK and NG workpieces Adjusting the Judgement Parameters p 130 Press Kl Auto adjustment on the right of the display to switch to the Judgement Condition Automatic Adjust ment Display 3 Press OK to enter the values Item Parameter Setting Description Judgement Similarity 0 to 100 Sets the similarity of the read characters that is to be judged as OK If any of the Defaults characters in the read character string has a similarity that is lower than the set Upper limit 100 value the judgement will be NG To judge incomplete or worn characters as Lower limit 60 NG set a high upper limit for the similarity Stability 0 to 100 Sets the stability of the read characters that is to be judged
116. i es 1 e i E i tit i Lt N Lit E VAE Command code it 1 prt OFF i Li i rit i tt i i i i i te i i i i k l I i i i i Command ON toe Execution Active 1 ae BUSY signal OFF mi j i i i i tt i i i i Ly i rid E oon READY signal rors Response ORFS S re S rt Area i rt i tid i tt I i i i OY Vor Response code is i pit OFF i tt i i i i i tt i i i i tt i i i i i te i i i i i im I i i i i ON i te i i i i i tt I i i i Response data 1i os OFF i tt tit i tt i i i i tt i i i i I te i Control ON i tt i i Command i tt i i Completed H Lt i i FLG signal OFF tt i j te i i i i i tt 1 i i i i te i i i i tt i i i i Overall judgement OR 1 it i MAd i L i tty i tt I i i i i tt i i i i te i i i i i tt I i i i j tt j I I i T tt There is no signal to acquire measurement results during continuous measurements 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Set the Start Continuous Measurements command code and the command parameters from the PLC while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 The Controller turns ON the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal The execution command is sent to the Vision Sensor 3 When the Vision Sensor receives the execution command the Command Execution Active BUSY signal turns ON the READY signal turns OFF and the command is executed Continuous measurements start at this time 4
117. in sync with the trigger input signal from an external device ON Trigger input TRIG OFF m Trigger delay 1 ON i H a shutter signal OFF Strobe output delay I I ON 1 STGOUT Strobe output time I OFF Polarity of all output signals Positive Controlling Operation from an External Device The following Sensor functions can be controlled with command inputs from an external device without connecting the Touch Finder Operation Description Reference Switching the scene This command changes the scene when the line process changes p 230 Clearing measurement This command clears the measurement values p 231 values The OR signal and D signals are not cleared Clearing an error This command turns the ERROR signal OFF p 232 The ERROR indicator is also turned OFF Re registering the model This command re registers the model p 234 Teaching This command uses the image that is currently being input to execute p 235 teaching for all of the registered items Clearing the OR and D sig This command clears the OR signal and D signals p 236 nals Saving data in the Sensor This command saves the current settings scene data and system data p 238 in the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 229 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Input Format IN7 to INO IN
118. incorrect recogni tion of 0 zero and O the letter O Any character recognized characters any characters except for symbols Any number from 0 to 9 recognized characters 0 to 9 Any letter from A to Z recognized characters A to Z Any symbol recognized characters Skip No judgement is made for the judgement conditions similarity or stability The detected character count is also not incremented FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings poi suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 74 Item Description Limits to the character Each line can have a maximum of 32 characters There can be a maximum of four lines format string Characters must be input from line 1 You cannot skip line 1 and set the character format string starting with line 2 If you leave any line blank the setting for the next line will be moved up to fill it You cannot specify a symbol by itself e You cannot specify more than one symbol consecutively e You cannot specify more than eight symbols on one line 5 Press a line to enter the character format for that line from the software keyboard that is displayed Enter s s3 the character format for each line and press the OK MALLAS Symbol Skip Button Cancel Cancel Press ABC to enter alphanumeric characters Special Cancel Cancel 6 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The detailed parameter
119. is counterclockwise when coordinates are specified Lefthand Coordinate 0 System X 4 Positive direction Y Righthand Y Coordinate Positive direction System 0 X Origin Upperleft Lowerleft or Center Default Lowerleft Select the location of the origin of the coordinate system Upper left Lower left Magnification Calibration 0 0001 to 9 9999 Default 1 0000 Set the actual dimension that corresponds to one pixel FQ2 CH User s Manual p gt Setup Mode Calibration 1 Select the data region to set from Calibration data 0 to Calibration data 31 Press Modify Q N Press lt q Parameter on the right of the display Wud ify 0 Calibration dotag Enett ic ient Cuefficient A a lent amp ient P ient E ivient F 4 Set the following parameters Coordinate Origin and Magnification 5 Press OK Coordinate Parameter 0 Calibratiun data Cance 6 The calibration parameters will be displayed ad ify O Calibration datat The items in the calibration parameters are the same as those for point specification Aa he lent amp ient p ient E Cuefficient F Selecting the Calibration Pattern to Use In the Camera setup select the calibration pattern to use Note You can select the calibration pattern for each scene p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press 4q Select calib data on the right of the dis pl
120. is implied The value will be affected by operating conditions 2 This is a guideline for the time required for the capacity of the Battery to be reduced to 60 of the initial capacity No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by the operating environment and operating conditions FQ2 CH User s Manual z L seolpueddy Specifications and Dimensions gai Dimensions FQ2 D30 D31 Unit mm Ueo J IER ji y i l ze wis ST 19 2 1 Provided on the FQ2 D31 only 422 z Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual Panel Mounting Adapter FQ XPM Unit mm 36 9 116 R 95 85 133 4 116 Panel cutout dimensions 11141 11141 z 423 FQ2 CH User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions rd L seolpueddy Sensor Data Units Specifica
121. is no problem with the default value of 10 but if noise is mistakenly detected as an edge make this value higher e Max density change Min density change lt Noise threshold gt No edge found gt Measurement result NG Max density change Min density change Noise threshold gt Edge found Perform measurement settee Max densities 60 2 _________ Max densities 25 _ T Measurement D ngoe pore isnt Min densities 10 region 4 Min densities 15 region 60 15 gt 30 25 10 lt 30 Judges that there is an edge and performs measurements Judges that there is no edge measurement result is NG Screen Display When the Edge Level and Noise Level Are Changing A bar showing the threshold level moves up and down on the graphic as the edge level noise level value changes A cross key cursor will also appear at the detected edge position No edge is detected if color change is under noise level Edge level Blue ABCDE Noise level Yellow J 12345 gt Paypal a Screen display when the edge level are changing e Increasing Processing Speed for Edge Position Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time LT Changing the measurement region p 74 FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 85 sobew uiye L e Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Position The following values can be logg
122. mA max residual voltage 2 0 V max 3 Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA FQ2 CH User s Manual z L seolpueddy Specifications and Dimensions my Dimensions FQ2 CH10010F M CH10050F M CH150100F M CH15050F M Unit mm The mounting bracket can be attached to any side Optical 46 SR 44 axis is a B aaoo l 4 M4 2 o 3 Depth 6 a 1 4 20UNC o Depth 6 11 38 Cie 20 57 2 38 42 Mounting hole dimensions Two 4 5 dia 20 0 1 Tightening torque 1 2 N m FQ2 CH10100F M CH10100N M Unit mm FQ2 CH15100F M CH15100N M Optical 46 44 axis i p gt 00000d a 4 M4 5 2 Depth 6 Y bod 1 4 20UNC yo He Depth 6 yoy 3 38 18 2 20 49 2 38 42 Mounting hole dimensions Two 4 5 dia 20 0 1 Tightening torque 1 2 N m 418 Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual See the diagram below when mounting bracket FQ XL2 is attached Unit mm 57 Optical axis A J G 59 on EEE l gt Nla foo lt S D i a 4 M4 1 4 20UNC Depth 6 Depth
123. master data 6 Press Verif master data and select the character string in the master data to use for verification Note You can automatically register the read result from teaching from an external device in the character string with number that is specified Auto teach No in the master data 7 Press Back Parameter Setting Description Verif master data OFF default All master data Master data 0 to 31 Sets whether to verify the read character string against a character string that is registered in the master data To verify the read character string against the master data select the character string to use for verification Master data regist Registers a character string in the master data Auto teach No OFF default Master data 0 to 31 Sets the character string in which to automatically register the read result for teaching from an external device FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings 105 suonjoedsu dN Bu s 74 Setting the Measurement Parameters When you perform teaching the measurement parameters are set automatically If the automatic settings are incorrect for any reason e g the read result was incorrect set the measurement parameters manually and then perform teaching gt Inspect Inspection OCR Details Tab Page Meas parameter Neas Parameter Character color Detailed Parameters
124. measurement or continuous measurements the data is automatically stored in the output area i e O memory addresses or variable that is specified for the input tag in the PLC via the connection from the Vision Sensor to the PLC 2 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Types of Communications Areas For EtherNet IP communications the following three communications areas are used in the PLC to perform communications Areas Used for the Different Control Methods Command response communications 1 Command area the Vision Sensor to execute This is the area to which you write control commands for 2 Response area area This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes the results of control commands executed from the command Data output after mea 3 Output area surements PLC Vision Sensor fbi eee E sees oo SO Set Be se cel ected cc et eect ee en ee eee pete e 1 Output Tag Set Input Tag Set Output Tags 1 Command area Input i connection The following control commands The control commands that are to Sensor are written to the Vision Sensor written to the Command Area Control inputs are executed i Command code Command parameters j Input Tag Set Output Tag Set Input Tags oe eee PN Measurement results are 2 Response are
125. methods to move the cross Drag the cross cursor cursor to the desired position The position of the cross cursor will be the coordinate PEUTIE position that is output This position is registered rela GaL tive to the model region g k ABCDE e Drag the cross cursor to move it Press lt q Console on the right of the display to dis 12345 play the console You can use the cross cursor on the console to change the coordinate values one pixel ata EE EU el time The detection coordinates will automatically return to the center coordinates of the model if you change the model region Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data Parameter Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Scroll X This is the measurement X amount of position compensation Scroll Y This is the measurement Y amount of position compensation Correlation 0 to 100 This is the measured correlation Position X 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position X Position Y 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position Y When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the abo
126. model with DC power supply time settings Touch Finder data saving trend monitor Auto display Display range Number of data TRIG TRIGO trigger delay trigger retry FQ2 CH User s Manual 247 356 310 286 46 356 21 68 38 40 54 29 62 139 148 148 148 138 172 38 40 33 61 48 69 434 436 50 25 24 128 309 126 126 131 131 131 189 420 189 420 420 189 174 140 140 141 38 40 58 59 188 U V W Z two Touch Finders connected at the same time two edge midpoint compensation two edge position compensation updating software version versions Weak Smoothing wiring Sensor Sensor Data Units Touch Finder zooming 181 90 87 432 189 61 35 35 37 43 156 Index 445 cl x pul A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number at the bottom of the front and back covers of this manual Cat No Z331 E1 01 Revision code 01 October 2012 Original production e Revision History FQ2 CH User s Manual Authorized Distributor
127. of the Sensor Doing so may allow dust dirt or water drops to enter the Sensor and damage it Other Do not use this product in safety circuits associated with nuclear power and human life Do not disassemble repair modify deform by pressure or incinerate this product Dispose of this product as industrial waste Connect the special products Sensor Touch Finder Cables The product might break down or malfunction if you use a part not included in the special products If you notice an abnormal condition such as a strange odor extreme heating of any product or smoke immediately stop using the product turn OFF the power and consult your dealer The Sensor surfaces become hot during use Do not touch them Do not drop or subject the products to shock Use the Optical Character Recognition Sensor FQ2 CH Touch Finder FQ D Sensor Data Unit FQ SDU Cables FQ WN FQ WD FQ WU and FQ VP Battery FQ BAT1 and AC Adapter FQ AC Using other than the specified products may cause fire burning malfunction or failure If the product has a lock mechanism always make sure it is locked before using the product Laws and Regulations Standards This product complies with the following EC Directives and EN Standards EC Directive No IEC61010 1 EN Standards EN61326 1 2006 FQ2 CH User s Manual Precautions for Correct Use Observe the following precautions to prevent failure to operate malfunctions or undesirable ef
128. position when it was registered Two edge Position Compensation This position compensation item detects edges in two directions If the specified density is detected it is recognized as an edge When an edge is recognized the image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it was registered Registered position of the edge Measurement region for edge 0 Edge search direction for edge 0 p gt Image Image adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 Measurement region for edge 1 Edge search direction for edge Density of edge to be found 1 y The image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it was registered Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp Press Edge 2Edge position comp Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Two edge Position Compensation below Press OK Press Back FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 87 sobew uiye L e Detailed Settings for Two edge Position Compensation The settings for the Two edge Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position inspection item Make the settings in the same way as for the Edge Position Compensation Item However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Teaching Set the measurement re
129. ref position Y SYO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion Y Edge1 ref position X SX1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion X Edge1 ref position Y SY1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion Y Ref midpoint X refer SMX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence midpoint X Ref midpoint Y refer SMY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence midpoint Y Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string Edge rot pos Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 Comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll DT 180 to 180 0 Edge0 position X X0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position Y YO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position X X1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position Y Y1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 180 to 180 0 Edge0 ref position X SX0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion X Edge0 ref position Y SYO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion Y Edge1 ref position X SX1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion X Edge1 ref position Y SY1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion Y Reference angle STH 180 to 180 0 OCR Judgement JG 2 No judgment not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK
130. response in the response area i e I O memory addresses or variable that is specified for the input tag in the PLC FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 243 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single measurement or continuous measurements the Vision Sensor will automatically output the data for the measurements that are specified for output in advance to the I O memory addresses or variable that is specified for the input tag in the PLC This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the PLC When handshaking is enabled the data is output from the Vision Sensor only when the condition to receive that data are met at the PLC PLC Built in EtherNet IP port in CPU Unit Vision Sensor 1 0 memory or variables communications areas Output area Data ata Up to 64 specified data items can be automatically output EtherNet IP tag data links To output data you must specify in advance the data to output up to 64 items after the measurements are executed To output character strings that are read with the OCR and other inspection items the character strings to output are also specified in advance You must also specify in advance the output area i e O memory addresses or variable for the input tag to store the data in the PLC After a single
131. responses from the Vision Sensor to the PLC in the I O memory of the PLC This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform continuous measurements or change the scene without using special communications instructions e Input Connection to Sensor PLC to Vision Sensor The commands that are stored in the I O memory of the PLC are sent to the Vision Sensor Output Connection to PLC Vision Sensor to PLC Responses from the Vision Sensor to the control commands are stored in the PLC I O memory addresses or vari ables that are specified for the response area PLC CPU Unit Vision Sensor Continuous measurements VO memory or variables Switching the scene number etc communications areas Input connection to Sensor Command area Response area To send a control command you write a control command to the command area i e a variable or I O memory address in the PLC that is specified for the output tag and then turn ON the Command Execution EXE Bit As a result the control command is sent through the input connection from the PLC to the Vision Sensor A control command does not need to be sent to execute measurements for the TRIG bit The measurement is executed simply by turning ON the TRIG bit The Vision Sensor executes the control command and sends a response back to the PLC through the output connection from the Vision Sensor to the PLC The PLC stores the
132. same time from a locally installed Touch Finder and a remotely installed Touch Finder FQ2 CH User s Manual Convenient Functions for Operation 181 suoloun JUs UsAUODD Z 182 Operations during Simultaneous Connection of Two Touch Finders The following restrictions apply to operations when two Touch Finders are simultaneously connected to the same Sensor Operation Sensor status Changes Editing model regions in Run Monitor Operation is possible with only one of the Touch Finders Mode Operation will be possible from the Touch Finder where Model region was pressed first Run Mode operations Setup When either of the Touch Finders changes to Setup Mode operation will no longer be possible from the other Touch Finder When that occurs a message will be displayed on the other Touch Finder saying that another Touch Finder is currently setting up the Sensor A ig Switch sensor icon will be displayed on the lower right of the display When Run Mode operations are possible again Run Mode will be displayed in the initial status Logging Monitoring or setup Logging including file logging and recent results logging can be performed by only one of the Touch Finders If logging is enabled on both of the Touch Finders logging will be performed only on the Touch Finder that was connected to the Sensor first An error will be displayed on the other Touch Finder when it connects to the Sensor and logging will au
133. space 178 formatting 178 information 178 operations 177 slot 28 SD card formatting 178 search position compensation 76 Sensor connector 29 Sensor data saving all Sensor data 174 Sensor Data Unit Cable 37 39 430 Sensor Data Units 29 424 Sensor information 189 sensor monitor 139 Sensor selection 181 Sensor system data saving 174 Sensors renaming 190 specifications 415 switching 50 setting data communications specifications Parallel Sensor Data Unit 220 setting the data to output automatically after measurements 357 EtherNet IP 253 no protocol RS 232C 357 no protocol TCP 310 PLC Link 288 Setting the Retry Function 185 FQ2 CH User s Manual setting up communications specifications EtherNet IP no protocol RS 232C no protocol TCP PLC Link setting up Ethernet setting up no protocol communications Setup Mode shape search position compensation SHTOUT Shutter speed slider source image startup display startup mode startup scene startup setting Statistical data statistical data logging STGOUT straps Strong Smoothing subnet mask Sub pixel Summary of Requirements to Manufactures Summary of Requirements to User Switch Sensor Switching Hub system configuration takt time TCP no protocol communications test measurements continuous test performing threshold average maximum minimum time Touch Finder Touch Finder information model with AC DC battery power supply
134. straight into place then fix it with the screws on both sides of the connector Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting a Cable Peripheral devices may be damaged if the cable is connected or disconnected with the power ON FQ2 CH User s Manual Wiring G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu 42 I O Signal Circuit Diagrams NPN Input Circuit Output Circuit EO ere era Poros gee eal WP ete to A arene oe ee Input terminal i 3KQ i i i O 6 gt Te A AN g Output terminal og J L i El og i I 5 Internal toaa T S 24 1 al rou S oF i i circuits i oe i faf i se e SP T Sii i i i COMI i i s i i i i COM_O PNP Input Circuit Output Circuit E AN E E A we ee sy eel N E E E Input terminal 3kQ i l i 5 oo Wy on ee i COMO i B E i i E i eL Se z i S i Internal i T i ST ey Zai g circuits L OoOo Pi o Jal oee SSP rr t E i i i Load iCOM_ i i i l i Output terminal Preventing Chattering The Sensor is equipped with an anti chattering function but if the chattering is 100 us or longer a faulty input may occur Input signals of 99 us or shorter are ignored Signals of 100 us or longer are treated as input signals e Use no contact output devices e g SSR or PLC transistor output for the input signals If contacts e g a relay are used cha
135. the Data i i Output Completed GATE signal has Data Output ON turned ON loads the data and turns Completed OFF the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal 4 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Data Output Request DSA signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Data Output Completed GATE signal i j i i i i i i i i i i i H 5 The Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is turned ON from the PLC T and a request is made to output the following data If the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is not turned OFF within the time that is set for the retry interval in the PLC Link settings the Data Output Completed GATE signal is forced OFF and data output is completed GATE signal Output data O to ON 255 DATAO to DATA255 OFF Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Disabled ON 1 Data is output automatically when the Output data 0 to 255 DATAO to DATA255 The PLC turns ON the Control Command Completed FLG signal and then gets the output data OFF 1 FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections Vision Sensor completes a measurement 307 jeuseu y yBnosy Buyyoauu0D 6 Sample Ladder Programming Command Response Communications The following sample program is used to perform single measurements The single measurements command lower bytes 1010 upper bytes 0010 is sent to the Vision Sensor Firs
136. the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 233 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Re register Model This command is input from an external devices such as a PLC to re register the models for registered inspection items based on the image that was just input Inspection items Re registered data Search Position Compensation and Shape Search Position Compensation Models Edge Position Compensation None Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1001000 11001000 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 signals o gt lt 11001000 i ON for 1 ms min ON i IN7 signal OFF Allow 5 ms min i and then turn ON IN7 ON i BUSY signal Commandexecuton OFF ON ACK signal l OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal is ON during re registration of the model ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time as Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data
137. the file is saved It does not indicate when the measurement was made The recent log data will be cleared if the scene is changed Changing the Format for Saving Measurement Data The output CSV file format can be changed according to the external device LT Changing the File Format p 168 FQ2 CH User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 173 suoloun JUs UsAUOD Z 7 7 Saving Sensor Settings The Sensor settings are saved in flash memory inside the Sensor This section describes how to back up the settings in and restore them from an SD card or other external memory Backing Up Settings in External Memory gt sz Setup Mode Save to file Setting Tab Page 1 Press the data to save N Applicable Data Data Enter the file name in 15 characters or less After entering the file name press OK The data will be saved and the display will return to Save to file Storage location Save to file ne group data a ibration data calibration group data ibration Calibration group data data Description Scene data The file name extension is SCN sensor_name SCN The following data is backed up for each scene e Settings for all inspection items e Order of inspection items Scene group data The file name extension is SGP sensor_name SGP All scene data is backed up Dictionary data The file name extension is DIC sensor_name DIC D
138. to 4 digits decimal Default 4 digits Negative Sets the way to express negative numbers or 8 Default 0 Sup Sets whether to use zero suppression Yes or No pressed Default No Field sepa Sets the field separator OFF comma tab space CR LF rator or CR LF Default OFF Record Sets the record separator OFF comma tab space CR LF separator or CR LF Default OFF For Binary Decimal Set the decimal output form for numerical Floating point or fixed point output form data default Fixed point a Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual e When Output Format Is ASCII Set the parameters for integer digits decimal digits negative numbers 0 suppression the field separator and the record separator e Output Format Measured value of Measured value of _ Measured value of data 0 data 1 f data 7 on Note The data output method digits and data separators can be changed as needed Example Integer digits 5 decimal digits 3 negative number expression zero suppressed none field separator comma record separator CR felelt lefts isle feeb EL I Heleki 1lelslelei sls ff an re Measured value of data 0 Measured value Measured Field separator Measured Delimiter of data 1 _ value of data 2 i value of data 7 Field separator Field separator Field separator Record separator
139. type 43 3 Get Product Code UINT Product code 1645 4 Get Revision Structure Revision of Identity object 1 1 Major Revision UINT Major revision 1 Minor Revision UINT Minor revision 1 5 Get Status WORD Current status of device 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Serial number Lower 4 bytes of MAC address 7 Get Product Name SHORT Product name FQ Series STRING Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 01 hex Get_Attribute_All Yes Yes 05 hex Reset No Yes Parameter 0 1 OE hex Get_Attribute_Single Yes Yes 438 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications FQ2 CH User s Manual 1 2 02h Message Router Object Class Attributes None Instance Attributes None Services None 1 3 06h Connection Manager Class Attributes None Instance Attributes None Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 54 hex Forward Open No Yes 4E hex Forward Close No Yes 1 4 F5h TCP IP Interface Class Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Revision UINT Revision of the object 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Maximum instance number 1 3 Get Num Instance UINT Number of object instances 1 Instance Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Status DWORD Interface status 0x0002 Depends on the device 2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD Interface Function Flag 0x0002 Depends on the device 3 Get Set Configura
140. unwanted changes to settings If a password is set you cannot change from Run Mode to Setup Mode without entering the password Setting a Password gt sa Setup Mode Sensor settings Password settings 1 Press Password on off and press ON 2 Press Enter password 3 Entera password containing up to 15 characters and press OK Clearing the Password p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Password settings Press Password on off and press OFF Entering the password when switching from Run Mode to Setup Mode 1 Ita password is set and you try to change from Run freee Mode to Setup Mode the following password entry display will appear Enler password gt si Setup Mode Sensor settings 2 Press the text box A keyboard display will appear Enter the password and press OK If the password is correct the Setup Mode will be displayed e This password restricts only the operation to switch from Run Mode to Setup Mode It does not restrict other operations e If you forget the password contact your OMRON representative for the procedure to clear the password e The password is deleted when the Sensor is initialized FQ2 CH User s Manual Convenient Functions for Operation 179 suoljoun JUs UsAUDD Z Capturing the Displayed Image The current display on the Touch Finder or PC Tool can be captured and used in text files and other files on the computer The captured images ar
141. values from 0 to the lower limit are converted to level 0 and input values between the upper limit and 255 are converted to level 255 to remove as the background any places that are not within the specified brightness range 255 Output value 0 Lower limit Upper limit 255 Input value You can use either of the following methods to set the upper and lower limits of the brightness range to extract with the Background Suppression item FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken e sobew uiye L e Enhancing the Contrast of a Specific Area You specify the location on the image to enhance the contrast p gt Image Image adjustment Background Suppression Modify 1 Press lt Suppression level on the right of the gms i ae display 2 Drag on the image to specify the location to empha size the contrast The contrast in the specified range will be reset to be tween 0 and 255 3 Press OK 4 Press Back Extracting Only a Specified Range of Brightness You set the upper and lower limits of the brightness range to extract with the Background Suppression item p gt Image Image adjustment Background suppression Modify 1 Press lt lt Suppression level on the right of the display 2 Press lt RGB setting on the right of the display 3 Setthe upper and lower limit values of the brightness prey 4Beckoreund range FQ Series 4 Press B
142. when lev p 207 els are changed Clearing an error This command turns the ERROR signal OFF p 209 Continuous measurement Continuous measurement is performed while this command is input p 195 Clearing measurement values This command clears the measurement values p 210 Saving data in the Sensor This command saves the settings data to the Sensor p 211 External teaching This command executes teaching for all applicable inspection items p 212 Important Change to Expanded Mode before you input any command other than a command to change the scene If you change to Expanded Mode you can use any of the commands However in Expanded Mode you can change to only 16 scenes with the parallel SCENE command instead of 32 scenes Changing the Scene This section describes how to change the line process by changing the scene Wiring Color Signal State Description Input Mode Standard Mode Expanded Mode Gray INO Scene number Scene number Specifies the scene number 0 to 31 0 to 15 INO to IN4 correspond to the binary Green IN1 bits of the scene number To change to scene 1 in Standard Red IN2 Mode specify 00001 White IN3 Purple IN4 ON Yellow IN5 ON Trigger to change the scene Orange OUT1 Processing in progress default BUSY The signals shown at the left are used Refer to the following information for signal wiring LT 2 4 wiring p 35 Controlling Operati
143. 0 0020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command ACA 12to 15 8to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents eae EE Pent tgs 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired scene number Select Scene Command Code 1000 0030 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command AEE 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Scene number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents E Oh ia fs 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections oe jeuseujy yBnowu Buyosuu0y 6 Get Image Adjustment Data Command Code 1010 0040 Command PLC to Vision Sensor
144. 0 for a parallel output p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Data settings Press Data 0 Settings Press P0 Search P comp Press Position X X Judgeme RON Scroll X DX Scroll Y DY Reference X SX Bad FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 217 8 UONDBUUOD J eed e y m eyeq Bumndy no pue uoneiado uljnu 218 To register something to data 1 or higher repeat this pro cess Setting the Output Form p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Output format 2 Press Output form 3 Set Data form to Binary or BCD Stopping Data Output You can also prevent the output data that is set from actually being output The default setting is Yes p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Parallel Data Output Setting Details Tab Page Output parameter Data output Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text Data name Description Data range string JG Judgement This is the judgement result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registe
145. 000 0000 0101 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Get Inspection Item Data Command Code 1020 0040 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command Area 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents Eee a a G 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 1 000 times the 47 0000 0000 0000 oooo Yaue FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 303 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Set Inspection Item Data Command Code 1020 0050 Command PLC to Vision Sensor Firstwordof Bis Contents O a 12to 15 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 45 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000
146. 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 9 0000 0000 0000 Gono 4200 times thie alle Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents PES ROS So aoa amp 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 E mg 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 45 0000 0000 0000 0000 Oo Tee We sul Get Software Version Information Command Code 0040 3000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command Bios 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents E en Cn atts 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0100 0000 ISR ele E the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 PEREON iS sut 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 aioe version 1 000 times the 276 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Timing Chart for EtherNet IP Communications Performing Measurements with the TRIG Signal Command Area Execute Measure ON ment TRIG signal OFF Command Execution ON Active BUSY signal OFF ON Response READY signal OFF Area ON Overall judgement OFF OR 1 2 3 4 5 1 Measure
147. 0000 Paneo Pri Relerence 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Value to set 1 000 times the 9 0000 0000 0000 ooo0 value Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents e G 8to11 4107 0 to 3 42 ooot ooo0 ooto 0000 Commandcode eo won orar eo onan code whi ne 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 45 0000 0000 0000 0000 P 6 suit Get Software Version Information Command Code 3000 0040 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command AIG 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents sly es Moni 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0100 0000 niveau EA id me 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 aE aui 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 iia version 1 000 times the 304 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Get Latest Error Information Command Code 5000 0020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 7 0000 0000 0010 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF
148. 0001 0000 ie the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 15 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Re register Model Command Code 4010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 29 u104 3 yBnoiy Buosuuog 6 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0100 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 a OEA o ne 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG External Teaching Command Code 4020 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 Command code E 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Reset Vision Sensor Command Code F010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 1111 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual There is no response for a reset operation Get Scene Number Command Code 100
149. 12_05 10 22 10 21 CSV Logging data measurement data Logging image image data sensor_name LOGIMAGE img_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS_NNN IFZ Example The following name would be used for measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10 2012 img_2012_05_ 10 22 10 _21_000 IFZ NNN is a serial number that is added when images are logged at the same time 1 Files are stored in the following folder when the PC Tool is used My Documents OMRON FQ SDCard 2 You can add a character string to the beginning of the file name 3 You can change the img at the beginning of the file name Tra Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 CH User s Manual File format Statistical data The data is saved in the following CSV format Number of measurements number of OKs number of NGs OK rate NG rate delimiter Image data Image data is saved in a special format for OMRON Vision Sensors The file name extension is IFZ Measurement data Measurement data is saved in CSV format The same format is used to log the most recent results to files for the inspection item region and expression region in the file logging function LT File Logging Format Items 8 and 9 on p 168 e The saved recent measurement data cannot be loaded back into the Sensor and displayed on a trend monitor or histo gram e The data and time are not recorded with the measurement data The file name is created from the time when
150. 3 12 Appendices 12 1 Menu Tables 0 cc cece cee eee eens 366 Image Tab Page wi vssceee eee eae swebav ce bab ae eee eee ea eae eee 366 Inspect Tab Page piesci te ete ae bts Se ee ote 368 In Out Tab Page i 5stehe ee oie ee bach eu eerie eee esis 371 Test Tab Page kreit Ae eee cess be tree Se eee e 376 Run Tab Page from Setup Display 0 000 0000 377 TOOL riniog prea Ree hel es ea dowd nando ant Dele ea OR 377 Common Menu Commands 00000 e eee eee 387 12 2 External Reference ParameterS 00 0 cece eee eee eee 388 Weak Smoothing ss is se cc eve ee nee ee cee eee eee ee cee eee eee 388 Strong Smoothing 2 0c0e cise ves ee cece tuuri cree dese bees eee 388 Dilat eane e wetird wae Meech aed apes eh Na ee a eo 388 Erosion Median Extract Edges Extract Horizontal Edges Extract 389 Background Suppression 0 0 00 e eee eee 389 Shape Search Position Compensation 0000000 390 Search Position Compensation 000 000 0002 eee ee eee 392 Edge Position Compensation 0 0 0 2 e ee eee eee 394 Two edge Position Compensation 0 000002 e eee ee 396 Two edge Midpoint Compensation 0 0002 e eee 399 Edge Rotation Position Compensation 0 00 402 OGRE inia ea ty es Ae ar Pee ae a ee eS 405 FQ2 CH User s Manual FQ2 CH User s Manual 12 3 Specifications and Dime
151. 30 D30 This is the result of expression 30 Data 31 D31 This is the result of expression 31 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data Parameter Setting Description J00 to J31 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG This are the judgement results of expressions 0 to 31 Results 0 to 31 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 This is the results of expressions 1 to 31 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Testing and Saving Settings 5 1 Performing Test Measurements csee000 5 2 Shortening the Measurement Takt Time 5 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters 5 4 Checking a List of All Inspection Item Results 5 5 Saving Data to the SeNSOl sscseseeeseeeees 5 1 Performing Test Measurements After completing the settings in the Image Inspect and In Out Tab Pages move to the Test Tab Page The displayed image is measured automatically This is called a test measurement A test measurement is used to verify that the settings that have been made will produce stable results and if necessary to fine tune the settings An overall judgement of all inspection items can be performed Test measurements can be performed for through images default or saved images Performing Test Measurements with Samples p gt
152. 5 is turned OFF Settings P In Out I O setting I O terminals Input Input mode Press Expanded mode Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Sample Ladder Program The following sample program is used to input a IN5 signal to perform continuous measurements Continuous measurements will be started when W0 00 turns ON and stopped when W0 01 turns ON wo 00 t Continuous measurement command bit Wwo 00 Continuous measurement command bit T0000 OUT1 BUSY signal wo 01 t Continuous measurement stop bit I O Signal Allocations When the continuous measurement command bit W0 00 turns ON the command parameter for continuous measurements 00000 is output to Q 1 INO to IN4 If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after the command parameter is output the command input for continuous measurements IN5 is turned ON and continuous measurements start When the continuous measurement stop bit W0 01 turns ON the command input for continuous measurements IN5 is turned OFF and continuous measurements stop Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 CIO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 ClO 1 15 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection
153. 6 Plate Screw set double head Cushion Mounting hole dimensions Two 4 5 dia 2040 1 Tightening torque 1 2 N m FQ2 CH User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions 419 z L seolpueddy Touch Finder Specifications Item Model with DC power supply Model with AC DC battery power supply FQ2 D30 FQ2 D31 Number of connectable Sensors Number of sensors that can be recognized switched 32 number or sensor that can displayed on monitor 8 Main Types of measurement displays Last result display last NG display trend monitor histograms func tions Types of display images Through frozen zoom in and zoom out images Data logging Measurement results measured images Menu language English German French Italian Spanish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Korean or Japanese Indica LCD Display device 3 5 inch TFT color LCD tions Pixels 320 x 240 Display colors 16 777 216 Backlight Life expect 50 000 hours at 25 C ancy Brightness Provided adjustment Screen saver Provided The time setting can be changed Indicators Power indicator color green POWER Power indicator color green POWER Error indicator color red ERROR Error indicator color red ERROR SD card access indicator color yellow SD card access indicator color yellow SD ACCESS SD ACCESS Charge indicator color orange CHARGE Opera Touch screen M
154. 7 IN6 INS IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO Poo o T en Execution Command Changing the Scene This command changes the scene to shift to a different process Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 01 Input the scene number as a binary value 10100001 Changes to scene 1 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 Oo X 10100001 Changes to scene 1 signals a i ON for 1 ms min ON A IN7 signal E l Allow 5 ms min fa and then turn ON IN7 1 l ON BUSY signal command execution OFF a ON ACK signal e E ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is ready to take measurement and it is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal indicates that the Sensor is currently changing the scene Do not input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON The process that is currently being executed and the com mand that is input will not be executed correctly ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time all Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Input Signals to Change the Scene Signal Function INO to IN4 These signals specify the scene number 0 to 31 IN5 Turn ON IN6 Turn OFF IN7 This signal function
155. 9 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 188 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 190 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 191 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 192 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 193 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 397 z L seolpueddy 398 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data l
156. 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 188 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 190 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 191 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 192 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 193 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 194 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 195 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 196 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 197 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category
157. Also you can perform image processing with filter items only to enable processing with position compensation items In that case only the position information from position compensation is applied to the image to be measured For details refer to Using Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items on page 67 Filtering the Images Filter Items You can filter the images that are taken by the Camera to make them easier to measure This is used in the following cases e To cut unnecessary backgrounds so that they are not measured To remove noise e To stably find the edges of marks when other edges have been clearly extracted Applicable Filters Selected filter item Description Weak Smoothing Strong Smoothing Used when there are minor irregularities in the measurement object The image is feathered to reduce unevenness Dilate Used when there is dark noise Dark noise is removed by dilating bright places Erosion Used when there is bright noise Bright noise is removed by eroding bright places Median Used when there are minor irregularities in the measurement object Unevenness is reduced while maintaining outlines Extract Edges Extracts image edges between light and dark Extract Horiz Edges extract horizontal edges Extracts horizontal edges between light and dark in the image Extract vertical edges Extracts vertical edges between light and dark in the ima
158. Arranging the Trend Monitor Display The display range for the vertical axis and display conditions for the horizontal axis can be changed Note You can display only one parameter in the Trend Monitor You cannot display multiple parameters at the same time Disabling Automatic Selection of the Display Range 1 Press lt q Auto display on the right of the trend monitor 2 Press OFF e Changing the Display Range of the Vertical Axis 1 Press lt q Display range on the right of the trend monitor 2 Set the minimum and maximum values of the measurement values Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs FQ2 CH User s Manual e Changing the Number of Values That Are Displayed 1 Press lt Number of data on the right of the trend monitor 2 Select the number of values from 200 400 and 1 000 e Trend monitor data is held until the power supply is turned OFF e You can select whether to display all data on the trend monitor or only data for which the overall judgement is NG Logging settings are applied to the trend monitor as well However they are not applied to trend monitor when it is displayed in Setup Mode LT Icheck recent measurement trends recent results logging p 170 Histograms The distribution of each measurement value can be checked on a histogram The most recent 1 000 measurement values are displayed on a graph Switches the display to Switches the dis
159. Automatically after Measurements You can specify the measurement data to output automatically to the PLC after measurements Data That Can Be Output Data Output You can output up to 64 data items 256 bytes with the output data data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item Assigning Detection Results to Output Data p 253 Assigning More Than One Detection Result to Output Data p 254 Outputting Character Strings You can output a character string for each of the inspection items that reads a character string such as the OCR inspection item Also when reading the character string fails you can output a specific character string that is set in advance LT Outputting Read Character Strings p 256 Assigning Inspection Results to Output Data You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of PO Search P comp to data 0 for a binary output p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set Press 0 Data 0 Press Data setting Press P0 Search P comp KR NH Press Position X X Settings Judg
160. CD panel and is not a malfunction e Influence of Temperature Changes on Optical Axis Due to the characteristics of the materials that are used in the Sensor changes in the ambient temperature may cause the center of the optical axis to change by several pixels Imaging Elements Due to the specifications of the CMOS image sensors that are used in the Vision Sensor lines may appear in images for some measurement conditions or gain settings These do not indicate defects or faults in the Vision Sensor Also there may be some pixel defects but these do not indicate defects or faults in the Vision Sensor 3 Battery e Do not use or charge the Battery with other than the specified products Do not charge the Battery with other than the specified AC adapter When using the Touch Finder the battery cover screw must be tightened 4 AC Adapter e During maintenance and when not using the Touch Finder for an extended time remove the power plug from the outlet e Do not bend the power cable past its natural bending radius Do not use the AC Adapter with other than the specified products e If a voltage higher than 380 V is applied there is a risk that the capacitor will be damaged the pressure valve will open and vaporized gas will be emitted If there is a possibility that a voltage higher than 380 V will be applied use a protective device 5 Maintenance and Inspection Do not use thinner benzene acetone or kerosene to clean
161. Code 45 Response 6 Response data Data 7 S_EIP Output Area Input Bits i is 2 ad de 2 oS v amp S 4 8 i 2 a 9 DATAO 10 Output Data 25 DATA8 26 264 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual 2 Defining the Variables Define variables for the data links for the communications area data that is used in EtherNet IP commu nications These variables use the data types that were defined above in procedure 1 Variable Variable type Network Publish Data type Application attribute E lPOutput Global variable Output S_ElPOutput For data links to the command area EIPInput Global variable Input S_EIPInput For data links to the response and output areas 3 Exporting the Variables That Were Defined on Sysmac Studio Export the variables that you defined so that you can use them on the Network Configurator An exported CSV file is created 4 Network Configurator Settings 1 Import to the Network Configurator the CSV file that you exported from the Sysmac Studio The variables that are imported will automatically be registered as tags 2 Set the connections as shown in the following table Originator device PLC settings Input tag set EIPOutput Target device Sensor settings Output tag set Input101 Output tag set EIPInput Input tag set Output100 5 Accessing the Communications Areas from the User Program The def
162. DE read and then press OK The measurement region will be set LARSA 4 The characters that were read with the initial param eters will be displayed above each line You set the format of the characters to recognize to pre ff vent reading similar characters incorrectly This display Mo pats will not appear if the character format is already regis tered Number of characters to read in the character string e Types of characters letters numbers symbols fixed characters 2 etc Enter the types of characters in order and the number of characters according to the actual character string that was read Example 2012 12 20 Line 1 H HHHH 1_ If the number of characters that were actually read is less than the number of characters that was specified in the character format it is assumed that reading the characters failed 2 If alphanumeric characters are directly specified as fixed characters but the characters that were read do not match the specified characters it is assumed that reading the characters failed The following table gives detailed specifications for the character format Item Description Characters that can be Numbers entered in the charac 0to9 ter format string Letters AtoZ e Symbols apostrophe hyphen period colon slash wildcard Wildcards You can use wildcards to specify characters For example you can use wildcards to prevent
163. Data FQ2 CH User s Manual 3 Press Modify on the menu Note Performing Similar Calculations At Different Locations Rename The name of the calculation can be changed 16 characters max Copy Previously registered calculation expressions can be copied 4 Set the expression by selecting items from the Da ta Const and Math Tab Pages The expression will be displayed in the space under Ex pression settings Do not exceed 255 characters in the expression Item Description Const Press this to input constants or a mathematical operator The following operators can be used addition subtraction x multiplication and division Data Press this to use measurement data reference values and judgement results of other items Math Press this to use functions Expression Notation Expressions must have the following notation 10 X E Text string corresponding to the item position correction data inspection item or calculation settings Filter item or position compensation item Enter P and the item number Inspection item inspection item number calculation settings data ZO Example Finding the distance between the centers of gravity of inspection item 1 and inspection item 2 using a function opr ee Inspection item data Function Example Subtracting 120 from the calculation result of expression 0 DOO 120 00 Constan
164. Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 S5 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 nme cal for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion XO 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion YO 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 one for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion X1 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion Y1 318 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 nme nm for detected edge mid sition 1 Data logging ON point position X 319 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ane for detected edge mid sition 1 Data logging ON point position Y 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0
165. EASURE or M Execute Measurement This command executes one measurement If data output is not set only the measurement is performed If data output is set the measurement is performed and the result is returned as response data lt Command Format gt mtetarsqelrfeler e ME Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Measurement Delimiter O Be D When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Measurement result The measurement result is output as the response when data output is set The measurement result is not output when data output is not set LT Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 311 EHU Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Start Continuous Measurements This command starts continuous measurements If data output is not set only continuous measurement is performed If data output is set continuous measurement is performed and the results corresponding to the number of measurements made are returned as response data lt Command Format gt mjefajsjujrje ifejcr mt f eler Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally fo x orl Measure Data returned for the number of ment result continuous measurements made Measure Delimiter When the Co
166. FF IN3 Turn ON IN4 and IN5 Turn OFF IN6 Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for executing teaching Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed Clearing the OR and D Signals This command clears the OR signal and D signals Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1000010 11000010 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signa OFF ON i TRIG signal E ON for 1 ms min FF o 9 TRIG is input ON x BUSY signal OFF o Measurements executed ON OR signal OFF 1 1 1 1 ON GATE signal e OFF GATE ON delay Output time 1 v t i i i 1 i 1 v 1 1 1 INO to IN6 signals 1000010 1 IN Allow 5 ms min ha and then turn ON IN7 1 3 1 JON for 1 ms min ON NY IN7 signal my OFF fj 1 1 1 1 1 i i ON ACK signal OFF ACK output time Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal does not change while clearing the OR and D signals However do not clear the OR and D signals while the BUSY signal is ON The command will not be executed corr
167. FF a timeout error will oc cur This is timeout time 3 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Bumndy no pue uoneiado uljnu 225 Offsetting the Timing of Outputting Measurement Results The measurement result is output when the TRIG signal turns ON the number of times set for the Number of delay parameter This allows you to delay the output timing of the measurement result from the Sensor according to the actual processing timing of the line Example Sequential Feed Line That Uses a Star Wheel In a line like this you can synchronize the output timing of the measurement results and the discharge timing of NG products that are detected OK lt ren output NG Discharge device OR If you set the Number of delay parameter to 4 the measurement result output is delayed by four TRIG signals e With synchronized output the number of times that the TRIG signal turns ON is counted Therefore use synchro nized output only when only one measurement result is output for each measurement Output either the parallel judgement or data Use a measurement trigger only for single measurements If you perform continuous measurements by inputting a command the output timing will not be correct and the Sensor may malfunction may Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Dat
168. FQ2 CH User s Manual Memory Assignments and Commands Memory Assignments This section describes the assignments of the command area for the input connection to the Sensor and the response and output areas for the output connection to the PLC Input Connection to Sensor PLC Originator to Vision Sensor Target Command Area Bits Contents US ah ase 2 at 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 ERCLR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv TRIG EXE Control sig nals 32 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv DSA bits 2 Command code Command code 32 43 bits 4 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 32 bits 5 6 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 32 bits 7 8 Parameter 3 Parameter 3 32 bits 9 Signal Signal name Function Application method EXE Control Command Turn ON this signal from the PLC to send a control com Command Execution Bit mand for the Vision Sensor to execute response com Set the control command code and parameters before munications you turn ON this signal Turn OFF the EXE signal from the PLC when the Control Command Completed FLG signal from the Vision Sen sor turns ON TRIG Execute Measure Turn ON this signal from the PLC to send a command to Command ment execute a measurement response com LA f mu
169. H User s Manual 434 12 6 Requirements from Regulations and Standards Summary of Requirements to Manufactures For Europe EN 60825 1 Safety of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide Summary of Manufacturer s Requirements Requirements Classification ae Class 1 Class 1M Class 2 Class 2M Class 3R Class 3B Class 4 Description of Safe under As for Class Low power As for Class Directintra Direct intra High power hazard class reasonably 1 except may eye protec 2 except may beam view beam view diffuse reflec foreseeable behazardous tion normally be more haz ing may be ing normally tions may be conditions if user afforded by ardous if user hazardous hazardous hazardous employs aversion employs optics responses optics Protective housing Required for each laser product limits access products necessary for performance of functions of the Safety interlock in pro tective housing Designed to prevent removal of the panel until accessible emission values are below that for Class 3R Designed to prevent removal of the panel until accessible emission values are below that for Class 3B Remote control Not required Permits easy addition of external interlock in laser installation Key control Not required Laser inoperative when key is removed Emission warning device Not required Give audibl
170. Images That Were Taken 69 sebew Huriye L e Select the Results to Output You can use multiple conditions to determine which results to output from all the objects detected with a correlation at the candidate level or higher Only the results that meet all the specified conditions are output p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Extraction condition and adjust the candi PERE SSAC date level so that only objects higher than a certain correlation are detected ABCDE 12345 z I p aie eg e ere Extraction condi Range Description tion Candidate level 0 to 100 Outputs only objects with a correlation that is higher than the specified candidate level Note The processing time changes if you change the candidate level Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Details Tab Page Output parameter Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual e Unstable Search Results Inclined Measurement Objects Adjust the Angle range parameter to increase the range in which a search is made for the model The Search inspection item j
171. J eed e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado ulijonuonp 228 Changing the Settings of the I O Signals Changing the Seitings of the Output Signals Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing You can change the timing of outputting the measurement result with the OR signal after finalizing the measurement result according to the needs of the external device OJ Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing p 200 Changing the Judgement Output ON Conditions You change the ON condition for the OR signal to turn ON the signal when the judgement result is OK or when it is NG BE Changing the Judgement Output ON Condition p 202 Adjusting the End Timing of the BUSY Signal You can change the end timing of the BUSY signal BA Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing p 202 Changing the Output Polarity of the Output Signals You can change the ON OFF output polarity of the output signals p gt In Out I O setting I O Output 1 Press Output polarity and select the ON OFF polarity for all output signals Item Parameter Description Output polarity Positive default You can reverse the ON OFF conditions of the output signals Negative For example when the BUSY signal uses positive polarity the signal is ON while the Sensor is processing something If you change the setting to negative polarity the Sensor will be ready to receive data or signals when the BUSY signal is ON Applicable Output Signals e RUN
172. Manual 9 4 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications You can use no protocol communications between an external device such as a PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control from the external device via command response communications or to output data after measurements You can use these communications methods simultaneously Command Response Communications With no protocol communications the external device sends a control command to the Vision Sensor and receives a response back from the Vision Sensor This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform single measurements or change the scene External device Vision Sensor p Command gt Changing the scene number DOi e Executing one measurement etc i Lot lt m Response OK etc The external device sends a command as an ASCII string e g MEASURE for a single measurement The Vision Sensor then returns a response such as OK NG or some value Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single or continuous measurement the Vision Sensor will automatically output to an external device e g a PLC the data for measurements that are specified for output in advance This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the external de
173. NG 00 107 Troubleshooting Unstable Read Results 0 00 00 cee eee eee 107 Using Model Dictionaries to Recognize Custom Characters 107 Outputting Read Characters to an External Device 112 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 112 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for OCR 0 113 Failure to Read Characters 00 0 c eee eee 113 4 4 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 114 Calculationy 225 E EEA N gpk Ao ek ate ee ei tie tee Ole hd eae 114 Examples for Calculation 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee 116 Procedure Calculation 0 0 cee eee eee 116 FUNCUON LIST duce nae ae wees ae ake NR n aa au kauba bee 118 5 Testing and Saving Settings 5 1 Performing Test Measurements 200 00 eee cece eens 126 Performing Test Measurements with Samples 126 Performing Test Measurements with Saved Images Re measuring 126 5 2 Shortening the Measurement Takt Time 20 0 00ee eee 128 Checking the Measurement Takt Time 0 000 eee eee eee 128 10 FQ2 CH User s Manual Increasing Image Input Speed 0 0 0000 129 Changing the Image Input Mode 0 00 e eee eee 129 5 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters 200 0 cece eens 130 Adjusting Judgement Parameters While Looking at Measurement Results
174. NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data Latest error code i pone p990 200g 0000 Errors Stored in the Error History p 360 u194 4 yBnoiy Huyosuu0D 6 FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections a05 306 Timing Chart For PLC Link Communications Command Response Communications ON 1 The command code and command Command code parameters are set from the PLC OFF 2 The PLC turns ON the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal The execution command is sent to the 6 When the PLC detects that the Control Command Completed FLG Command ON T H signal is ON it turns OFF the Control Execution Active Control Command gt Command Execution Bit EXE signal BUSY signal Execution Active OFF 7 When the Vision Sensor detects that Command parameters i E tit Vision Sensor 3 When the Vision Sensor receives the OFF f R execution command the Command i tt i KR Execution Active BUSY signal turns i 14 A tt ON the READY signal turns OFF i I I i Control Command ON and the command is executed Execution Bit EXE lej 4 The command code response code signal OFF i i and response data are set when the i i H Vision Sensor completes execution i i i i i of the command ON a i 1i 5 The Control C Command code i i The Contro ommand Completed i i FLG signal turns ON OFF i ES i i i i i i i i Li i i
175. Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r cr Delimiter FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 323 u194 3 yBnosy Buyoauu0D 6 CLRERR Clear Errors This command clears the error output status error output and error indicator lt Command Format gt Command je fRielr e for Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter DATASAVE Save Settings This command saves the current system data and scene groups to the Sensor lt Command Format gt Command oo oo jo faltjals alve jor Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter 2 O D oad Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual MODEL Re register Models This command re registers the model for a registered search inspection item such as the Search Position Compensation item lt Command Format gt Command mjo o e cr Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally jo kK Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r or Delimiter 2 Be RESET Resets the Sensor This command resets the
176. Note There are different methods that you can use to connect the Sensors For example you can automatically connect to the Sensors that are recognized by the Touch Finder or you can manually register the Sensors to connect LI 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensor p 160 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration FQ2 CH User s Manual You can set the conditions for taking images to use in inspections To enable accurate judgements the following adjustments are made for the conditions for taking images and the images themselves Adjusting the Focus I r 52 Adjust the focus of the Lens Taking Bright Images of Dark Objects and Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects QJ p 55 Adjust the shutter speed and gain Improving the Image Quality of Metallic and Other Shiny Surfaces HDR BA p 56 Make adjustments for shiny objects or metallic surfaces For a Sensor with built in lighting attach a polarizing filter to cut specular reflections Trigger Delay LT p 58 Adjust the timing of taking an image with the Sensor Filtering the Images Filter Items O 61 Apply filters to adjust the images that were taken Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items BA p 65 Recognize measurement objects that are not in a consistent location and move them to the center of the image FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting Conditions for Taking Images cm sebew Huriye L 3 3 Adjusting Image Qua
177. OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR SUITABILITY FOR USE THE PRODUCTS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE NOT SAFETY RATED THEY ARE NOT DESIGNED OR RATED FOR ENSURING SAFETY OF PERSONS AND SHOULD NOT BE RELIED UPON AS A SAFETY COMPO NENT OR PROTECTIVE DEVICE FOR SUCH PURPOSES Please refer to separate catalogs for OMRON s safety rated products OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulati
178. OMRON Optical Character Recognition Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual D ocr EQ 208 1989 tee Ely lt Cat No Z331 E1 01 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the FQ2 CH This manual provides information regarding functions performance and operating methods that are required for using the FQ2 CH When using the FQ2 CH be sure to observe the following e The FQ2 CH must be operated by personnel knowledgeable in electrical engineering e To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly to deepen your understanding of the product e Please keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to whenever necessary APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS Please Read Introduction E Installation and Connections 2 Taking Images 3 Setting Up Inspections 4 Testing and Saving Settings E Operation 6 Convenient Functions 7 Controlling Operation and Outputting 8 Data with a Parallel Connection Connecting through Ethernet E Connecting with RS 232C w Troubleshooting N Appendices 2 Optical Character Recognition Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS DOCUMENT Please read and understand this document before using the products Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by
179. ON 1 OFF 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y display sition 702 Detected edge mid Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 point position X display sition 703 Detected edge mid Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 point position Y display sition 704 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X0 display sition 705 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 YO display sition 706 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X1 display sition 707 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y1 display sition FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 401 z L seolpueddy 402 Edge Rotation Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Position compensation Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DT Logged data TH only 99 999 9999 6 Detected edge po
180. OR operation indicator will light and the ERROR signal will turn ON 360 Error Histories FQ2 CH User s Manual Note You cannot check the error codes from the Touch Finder Use the command to acquire the most recent error infor mation for the connection method EtherNet IP LT Ip 272 e PLC Link LT p 305 e No protocol Communications TCP LT p 336 e No protocol Communications FINS LT p 351 Checking the Error Histories e Checking the History of Errors That Have Occurred in the Sensor p Setup Mode Sensor settings Error history View history Errors will be displayed in order with the most recent ones on top 3 1N input error 4 1N input error 5 i rror e Checking the Log of Errors That Have Occurred in the Touch Finder p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Error history View history Clearing the Error Histories e Deleting the History of Errors That Were Detected in the Sensor p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Error history Delete history e Deleting the History of Errors That Were Detected in the Touch Finder p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Error history Delete history FQ2 CH User s Manual Error Histories 361 Bujooyseiqno If an error occurs while making settings on the PC Tool or the Touch Finder an error message will appear on the display For these errors the ERR indic
181. Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1000001 11000001 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF ON i TRIG signal a ON for 1 ms min OnE TRIG is input ON ja BUSY signal OFF Measurements executed ON OR signal i OFF 7 D signals gt X Data ON i i GATE signal o OFF 1 GATE ON delay Output time ON ERROR signal OFF i INO to IN6 gt K 1000001 signals No Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 N lt 1 N for 1 ms min ON Ny IN7 signal i OFF ON ACK signal 4 OFF ACK output time Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal does not change while clearing errors However do not clear an error while the BUSY signal is ON The command will not be executed correctly OR This signal does not change while clearing errors DO to D15 These signals do not change while clearing errors GATE This signal does not change while clearing errors ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function INO Turn ON IN1 to IN5 Turn OFF ING Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for clearing an error Set
182. Position comp The result of position compensation is displayed All Region The measurement regions for all inspection items are displayed Calculation Displays the results for each expression registered to an inspection item FQ2 CH User s Manual Configuring the Run Mode Display 139 uoneiado 9 140 6 3 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs Measurement result histories can be checked using the trend monitor and histograms To display trend monitors or histograms in Run Mode you must make the following setting in advance in Setup Mode gt s Setup Mode TF settings Logging setting ON Trend Monitor Changes in the measurement values of the selected inspection item against time can be observed from the graph It becomes possible to predict when malfunctions may occur or to analyze the cause of the malfunction by checking the trends in the measurement values The most recent 1 000 measurement values are displayed on the graph Trend monitor Display Switches the display to R n Fo the previous inspection Switches the display to the item number N 48 0ms sea next inspection item number Specifies the eT TZ parameters to display X on the Trend Monitor B Measurement values N alelo Changes in the measured value of the selected inspection item are displayed against time in a graph gt ii Run Mode Select display Trend monitor
183. Pp and press NG Teach A BUDE 12345 M m a 4 Repeat these steps for at least three samples each 5 Press Back The best judgement parameters will be set automatically 6 Press OK T Adjusting the Judgement Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual Note You can select one of the following three patterns as the judgement method P 4 Select the method on the right side of the display 1 Threshold minimum The lower limit of the variations between OK object is used as the judgement condition 2 Threshold average The median value between the OK object variations and NG object variations is used as the judgement condition 3 Threshold maximum The upper limit of the variations between NG object is used as the judgement condition Number of registered samples Press NG Teach to register Press OK Teach to register Measurement value FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Judgement Parameters Ki sBuijas Bulaes pue Buns L G Individual judgement results for all inspection items can be checked in a list The individual inspection items can be selected to change the judgement parameters p gt Test Continuous test 1 Press All results region to display the list Note Judgement parameters can also be changed from this display Select an inspection item and press lt q Adjust judgement 2 Checking a List of All Inspection Item
184. R Judgement results Reference values Calculation Z0 Upper and lower Calculation limit judgement Calculation judgement results D0 et r a Overall judgement m m m ORlogic result of calcula m a Upper and lower Q tions JG Calculation limit judgement Calculation judgement Expression 31 results D31 result J31 a Logging p 164 Touch Finder SD card Computer Ethernet output The results can be allocated to data 0 to 31 for Ethernet output FQ2 CH User s Manual The results can be recorded as logging data Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 115 suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 74 Examples for Calculation Finding the Lowest Similarity of Characters Read with OCR Inspection Items OCR items in inspection items 0 and 1 are used to find the lowest similarity of characters read Region 0 Region 1 ABC DEF e Region 0 similarity from OCR item in inspection item 0 I0 SIM e Region 1 similarity from OCR item in inspection item 1 I1 SIM e Lowest similarity from OCR items in inspection items 0 and 1 min l10 SIM I1 SIM Procedure Calculation 1 Press Inspect Calculation Sets the expression Setting Expressions 1 Press Expression on the Settings Tab Page Inspect gt Calculation 2 Press the expression number that you want to use 116 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item
185. RODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this document is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the product may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be resp
186. Results FQ2 CH User s Manual 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor Until you have saved your settings explicitly to the memory in the FQ2 Vision Sensor the settings are only stored temporarily They will be lost if the power is turned OFF Execute Save data after you have finished making your settings The FQ2 Vision Sensor will remind you to do so with a message if you switch from Setup Mode to Run Mode You can use this feature to keep the previous settings and discard the new settings if desired but keep in mind that all settings that are not saved explicitly are replaced by the settings that are stored in the memory of the FQ2 Vision Sensor the next time you turn ON the FQ2 Vision Sensor Do not turn the power supply OFF while data is being saved The data that is being saved may become corrupted p gt Test 1 Press Save data 2 Press Yes data and touch Note e Scene data and system data can be saved in this way O1 Scene data and system data details p 174 e Measurement data and image data cannot be saved in this way OJ Logging measurement data p 165 e Settings data can also be backed up to an external memory O Saving settings p 174 FQ2 CH User s Manual Saving Data to the Sensor 133 sbum s Bulaes pue Buns L G MEMO K Saving Data to the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Operation 6 1 Starting Operation 0 00 cece eee 136 6 2 Configuring the Run Mode Display
187. Run Mode Graphic Graphics Details All results System p 139 pattern Region Statistical data Trend monitor p 181 Histogram Display Sets the image to update in Run Mode Latest image Last NG image p 157 update mode LCD back Brightness Sets the brightness Oto5 System p 158 light ECO Enables ON or disables OFF ECO ON OFF System p 158 mode Mode 384 Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Ethernet System p 46 9 Auto Used to automatically connect to the IP OFF default ON p 46 be address of the Touch Finder Specify sensor You can set any of the Sensors for con 0 0 0 0 to 223 255 255 254 default p 160 nection to the Touch Finder and register 0 0 0 0 p 161 them IP address Inputs the IP address of the Touch a b c d p 46 Finder a 1 to 223 Valid only when the IP address setting b 0 to 255 is set to Fixed c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 Default 10 5 5 100 Subnet mask Inputs the subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p 46 Valid only when the IP address setting Default 255 255 255 0 is set to Fixed Gateway Sets the default gateway address When 1 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 p 46 the IP address setting is set to Fixed Default 10 5 5 7 Search unreachable Displays the IP address if the same IP sensors address is us
188. S1D CS1G CS1W EIP21 CS1W ETN21 SYSMAC CP1 CP1L CP1W CIF41 CP1H CP1W CIF41 SYSMAC One NSJ Mitsubishi Electric Corporation MELSEC QnU Universal model QnUDECPU Supported Built in port Series Model name CPU name CPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDECPU QO6UDECPU Q10UDECPU Q13UDECPU Q20UDECPU Q26UDECPU NSJW ETN21 only Interface Built in port in CPU Unit Supported QnUDCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDCPU QO6UDCPU Q10UDCPU Q13UDCPU Q20UDCPU Q26UDCPU QnUCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO2UCPU Basic model QnCPU Q01CPU QOOJCPU QO0CPU Ethernet Unit QJ71E71 100 Q71E71 B2 QJ71E71 B5 MELSEC Q model High performance QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO2CPU QO02HCPU A1SJ71QE71N3 T FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 285 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Series MELSEC QnAS Model name CPU name CPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Interface Built in port in CPU Unit Ethernet Unit A1SJ71QE71N3 T Setting Up PLC Link Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details 01 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 46 Changes to settings are not applied until the Vision Sensor is restarted Therefore save the settings a
189. Sensor lt Command Format gt Command Rfe ls felt ferl Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally If process is completed normally the Sensor is restarted There is therefore no response When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r or Delimiter FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 325 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 TEACH Perform Teachin This command performs teaching for all of the registered inspection items lt Command Format gt Command Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r Jor Delimiter Scene Control Commands SCENE or S Acquire Scene Number This command acquires the scene number currently being used lt Command Format gt sceme e Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally n l Delimiter Scene number 2 digits max o k or Delimiter peo Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r cr Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Scene number The acquired scene number currently used scene number is returned Example When Scene 0 Is Being Used lt Command gt sole f
190. Set the input interval for the TRIG signal so that it is equal to or greater than the total output time If the input interval for the TRIG signal is shorter than the total output time the output data buffer will eventually overflow and output data will be discarded Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Continuous Measurements Example Only Data 0 Set for Parallel Data Output Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 ON bo signals are m Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 OFF OFF ON M t Measurements M IN7 signal Measurements ES nee __Measurements _ OFF i executed l executed executed l executed Continuous i Continuous measurements ended 1 1 measurements 1 7 i ON started i R BUSY signal 1 F T r F OFF y y ON while measurements are being processed Turned ON when overall judgement is NG depends on BUSY output conditions Polarity of all output signals Positive OR signal DO signal lt Datao gt i ON BEA GATE signal ER GATE ON delay Output time i i Output period 1 The RUN signal turns ON when measurements are enabled and the Sensor is in Run Mode 2 Turn ON IN7 while INO to ING are OFF If this status is held while the BUSY signal is OFF contin uous measurements will begin and the BUSY signal will remain ON while
191. Signal Application cation Power Power supply These terminals are for the external power supply 24 V supply 24 V END Important Wire the power supply separately from other devices If the wiring for other devices is placed together or in the same duct as the wiring for the Vision Sensor the influences of electromagnetic induction may cause the Sensor to malfunction or may damage it Inputs TRIG This terminal is the trigger signal input INO to IN5 These are the command input terminals Outputs OUTO OR By default this is the OR output signal overall judgement The assignment can be changed to RUN READY an individual judgement signal from ORO to OR31 the STGOUT strobe trigger output or an expression judgement from 0 to 31 OUT1 BUSY By default this is the BUSY output signal The assignment can be changed to RUN READY an individual judgement signal from ORO to OR31 the STGOUT strobe trigger output or an expression judgement from 0 to 31 OUT2 ERROR By default this is the ERROR output signal The assignment can be changed to RUN READY an individual judgement signal from ORO to OR31 the STGOUT strobe trigger output or an expression judgement from 0 to 31 Note The assignments of I O signals can be changed OJ Section 8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection p 191 FQ2 CH User s Manual Wiring 35 G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu 1O Signal Circuit Diagrams
192. TF settings Update Step 2 Update the software for the Sensor e Updating from the PC Tool 1 Store the update file you obtained in the following directory My Documents OMRON FQ SDCard UPDATE SENSOR 2 To update the software in the Sensor press det Setup Mode Sensor settings Update e Updating from the Touch Finder 1 Place the update file that you obtained directly in the root folder of the SD card 2 Insert an SD card into the Touch Finder 3 To update the software in the Sensor press aa Setup Mode Sensor settings Update The software will be updated automatically Do not turn OFF the power supply until updating the software has been completed The Sensor or Touch Finder may not start normally if power is turned OFF during the update ee Updating the Software FQ2 CH User s Manual For LED devices class classification to indicate dangerous level and safety standards are stipulated in respective countries Take necessary safety preventive measures according to the standards Warning labels are supplied as accessories with products that comply with the Class 2 Laser Product Classification Attach them to appropriate positions near the Sensor where they can be easily noticed A WARNIG LEDA St LED RADIATION _ DO NOT STARE E LeOFaRERWCE INTO BEAM Max 65mW Max 65mW 400 700nm 400 700nm JFA2 LEDHA CLASS 2 LED PRODUCT JIS C 6802 2005 JIS C 6802 2005 3 LED Safety FQ2 C
193. TRIG signal ON during a one shot measurement The ERROR signal will turn OFF when measurement is executed correctly This function can be used in Run Mode only Seitings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left Gray INO OFF Command parameter for clearing errors are used Refer to the following Green IN1 OFF ae information for signal wiring Red IN2 ON White IN3 OFF LU 2 4 Wiring p 35 Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for clearing errors Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Light blue OUT2 ERROR ERROR signal default Timing Chart j 1 Turn OFF INO to IN1 and IN3 to IN4 and turn ON IN2 INDtoIN4signals KK Tum ON the INS signal while the i Allow 5 ms min and then BUSY signal is OFF to clear the error iturn ON INS ON IN5 signal i ON for 1 ms min OFF ON BUSY signal i FF 9 ON ERROR signal OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 209 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Clear Measurement Values This command clears the measurement values that are stored in the Sensor However the OR signal and the output signals that are assigned to OUTO to OUT2 are not cleared This fun
194. The measurement value is displayed next to the param eter name Continuous measurements will be performed for the images that are displayed Note You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display 3 Press OK to enter the value Lower limit Upper limit Blue for OK Red for NG Parameter Setting Description Scroll X aoe The amount of position compensation in the X direction is displayed Scroll Y The amount of position compensation in the Y direction is displayed Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of edge Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 position X for an OK judgement Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of edge Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 position Y for an OK judgement FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken a e Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Edge pos comp Details Tab Page Output parameter e Changing Edge Detection Conditions You can change the followin
195. Timing with the External Device You can use one of the following data output methods to align the timing of data output with an external device Aligning with the GATE Signal Status No Handshaking p 221 Outputting Measurement Results for Data Send Requests from the External Device Handshaking LT p 224 Offsetting the Timing of Outputting Measurement Results LT p 226 Setting Data Communications Specifications p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output 1 Item Press Output control and select the output control method e None p 221 Output control e Handshaking LT Ip 224 Output period 100 i e Synchronized Output LT Ip 226 rissa Set the communications specifications for data out put Output mode Level o Parameter Description Output control None default Hand None Measurement results are output without synchronizing with the external device shaking or Sync Out Handshaking Measurement results are output while synchronizing with the PLC put Sync output Measurement results are output without synchronizing with the external device Output period 2 0 to 5 000 0 ms This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to None 10 0 ms default Set the period for outputting measurement results 220 Set a value that is longer that the GATE ON delay plus the output time and shorter than the measurement interval If you set a value
196. Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Input Signals Signal Function INO to IN2 Turn OFF IN3 Turn ON IN4 and INS Turn OFF IN6 Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for executing re registration of the model Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed Teaching This command uses the image that is currently being input to execute teaching for all of the registered inspection items Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1001001 11001001 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON masizi RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 signals 0 gt lt 1001001 ea ON for 1 ms min ON IN7 signal OFF ON ACK signal H OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal is ON while teaching is being executed ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Bumndy no pue uoneiado ulijonuop 236 Input Signals Signal Function INO Turn ON IN1 and IN2 Turn O
197. a 7 The previous data will be bytes overwritten Adjust the Zeros are written to timing with handshaking to unused bytes get the data Output data 63 Setting the Output Format p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output 1 Press Output format 2 Press Output form 3 Seteithera floating point decimal or a fixed decimal for the output form Item Description Setting range Output form Set the output form for numerical data Floating point or fixed point default Floating point Outputting Character Strings You can set whether to output the character string that results from reading Outputting the character string is possible for the following inspection results OCR The procedure for outputting the character string is given here for two inspection items p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Link data output Output data set 1 Select the inspection item for which to output the character string 2 Setthe following items on the setting display ee Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Parameter Setting Description String output ON OFF OFF default Sets whether to output the character string that results Yes from reading Partial output ON OFF No default Yes Sets whether to specify the range of characters to output Output string setup 1 to 128 for OCR Sets the output range
198. a Acquisition Setting Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00401010 Get Image Adjustment Data Acquires data from a position compensation p 274 item or filter item 00501010 Set Image Adjustment Data Sets the specified data in a position compen p 274 sation item or filter item 00401020 Get Inspection Item Data Acquires the inspection item data p 275 00501020 Set Inspection Item Data Sets the inspection item data to the specified p 276 data 00403000 Get Software Version Informa Acquires the software version p 276 tion After you execute the Reset command 0010F010 hex for the Vision Sensor turn OFF the EXE signal before the Vision Sensor restarts If you leave the EXE signal ON the Vision Sensor will restart repeatedly Command Details Start Continuous Measurements Command Code 0010 1020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command FE 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 O0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents oa eres e 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 45 0000 0000 0000 0000 A il a The measurement results are written to the output area if dat
199. a Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Timing Chart Operation When Number of Delay Is Set to 2 Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF ON TRIG signal OFF ON BUSY signal OFF OR signal DO signal ON for 1 ms min 1 2 3 4 5 i ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions Overall judgemeni Overall judgement Overall judgement Overall judgement Overall judgement result for 1 l en for 2 result for 3 sult for A result for 5 The results for 1 is output when the TRIG signal turns ON the third time 1 Sut not ON a GATE signal GATE ON delay OE OFF Qn A ONN Output time Repeatedly turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF The OR signal is output when the TRIG signal is turned ON When the TRIG signal turns ON for the third time the measurement result DO for the first time that the TRIG signal turned ON is output and the GATE signal is also output at this time When the TRIG signal turns ON for the fourth time the measurement result D0 for the second time that the TRIG signal turned ON is output and the GATE signal is also output at this time Each time the TRIG signal turns ON after that the measurement result D0 from when the TRIG signal turned ON two times previously is output FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 227 8 UONDBUUOD
200. a output is set The measurement results are not output if data output is not set BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 253 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual End Continuous Measurements Command Code 0010 1030 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0001 0000 0011 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0001 0000 0011 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 pees oles ack A the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result Clear Measurement Values Command Code 0010 2010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 3 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 p eit the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 8 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Clear Data Output Buffer Command Code 2020 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0010 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0010 0000 0010 0000 Com
201. a with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Sample Ladder Program The following sample program is used to input a TRIG signal to perform a single measurement A single measurement will be performed when WO0 00 turns ON Wwo 00 OUT1 When the single measurement command bit W0 00 turns ON the TRIG signal is turned ON if the BUSY signal is OFF Single measure ment command bit TRIG BUSY signal TRIG signal The TRIG signal is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0000 OUT1 OUTO When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that the measurement has been finished the judgement result is added to the total count OK measurements CIO 1000 NG measurements CIO 1002 BUSY signal OR signal OUTO OR signal I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUTO OR signal CIO 0 00 OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals TRIG CIO 1 00 The BUSY signal will remain ON while the measurement is being executed Performing Continuous Measurements Continuous measurements are performed while the continuous measurement command is input from an external device Immediately after a measurement is performed the next measurement is performed This is repeated while a continuous measurement command is input with the INO to IN5 signals 1 IN5 signal ON INO to IN4 are OFF Or other 2 Performs continuous measurements No
202. a written to the response area i in the PLC The execution results Control outputs Outout from the Vision Sensor Command code elion are written here e Response code to PLC We ev a a a L Response data 3 Output area Output data from the Vision Sensor is written After measurements Measurement results are written to the output area e Output data 0 to 64 e Character string to output a The response area 2 and output area 3 are assigned to continuous memory addresses or to a variable FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes output data for measurements after an inspection is performed 20 bytes 16 bytes 32 to 256 bytes 245 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Connectable Controller Models SYSMAC NJ NJ501 or NJ301 Compatible CJ1W EIP21 SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H or CJ2M Compatible model with CJ1W EIP21 built in port only SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1H or CJ1G CJ1W EIP21 CJ1M CJ1W EIP21 SYSMAC CS CS1H CS1D or CS1G CS1W EIP21 Ea Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting Up EtherNet IP Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following sect
203. ace Delimiter 0x20 0x20 deje II fel HO S SOF MO L Delimiter Command Inspection item External reference number data number 2 digits max 3 digits max Space Space 0x20 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Acquired ext sting CR ofk Jor Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r cr Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the inspection item number 0 to 31 External reference data Specifies the external reference data number 0 to 999 number BA Refer to 12 2 External Reference Parameters for details Acquired text string Returns the text string data for the specified inspection item Refer to 12 2 External Reference Parameters for details EE Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Set Inspection Item Text String Data This command sets the text string data for the specified inspection item lt Command Format gt Inspection External reference item number data number command 2 digits max 3 digits max OO piitfetmyotatt avey I loner or Space Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 0x20 Text OCARENERENRT TE a fp SP Command Inspection item External reference aa number data number 2 digits max 3 digits max Space Space Space 0x20 0x20 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the
204. ack 5 Press OK 6 Press Back Parameter Setting Description Brightness range Range 0 to 255 The specified range is converted to 0 to 255 Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 255 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Measurement data can be specified for each filter item Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement 2 No judgement not measured result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG BA Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items Use position compensation items if the position or orientation of the measurement object is not consistent When you use a position compensation item the offset between the reference position and the position of the object is calculated and the position of the measurement region is corrected before measurements are performed Applicable Position Compensation Items There are the following two types of position compensation items that vary in the method that is used to detect the object Type Description Model model position compensa tion A search is made for a characteristic pattern to detect and correct the position e Shape Sear pos comp Shape Search P
205. acters p 62 S Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence a Filter region You can specify the region to which to Scene p 63 f apply the filter S Source image You must set the image to which the filter Camera Prev default Scene p 62 is to be applied B Suppression level for The range in which to enhance the con Scene p 63 o Background Suppres trast and the brightness range to extract g sion Item Only are set for the Background Suppression item 2 2 S 25 Model region Used to specify the region of the image Scene 8 3 to register as the model with a combina 2 2 Add tion of figures Rectangle Ellipse Wide circle or Scene g ee Polygon 5 cS 5 LE Delete Scene 35 5 c Copy Scene Q g S 5 Con Scene T O s sole fo Co a ee z me OR OR default or NOT Scene o NOT al S 2 One All One or All Scene a oo 5 o 2 5 Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene g surement region g Detection You can specify which part of the model Scene point to detect as coordinates during inspec tions Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene EE for Edge Position Compensation FQ2 CH User s Manual surement region changes the measure ment directio
206. age Button Hides text and displays only the image p 158 a Zoom in Enlarges the image display z p 156 Button Dis play Zoom out Reduces the image display Button Button EN FIT Button Fits the image to the display size Ea Display But Changes the image display method Setup Mode Camera Live Freeze Log ton Logging image file or Camera image file Run Mode Latest image or Last NG image Log Image You can save the Camera image that is zz p 157 Button displayed on the Touch Finder or com puter o Capture Button Used to capture the current display and p 180 save it in external memory e g an SD card FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 387 z L seolpueddy Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sition 1 Previous image 121 Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 sition 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Source image Setting Acqui 0 Ca
207. al Calibration 1E suoljoun JUs UsAUOD Z 2 Select the calibration pattern to use Select the calibration pattern to use from the calibration settings OJ Selecting the Calibration Pattern to Use p 155 You can set the calibration setting for each scene You can use the same calibration setting for different scenes or use a different calibration setting for each scene Setting the Calibration Pattern Point Specification Set the pixel coordinates of positions to set the calibration pattern When you enter the actual coordinates of the specified positions the calibration parameters are automatically calculated You can register the coordinates of up to 10 positions e Different Magnifications in X and Y Directions Specify three positions X Y 5 3 Calibration Note If two positions are set a lefthand coordinate system will be set i e clockwise is the positive direction If you want to include the coordinate system in the calibration specify three positions p gt Setup Mode Calibration 7 Select the data region to set from Calibration data 0 mag fy 0 Calibrativn to Calibration data 31 Coefficient 2 Press Modify ttic engl lentig 3 Press 4q Specify point on the right of the display k eri Cuefficient F 150 FQ2 CH User s Manual Calibration 4 Press No 1 and then press Modify 5 Press the Camera coordinates to register on the dis play t
208. al Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and the edge position in the region as reference data for the measurement p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Edge pos comp Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera Q Move the rectangle to the location to be measured 4 Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching LT Changing the measurement region p 74 The following data is stored as basic measurement data Moves the starting point of the measurement region The arrow in the middle shows the direction for detecting an edge 0 Elge pos comp 312 aie 3121 0128 Insp region 28 inst Moves the end point of the measurement region Drag to move Changes the width the region of the measurement region sobew uiye L Item Parameter Description Reference data Reference position X Reference position Y Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters The reference coordinates X Y of the position are set automatically p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Edge pos comp Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement 2 Press the parameters and set the range that is to be judged as OK
209. al The optical chart indicates the horizontal field of view The vertical field of view depends on the model as follows FQ2 CH Approx 60 of the horizontal field of view Note The tolerance is 10 FQ2 CH1L1100F Installation distance L mm 1 000 600 Z 7 a 1 rd L Pi 200 ad 0 100 200 300 Horizontal field of view mm FQ2 CH1L 100N Installation distance L mm 400 gt 0 200 400 Horizontal field of view mm e There is a certain amount of deviation among Sensors in the center of the optical axis For this reason when install ing the Sensor check the center of the image and the field of view on the LCD monitor of the Touch Finder and in the PC Tool Removal Procedure 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver between the Mounting Brack et and the Sensor case on either side and remove the Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket Installing the Touch Finder Installation Precautions Install the Touch Finder in the following orientation to allow sufficient heat dissipation To improve ventilation leave space on both sides of the Touch Finder The distance between the Touch Finder and other devices should be at least that shown in the following diagram 15 mm min Make sure that the ambient temperature is 50 C or lowe
210. al data One value The average value of the mea Not possible surement results in the collected measure ment data is continuously updated Measurement data 1 000 measurement values max 2 Up to the capacity of the external memory Image data 20 images max 2i For recent results logging the oldest data is overwritten when the maximum number of saved data items is exceeded 2 This limit is for one data item If more than one data item is logged at the same time logging can be performed as long as the total number of data items in all logged data is 32 000 or less Logging Procedure Use the following procedure to log data Logging settings Setting Logging Conditions ne File logging p 165 Recent results logging p 170 Selecting the Measurement Data To Log LT p 166 Setting the File Name for Logged Data Output settings BE p 167 common settings for recent results logging and file logging common settings for recent results logging and file logging Setting the Format for Saving Measurement Data LT p 168 Enabling file logging Enabling File Logging LT p 168 Change to Run Mode Change to Run Mode i i E i Executing file logging To er a ogging Execution of recent Execution of file logging results logging e Saving Recent Results Logging Data LT p 172 Deleting Logged Data OJ p 172 ie Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Logging
211. alizing the Sensor and Touch Finder 00 189 Restarting the Sensor and Touch Finder 0 0000 e eee ee eee 189 CHECKING Versions iio soci ene sete e ta en enables meats dane eee A 189 Checking the Touch Finder Battery Level 0 0 0 190 Changing the Sensor Name 0 00 e eee eee ee 190 Checking Available Memory in the Sensor 0005 190 Correcting the Touch Screen Positions of the Touch Finder 190 Setting the Resolution of Measurement Objects Displayed on the PC Tool 190 Rotating the Touch Finder Image by 180x 00 190 Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator 00 00 e eee eee 190 Setting the Inspection Timeout Time 0 00 c eee eee 190 FQ2 CH User s Manual 8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection 8 1 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 192 Basic Operation with a Parallel Connection 0200e eevee 192 Setting the Measurement Trigger 0 00000002 eee eee eee 193 Setting the Outputs 2 cee ee eee Cepeda eee Dee a eek 198 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device 2 0005 204 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 0 0s ee ee 214 OVGIVIOW ea E nad Sei asietenanne eo dae AA Ma eee aa
212. amera image results of processing compensation item Image is taken on TRIG signal Camera image no processing 0 Edge Enhancement filter item 1 Search Position Compensation position compensation item Camera image with results of Search Position Compensation item If the source image is set to the camera image the results of position compensation are applied to the Camera image Measurements are performed with inspection items FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken r Shape Search Position Compensation With this position compensation item an image pattern is registered in advance When the registered image pattern is detected the image is adjusted so that the image pattern is in the same position as when it was registered This position compensation item performs the same type of processing as the Search Position Compensation item but it performs special processing for the shape of the image pattern Use this position compensation item to correct the position of a rotated image pattern e Setup Procedure for the Search Position Compensation Step 1 Selecting the Position Compensation Items p gt Image Image adjustment 7 Press an unused number and then press Add pos Eae comp 2 Press Model Search p comp BA Registering inspection items p 97 Cance Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and partial image as reference
213. an odor heats becomes discolored becomes misshapen or exhibits any other unusual conditions remove it and do not use it Continuing to use such a Battery may result in the Battery heating smoking rupturing or igniting e If the Touch Finder FQ2 D31 will be installed permanently or semi permanently remove the Battery FQ BAT1 If the rated temperature is exceeded with the Battery inserted the protective circuit may activate and stop the Touch Finder 4 AC Adapter Use an AC cable that is suitable for the power supply and power voltage you are using e Do not touch the power plug with a wet hand Doing so may result in electrical shock e If you notice an abnormal condition such as smoke abnormal heating of the outer surface or a strange odor immediately stop using the AC Adapter turn OFF the power and remove the power plug from the outlet Consult your dealer as it is dangerous to attempt to repair the AC Adapter yourself e If the AC Adapter is dropped or damaged turn OFF the power remove the power plug from the outlet and contact your dealer There is a risk of fire if you continue using the AC Adapter FQ2 CH User s Manual Handling Connector Cover Always attach the connector cover when you disconnect the cable If you do not attach the connector cover foreign matter may enter the connection causing malfunctions or damage Sensor Waterproof Sheets Do not remove or damage the waterproof sheets on the sides
214. ands The FQ2 cannot receive FINS commands from any networks other than Ethernet or from devices on networks to which the FQ2 is not directly connected Ethernet Unit FINS command addressed to FQ2 Ethernet Response Sending FINS Commands A special instruction for sending commands the CMND instruction is used to send FINS commands from the CPU Unit If you specify the FINS command code to send in the CMND instruction the CPU Unit will attach the FINS header and send the FINS command frame When the CPU Unit receives the response from the Sensor it automatically removes the FINS header and stores only the response data in the memory location that is specified in the CMND instruction Refer to the SYSMAC CS CU CP NSJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual Cat No W342 for more information on sending FINS commands with the CMND instruction Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Destination in the CMND Instruction To send a FINS command to the FQ2 the destination of the FINS command is specified in the control data of the CMND instruction Control data item Setting Destination network address 00 hex Local network The FINS commands must be sent to the local network Destination node address Specify the last two digits of the IP address of the FQ2 Destination unit address Always specify 00 hex Communications po
215. angle range setting Adjust the Angle range parameter to reduce the range in which a search for the model is performed O Setting the angle range p 71 FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken m sobew Burye L e Editing the Model and Measurement Regions This section describes how to edit the following regions Model registration region O Search p comp Measurement region region that is searched for the model If the model region is changed perform teaching again LT p 68 Changing the Model Registration Region to a Shape Other Than a Rectangle One rectangular region is registered as the default model registration region Other than rectangles circles and polygons can be set as the model registration regions p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Model region 1 Press lt Model region Hodel region O Search p comp 2 Press 4q Delete in the model registration editing CE EE display The rectangle will be deleted E E 3 Press Yes 4 Press Add in q 5 Press the shape of the region that you want to use MIEZI Ohsearonie ican 6 Draw the region 7 Press OK z 2 Fr J Note Up to 8 shapes can be combined to create a region for one model Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Masking Parts of the Model T
216. anumeric characters and press OK Press OK BRON FQ2 CH User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 167 suoloun JUs UsAUODD Z 168 File Format Image data Image data is saved in a special format for OMRON Vision Sensors The file name extension is IFZ Measurement data Measurement data is saved in the following CSV format DORO mxo mor f nDi ooo f a m es Gi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item Format Description 1 Date YYYY MM DD This is the date that the measurement data was obtained from the Sensor 2 Time hh mm ss This is the time that the measurement data was obtained from the Sensor 3 Measurement ID This is the measurement ID information 4 Scene No a Scene number 5 Judge Overall judgement 0 OK 1 NG 2 NC not measured 6 Inspection item I inspection_item_number measure The data selected for logging in the Measurement data under region ment_item detection_point Log setting is output Example Judgement from OCR in inspection item 0 10 JG 7 Expression region Z0 D This is the expression results for each expression Example The fourth registered expression would be given as fol lows Z0 D04 1 The data and time are not recorded with the measurement data Therefore this is not the date that the measurement was executed This is the date that the PC Tool or the Touch Finder obtained the data from the Sensor Changing the For
217. arity of the 0 to 100 read characters STB Stability This is the lowest stability of the read 0 to 100 characters N1 Number of read characters line 1 This is the number of read charac 32 characters max N1 ters for line 1 N2 Number of read characters line 2 This is the number of read charac 32 characters max N2 ters for line 2 Reading and Verifying Character Strings FQ2 CH User s Manual Expression text string Data name Description Data range N3 Number of read characters line 3 N3 This is the number of read charac ters for line 3 32 characters max N4 Number of read characters line 4 This is the number of read charac 32 characters max N4 ters for line 4 SM Individual similarity This is the similarity of read charac O to 100 ter N N 0 to 127 SB Individual stability This is the stability of read character 0 to 100 N N 0 to 127 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for OCR Parameter Setting Description Judgement 2 Not measured This is the judgement result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 16 Measurement timeout error 17 Format not entered error Similarity 0 to 100 This is the lowest similarity of the read characters Stability 0 to 100 This is the lowest stability of the read characters Number of
218. as OK If there is Defaults Upper limit 100 Lower limit 10 more than one candidate for the same character the difference between the first and second candidates is numerically expressed by the stability For exam ple if the similarity of the first candidate is 90 and the similarity of the second candidate is 25 then the stability is 80 25 55 To prevent misreading similar characters set a high value for the stability FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings 103 suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 74 104 Note You can specify whether to reflect the judgement result of the judgement conditions for character recognition in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Inspect Inspection Add item OCR Details Tab Page Output parameter Reflect Step 4 Seiting the Verification Conditions You can register a character string to use to verify that the character string that was read matches the registered char acter string You can register up to 32 character strings for verification in the master data You can verify the character string in the inspection against up to 32 character strings that are registered in the master data The verification result is saved in an external reference parameter so you can use a communications command to output it to an external device Externa Reference Parameters p 388 gt Inspect Inspect
219. at are set from actually being output The default setting is Yes p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Details Tab Page Output parameter Data output Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text Data name Description Data range string JG Judgement This is the judgement result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error DO to D15 Data 0 to 15 These are the results of the expressions that are set 999 999 999 9999 to for output judgement data 0 to 15 999 999 999 9999 J00 to J15 Judgments 0 to 15 These are the judgement results of the expressions 0 OK that are set for output judgement data 0 to 15 1 NG 2 Not measured Parallel Data Output You can output the following data as 16 bit data by setting them as the output data data O to data 31 measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings Setting the Data to Output You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of PO Search P comp to data
220. ata 7 4 bytes Output data 8 4 bytes Output data 4 4 bytes Output data 9 4 bytes Output data 5 4 bytes 0 Output data 10 4 bytes Output data 11 4 bytes Output data 12 4 bytes Output data 13 4 bytes Output data 14 4 bytes Output data 15 4 bytes FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 255 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Output Data Size and Number of Output Data Upper Value Setting When more than one inspection result is output the size of the data that is output for the data output settings could exceed the limit that is set in the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting If that occurs increase the set value of the output data size setting or adjust the output data settings so that data output size is not exceeded If the size of data that is output does exceed the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting the remaining data will be discarded Example Output data size 328 bytes Output data size setting 256 bytes Output data that exceeds the size 256 bytes that is set for the output data size parameter is separated over more than one cycle Output data size setting 256 bytes First Data Output Second Data Output Output data 0 Output data 0 238 Output dat
221. ation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands Returns the acquired scene number the number of the current scene 345 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Changing the Scene Number 280F 00301000 This command changes the scene number to use Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Scene number 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00301000 Scene number to change to 2 digits max Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00301000 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Scene number Specifies the scene number 0 to 31 to change to SAG Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Get Image Adjustment Data 280F 00401010 This command acquires parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Position compensation item filter External reference 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes item number 4 bytes number 4 bytes 28 OF 00401010 Position compensation item filter External reference item number 0 to 7 1 digit max number Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Acquired value 4 1
222. ator on the Sensor will not light the ERROR signal will not be output and the error will not be recorded in the error history Follow the instructions that are given in the error message If the following messages appear the hardware may be faulty Contact your OMRON representative e System error e Application system error Please reboot Failed to startup we Error Messages FQ2 CH User s Manual 11 3 Basic Troubleshooting Problem Measures to perform Reference The Sensor or Touch Finder will not start Check the power supply capacity to see if it is sufficient The Sensor cannot be detected Check the Ethernet cable to see if it is connected correctly Check the Ethernet settings to see if they are correct between the devices Check if there are any Sensors that were not detected by the Sensor connection check Check the communications cable to see if it is disconnected Check the switching hubs to see if any of them are faulty If switching hubs are used The PC Tool and Touch Finder cannot be connected at the same time If the PC Tool or Touch Finder is already connected to the Sensor dis connect it The results display is not updated Check to see if the TRIG signal is being correctly input to the Sensor p 159 Check to see if the most recent NG result is being displayed p 157 Updating the results display is slow If other devices are connected to t
223. aved in internal memory in the Sensor or in an SD card This can be done to configure inspection items or to check measurements using saved images gt R Setup Mode 1 Press EJ Select image dispday 2 You can select one of the following types of images Camera to display Log Logging Image file Images that are logged in the Sensor s internal memory Camera image file Logging image file Images that are logged in the SD card Camera image file Images that were logged with Logging Button LT saving the Currently Displayed Camera Image p 180 3 Press the Back Button to return to the Display Dis play Refer to the following information for the procedures to save images LI Logging Measurement Data p 164 Updating the Display and Measurement Results Only for NG Measurement Results In Run Mode you can specify updating the display of the image and measurement results only when the measurement result is NG p gt A Run Mode 1 Press EJ Select Image di 2 Press Last NG image 3 Press Back Latest Image FQ2 CH User s Manual Display Functions 157 suoljoun JUs UsAUODD Z 158 Change the following setting to display the last NG image after restarting gt siz Setup Mode or Run Mode TF Settings Startup display Display update mode 1 Press Last NG image edhen tutal Cance Note If an operation to change the display is p
224. aved inside the Sensor can be saved to an SD card p gt Setup Mode Save to file Logging Tab Page 1 Press Logging image 2 Select whether to save the most recently logged image or to save all of the data that is logged in the Sensor Storage location File name sensor_name LOGIMAGE YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS IFZ Example The following name would be used for files saved at 10 10 21 pm on March 10 2010 2010_03_10 22_10_21 IFZ Saving Images in an SD Card The image data can be saved in the SD card each time measurements are performed p gt Run Mode Logging BA Logging All Data File Logging p 165 You can also save the data in Setup Mode by using Display Arrangement Log Image Button i 1 FQ2 CH User s Manual Convenient Functions for Setup EK suoljoun JUs USsAUOD Z Displaying Image Data e Images Saved in Internal Sensor Memory p gt O Setup Mode EEJ Log Image Files in a SD Card p gt Setup Mode Logging image file or Camera image file 0J Arranging the Display Displaying a Saved Image p 157 184 z E Convenient Functions for Setup FQ2 CH User s Manual 7 11Setting the Retry Function Retry Function At one inspection trigger this function repeats scanning until the entire code is successfully scanned The retry function has four modes normal retry exposure retry 1 scene retry and trigger retry 1 The brightness exposure depends on t
225. ay 2 Select the calibration pattern from Calibration data 0 to Calibration data 31 T Tice 5 Calibration data4 Select calib dala Note If the selected calibration data has not been set yet a message will be displayed asking if you want to go to the cali bration setting display FQ2 CH User s Manual Calibration Be suoljoun JUs USsAUOD Z 7 3 Display Functions The procedures given in this section can be used to make the Sensor easier to use and the display easier to see Image Zoom The display can be zoomed in or out to make the image easier to see p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode ETE Isp lay ve e A Enlarges the display FQ Series Reduces the display Fits the image to the display size Press Back to end setting the display Displaying a Live Image You can display a live image to check the image that is input by the Sensor in realtime p gt A Setup Mode Press Press Camera Press Live ROD Sa Press the Back Button to return to the Display Dis play FQ Series Displaying a Frozen Image You can display a frozen image to stop image refreshing and display the last image that was input gt R Setup Mode Press i Press Camera Press Freeze KOM Press the Back Button to return to the Display Dis play 156 Display Functions FQ2 CH User s Manual Displaying a Saved Image You can display an image that was s
226. cations type is set to a PLC Link Retry interval Sets the interval for retrying communica 0 to 2 147 483 647 ms default 10 000 System p 287 tions ms This setting is enabled only when Retry details is set to ON This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to a PLC Link Max output data Sets the upper limit of the number of out 32 to 1024 default 256 System p 287 put data to use for PLC Link outputs Any output data that is beyond this value is discarded This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to a PLC Link Output data size Sets the data size to output for EtherNet 32 bytes default 64 bytes 128 bytes or System p 248 IP output 256 bytes If the data size that is set is exceeded data will be output in more than one transfer This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to EtherNet IP Connection Sets the TPC connection mode TCP server default or TCP client System p 287 mode Refreshing task Set the communications cycle for cyclic 1 to 10 000 ms default 10 ms System p 248 period tag data link communications for the Vision Sensor This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to EtherNet IP Timeout Sets the timeout time when handshaking 0 1 to 120 0 s default 10 s System p 249 Menu Tables is enabled This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command
227. ce at the a 1 to 253 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 connection destination d 0 to 255 Set it in the form a b c d Default 10 5 5 1 Note If you connect an external OMRON CS CJseries PLC to Ethernet the following default IP address is assigned to the PLC IP address 192 168 250 node_address Port No Set the I O port number of the external device at 0 to 65 535 the connection destination Default 9 600 Set the value to between 0 and 65 535 If the Connection mode parameter is set to TCP server for TCP no protocol communications the port number of the Sensor will always be 9876 for TCP no protocol communications ao Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can set the data to output automatically after measurements You can set up to 32 data items Data That Can Be Output e Data Output You can output up to 32 data items data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item Assigning Detection Results to Output Data p 311 Assigning More Than One Detection Result to Output Data p 312 Outputting Character Strings You can output a characte
228. ce_data_nu External_reference_data_nu item mber mber POSITIONDATA PD Sets data for a position com p 328 Item_number Item_number pensation item or filter item External_reference_data_nu External_reference_data_nu mber Setting mber Setting ITEMDATA ID Inspection_item_number Acquires the inspection item p 330 Inspection_item_number External_reference_data_nu data External_reference_data_nu mber mber ITEMDATA ID Inspection_item_number Sets the inspection item data p 331 Inspection_item_number External_reference_data_nu External_reference_data_nu mber Set_value mber Set_value ITEMDATA2 ID2 Inspection_item_number Acquires the text string data p 332 Inspection_item_number External_reference_data_nu of the specified inspection External_reference_data_nu mber item mber ITEMDATA2 ID2 Inspection_item_number Sets the text string data of the p 333 Inspection_item_number External_reference_data_nu specified inspection item External_reference_data_nu mber mber Text_strings Text_strings VERGET S None Acquires the version informa p 334 tion of the Sensor software VERGET H None Acquires the Sensor model p 335 information ERRGET None Acquires the latest error code p 336 of the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 319 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Command Details Measurement Control and Measurement Acquisition Commands M
229. cription String output ON OFF No default Sets whether to output the character string that results Yes from reading Line delimiter OFF default Sets the character to use for the line delimiter Comma This setting is enabled only when the OCR inspection Space item is selected Partial output ON OFF No default Sets whether to specify the range of characters to output Yes Output string setup 1 to 128 for OCR Sets the output range NG String output on off Yes default Sets whether to output an NG string No Su Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Note e Endian Little endian data is output Code Conversion The converted codes are outputted for the following character codes Character code Before conversion After conversion CR amp hOD amp h8541 LF amp hOA amp h8542 DEL amp h7F amp h8543 FF amp hFF amp h8544 Character Output Example When both the data and character string are output the character string is output after the data Example Read result 1 ABC Read result 2 0123 Data output Data 0 3 Number of characters 1 Data output Data 1 4 Number of characters 2 The following information will be output for the above The spaces are not actually output 3 field_separator 4 record_separator ABC field_separator 0123 record_separator CR Controlling the Sensor from an Exter
230. cting the Calibration Pattern to Use 0 00 e eee eee eee 155 7 3 Display Functions 0 00 c cee eee eee 156 MAGS ZOOM science nee ENA oa eae PO ROS Fee Se EA ae 156 Displaying a Live Image 0 cee eee 156 Displaying a Frozen Image 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 156 Displaying a Saved Image 02 ee ee 157 Updating the Display and Measurement Results Only for NG Measurement Results 0 000 eee eee eee 157 Automatically Changing to the Display for Any Sensor with an NG Result 158 Hiding the Menu 34 30 60 cs 000s ead be hae eee eee iri ee ee eee 158 Turning ON OFF the Touch Finder Backlight 0 004 158 Changing the Brightness of the Touch Finder 0000000 158 FQ2 CH User s Manual 11 12 7 4 Monitoring the Signal I O Status 0 0 c eee eee eee 159 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensor 20 200eeeeeee 160 Setting the Sensors to Connect asaue cece 160 Selecting the Display When More Than One Sensor Is Connected 162 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 2555 164 Logging Procedure e seis erasers ec ae ee es ee ee 164 Logging All Data File Logging 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 165 Checking Recent Measurement Trends Recent Results Logging 170 7 7 Saving Sensor SettingS 2 cece eee ee eee eee 174 Backing Up Settings in External Memory
231. ction can be used in Run Mode only Seitings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Wiring Color Signal State Description Gray INO ON Command parameter for clearing mea surement values Green IN1 OFF Red IN2 ON White IN3 OFF Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for clearing measure ment values Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart The signals shown at the left are used Refer to the following information for signal wiring BA 2 4 Wiring p 35 1 Turn ON INO and IN2 and turn OFF IN3 and IN4 NotoIN4 signas K X Tum ON the INS signal while the turn ON INS ON i IN5 signal i ON for 1 ms min a veins The measurement values are BUSY signal _ cleared from the Sensor OFF 210 m Allow 5 ms min and then BUSY signal is OFF to clear the measurement values Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Save Data in Sensor You can save the current settings scene data and system data in the Sensor This function can be used in Run Mode only Seitings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Description The signals shown at the left are used information for signal wiring BA 2 4 Wiring p 35
232. d IP addresses are automatically set for each Sensor To allocate specific IP addresses set the IP address of each Sensor and the Touch Finder LT Setting Up Ethernet p 46 20 Startup Display and Display Elements FQ2 CH User s Manual Display Elements This Sensor has a Setup Mode and a Run Mode Refer to the following information for menu items LT p 366 ok Setup Mode a In Setup Mode you can set the image conditions judgement parameters and I O settings for the Sensor S The name of the mode or the The name of the Sensor being set up is displayed S menu hierarchy is displayed The selected scene number is displayed The menu changes according to the selected tab page e Buttons will appear on the right according to the mode e If the lt q Button appears pressing it will display the sub menu or commands Camera setup Image adjustment The setup flow is shown by these five tabs Image Used to adjust the image Inspect Used to set the inspection items In Out Used to set the I O Test Used to test and adjust the set measurements Run Used to switch to Run Mode This button menu is always displayed i Only image Button Used to select either displaying the camera image and messages or only the camera image A Display Button Used to select the source of the image or to zoom the image LI Display Functions p 156 A Capture Button To capture the current screen to the SD card
233. d against time checked LT p 140 LT p 141 gt sss Run Mode Select display If Logging setting is not set to ON you will not be able to display trend monitors or histograms in Run Mode LT Enabling File Logging p 168 Configuring the Run Mode Display FQ2 CH User s Manual The following displays are convenient if more than one Sensor is connected Multi sensor NG sensor Displays the measurement results of Automatically changes to the display for all connected Sensors any Sensor with an NG result Green display OK Red display NG gt siz Run Mode Sensor monitor Specifying the Startup Run Mode Display The display that appears when power supply is turned ON can be set The default setting is Graphics gt si Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Startup display Display pattern You can set the scene to be displayed when the power supply is turned ON LU setting the Startup Scene p 148 Displaying the Inspection Item Results You can scroll though the measurement results of all the configured inspection items by using the following operations Switches to the previous inspection item Switches to the next inspection item The following are also displayed in addition to the measurement results for each inspection item Filter item The results of a filter item is displayed e Camera input The image that is being measured is displayed e
234. d data only 99 999 9999 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Edge position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x Logged data only 99 999 9999 8 Edge position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y Logged data only 99 999 9999 9 Standard position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX Logged data only 99 999 9999 10 Standard position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY Logged data only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 tions sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 aa image sition 1 Previous image 149 Edge level Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 E a sition 150 Noise level Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 153 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 157 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia 394 External Reference Parameters tion FQ2 CH User s Manual Externa
235. d for complete requirements 2 For the safety medical laser products IEC 60601 2 22 applies 3 AEL Accessible Emission Limit Requirements from Regulations and Standards FQ2 CH User s Manual The maximum accessible emission level permitted within a particular class For your reference see ANSI Z136 1 1993 Section 2 Symbol and border black Background yellow Figure A Warning label Hazard symbol FQ2 CH User s Manual Requirements from Regulations and Standards 435 z L seolpueddy Summary of Requirements to User For Europe EN 60825 1 Requirements sub Classification clause Class 1 Class 1M Class 2 Class 2M Class 3R Class 3B Class 4 Laser safety officer Not required but recommended for applications that involve Not required Required direct viewing of the laser beam for visible emission Required for non visible emission Remote interlock Not required Connect to room or door cir cuits Key control Not required Remove key when not in use Beam attenuator Not required When in use prevents inad vertent exposure Emission Not required Indicates Indicates laser is energized indicator device laser is ener gized fornon visible wavelengths Warning signs Not required Follow precautions on warn ing signs Beam path Not required Class 1Mas Notrequired Class 2Mas_ Terminate beam at end of useful length for Class 3B for Clas
236. del Wo 00 When the mode re register bit W0 00 turns t ON IN3 is turned ON Model re register bit wo 00 Model If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after IN3 turns re register bit ON the command input for registering the mode again IN5 is turned ON T0000 OUT1 IN5 The command input for registering the mode again IN5 is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0001 BUSY When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that model has been re registered processing after re registration is performed W0 01 turned ON I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 ClO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 ClO 1 15 Note The BUSY signal will be ON while the model is being re registered If the cycle time is too long the PLC may not be able to detect when the BUSY signal is ON If necessary turn OFF W0 00 after a suitable time elapses ete Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Turning the ERROR Signal OFF The ERROR signal turns ON when an error occurs After removing the cause of the error turn the ERROR signal OFF using one of the following methods Method 1 Input an error clear command from an external device such as a PLC Method 2 Input a measurement trigger again For example turn the
237. detaching the Panel Mount Adapter Attaching or detaching with the power turned ON may cause a failure 1 Set the Touch Finder in the Panel Mount Adapter SB Installation FQ2 CH User s Manual 2 Press the slider up on the Touch Finder 3 Create holes in the panel for mounting Refer to the following page for hole dimensions LT p 423 4 Connect the cable to the Touch Finder 5 Mount the Touch Finder with the Panel Mount Adapter from the front of the panel 6 Hook the hooks on the Mounting Bracket in the four holes of the Panel Mount Adapter and secure them with screws i Tightening torque 1 2 N m Mounting Bracket 7 Check that the Touch Finder is attached properly to the Panel Using the Touch Finder as a Portable Device with Battery The Touch Finder with a Battery can be used as a portable device Use the strap when carrying it to prevent dropping it There are two types of straps FQ XH sold separately a Neck Strap and a Hand Strap Neck Strap Hand Strap 1 Attach the Mini strap to the Touch Finder There are a total of four holes for attaching the Mini strap on the left and on the right of the Touch Finder FQ2 CH User s Manual Installation G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejersu Connect the Neck Strap or Hand Strap to the Mini strap e yea Mini strap Neck Strap or Hand Strap Mounting Sensor Data Units Mounting to DIN Track
238. dgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the Y coordinate DT Scroll 6 This is the amount of angular compen 180 to 180 sation 8 x Position X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found Y Position Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found TH Angle This is the angle at which the model 180 to 180 was found SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered ST Reference angle This is the angle when the model was 180 to 180 registered CR Correlation This is the correlation 0 to 100 Search Position Compensation With this position compensation item an image pattern is registered in advance When the registered image pattern is detected the image is adjusted so that the image pattern is in the same position as when it was registered This position compensation item performs the same type of processing as the Shape Search Positio
239. djust the brightness LT Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal p 228 Adjusting the Brightness You can adjust the shutter speed gain or the brightness to make images brighter The setting method depends on whether HDR Mode is ON or OFF The setting methods are described below LI HDR Function p 56 The exposure time will be longer for higher values of the shutter speed or brightness This may cause the image to blur if the object is moving fast If the Sensor is used on a high speed line check that the images are not blurred under actual operating conditions Brightness Correction Mode If the brightness changes inconsistently with each image turn ON the Brightness Correction Mode When HDR is ON gt Brightness Kl Brightness correction When HDR is OFF p gt Gain Kl Brightness correction When the Brightness Correction Mode is ON the brightness will be consistent but the timing when images are taken will be delayed by 25 ms Make sure that appropriate images of the measured objects are taken when the Brightness Correction Mode is ON Timing Chart When the Brightness Correction Mode Is ON Taking images begins 25 ms after the TRIG signal is input TRIG signal ON Brightness Correction ON OFF SON for 1 ms min Y ON Ce BUSY signal OFF ON while the measurement process is being executed LT Reference Timing Chart When the Brightness Correction Mode Is OFF p 194
240. e CR Math Either of the following two functions can be inserted LPR function order of the measurement data The measurement data is output in order Format LPR start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 e LPC function order of the detection points Data is output for each detected measurement point Format LPC start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor 22d Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Expression Setting Example This example registers an expression to output the following inspection results for data 0 Inspection item PO Search position comp Parameters to output Position X Position Y Reference SX and Reference SY LPR 0 1 P0 X PO Y PO SX PO SY J Function Number_of_data data_A data_B data_d Detection count Start_number Output Results The expression is registered in the output area as shown below Output area data Assigned data Output data 0 4 bytes PO X 0 Position X 1st point Output data 1 4 bytes PO Y 0 Position Y 1st point Output data 2 4 bytes PO SX 0 Reference SX 1st point Output data 3 4 bytes PO SY 0 Reference SY 1st point Output data 6 4 bytes Output d
241. e sition ment 153 condi Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 tions change 0 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 157 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 169 Edge level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 aod E sition 170 Noise level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 173 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 one change 1 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 177 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 1 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99
242. e Sensor will be displayed in the posi tion that corresponds to the specified number 162 Cancel Connecting to More Than One Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Note The display positions that are set with Display position are cleared when the power supply to the Touch Finder is turned OFF However if the Sensor status is changed by changing from Setup Mode to Run Mode the current settings for Dis play position are saved in the Touch Finder Therefore the next time the same Sensors are connected they will be displayed in the same positions If a previously connected Sensor is not detected either the display position will be blank or if Auto sensor detection is set to ON the Touch Finder will display another Sensor that it has detected If a previously connected Sensor is then detected by the Touch Finder it will display the image from it in the previous display position FQ2 CH User s Manual Connecting to More Than One Sensor 163 suoljoun JUs UsAUDD Z 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data There are two ways to log data Recent results logging Data is temporarily saved in memory inside the Sensor File logging Large amounts of data are saved in SD cards or other external media The amounts and types of data that can be logged depend on the logging method that is used as shown in the following table Logged data Logged quantity Recent results logging File logging Statistic
243. e command code and the command parameters from the PLC while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 The Controller turns ON the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal The execution command is sent to the Vision Sensor 3 When the Vision Sensor receives the execution command the Command Execution Active BUSY signal turns ON the READY signal turns OFF and the command is executed 4 The command code response code and response data are set when the Vision Sensor completes execution of the command 5 The Control Command Completed FLG signal turns ON 6 When the PLC detects that the Control Command Completed FLG signal is ON it turns OFF the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal 7 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Control Command Completed FLG signal and the Command Execution Active BUSY signal and turns ON the READY signal ao Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Execution of Control Commands for Continuous Measurements with the Control Command Execution Bit EXE Signal ON i tt i i i i Command code te i i i i OFF i tt i i i i i te i i i i i tt i i i i Commana ON A T a parameters Ia oe ee OF at SH i m Command A ee Area Control OH ae Command ON Execution Bit i H 1 EXE signal OFF
244. e edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 reference position position when it was registered Y SX1 Edg1 ref pos X edge This is the X coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 1 reference position position when it was registered x SY1 Edg1 ref pos Y edge This is the Y coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 1 reference position position when it was registered Y STH Reference angle This is the angle when the edge was reg 180 to 180 istered FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 93 sobew uiye L MEMO Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting Up Inspections 4 1 Setup Procedure for Inspection Items 00 0 eee e eee eee 96 4 2 Configuring Inspection Items 0c e eee eee 97 4 3 Reading and Verifying Character Strings 0 0eeeeee 99 4 4 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 114 The basic steps for setting up inspection items are shown below Step 1 Configuring Inspection Items Step 2 Teaching Step 3 Setting Judgement Parameters If measurements are unstable Step 4 Setting Detailed Items Step 5 Re teaching suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 74 FQ2 CH User s Manual Setup Procedure for Inspection Items ES 4 2 Configuring Inspection Items Adding New Inspection Items 1 Press Inspect Inspection Setup a processing item 2 Press an unused inspection item n
245. e edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position X SY1 Edge1 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position Y SMX Ref Midpoint X refer This is the X coordinate of the mid 9 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 ence midpoint X point of the two edges when they were registered SMY Ref Midpoint Y refer This is the Y coordinate of the mid 9 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 ence midpoint Y point of the two edges when they were registered FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 91 sobew uiye L Edge Rotation Position Compensation This position compensation item detects an edge in two directions If the specified density is detected it is recognized as an edge Two edge positions are detected Two edge positions are detected The image is adjusted so that the two edge positions match the positions when the edge positions were registered Two detected edge positions Edge search direction for edge 1 Edge search direction for edge 0 Measurement region for edge 0 Measurement ce region for edge 1 Registered position of the edge The image is adjusted so that the two detected edge positions appear at the positions they were in when the edge was registered Density of edge to be found p gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unu
246. e is discarded 32 to 1 024 bytes Default 256 bytes Connection mode Sets the TPC connection mode FQ2 CH User s Manual TCP server or TCP client Default TCP server PLC Link Connections at 288 Changes to settings are not applied until the Vision Sensor is restarted Therefore save the settings and then restart the Vision Sensor QJ 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor p 133 BA Restarting the Sensor p 189 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can set in advance the data to output automatically after measurements You can set up to 32 data items Data That Can Be Output Data Output You can output up to 32 data items data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item Assigning Detection Results to Output Data p 288 Assigning More Than One Detection Result to Output Data p 289 e Outputting Character Strings You can output a character string for each of the inspection items that reads a character string such as the OCR inspection item Also when reading the character string fails you can output a specific character string that is set in advance BA Outputting Read Character Strings p 291 Assigning Inspection Results to Output Data You
247. e or visible warning when laser is switched on or if capacitor bank of pulsed laser is being charged For Class 3R only applies invisible radiation is emitted Attenuator Not required Give means beside the On Off switch to temporarily block beam Location controls Not required Controls so located that there is no danger of exposure to AEL above Classes 1 or 2 when adjustments are made Viewing optics Not required Emission from all viewing systems must be below Class 1M AEL Scanning Scan failure shall not cause product to exceed its classification Class label Required wording Figures A required wording Aperture label Not required Specified wording required Service entry label Required as appropriate to the class of accessible radiation Override interlock label Required under certain conditions as appropriate to the class of laser used Wavelength range label Required for certain wavelength ranges LED label Make required word substitutions for LED products User information Operation manuals must contain instructions for safe use Additional requirement apply for Class 1M and Class 2M Purchasing and ser vice information Promotion brochures must specify product classification service manuals must contain safety information Note 1 This table is intended to provide a convenient summary of requirements See text of this standar
248. e position compensation item or of the filter item External reference data Specifies the external reference data number number BA 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Acquired value Returns the image adjustment data or threshold value BE 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Bee Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Set Image Adjustment Data This command sets parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item lt Command Format gt External reference data Command 4 digits max Set value IPBSGST F TII _R TV IS E Pfols i riijoinjojajrja l II I fer Space Item Space Delimi 0x20 number 0x20 gui Space Space 0x20 0x20 or UN n Delimiter Command Space Space External Set value 0x20 0x20 reference data Space Item 4 digits max Space 0x20 number 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally o k or Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r or Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the item number of the position compensation item or of the filter item External reference data Specifies the external reference data number number O 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Set value Specifies the set value
249. e saved in external memory as bit maps 1 Images captured on the Touch Finder are saved in the SD card Images captured with the PC Tool are saved in the computer s hard disk drive gt L Setup Mode or Run Mode The image that is being displayed when the button is pressed is saved in external memory e Storage Location and File Names Storage location File name CAPTURE YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS_MS BMP Example The following name would be used for an image that was captured at 10 10 21 350 pm on March 10 2010 2010_03_10 22_10_21_350 BMP Important Make sure an SD card is inserted in the Touch Finder before capturing display images Note For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder My Documents OMRON FQ Saving the Currently Displayed Camera Image You can save the Camera image that is displayed on the Touch Finder or computer p gt A Setup Mode Log Image Button The Camera image that is being displayed when the Button is pressed is saved in external memory e Storage Location and File Names Storage location File name CAPTURE YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS_MS IFZ Example The following name would be used for an image that was captured at 10 10 21 350 pm on March 10 2010 2010_03_10 22_10_21_350 IFZ Make sure an SD card is inserted in the Touch Finder before capturing display images Note For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following f
250. e the rounded side of the battery toward the back of the Touch Finder and insert the battery Close the battery cover slide the battery cover in the direc i tion of the arrow and tighten the screw on the battery cov er Attach the AC adapter to the Touch Finder to start changing CHARGE indicator the battery The CHARGE indicator will be lit while the battery is being charged It will go out when charging the battery has been com pleted The Touch Finder will operate even if the AC adapter is connected when no battery is mounted in the Touch Finder Wiring FQ2 CH User s Manual e If the Touch Finder FQ2 D31 will be installed permanently or semi permanently remove the Battery FQ BAT1 If the rated temperature is exceeded with the Battery inserted the protective circuit may activate and stop the Touch Finder The battery complies with the following recycling regulation Japan EU Taiwan e H E e California regulations concerning perchlorate This product is a lithium battery that contains perchlorate which is regulated by the State of California Please com ply with these regulations For details see the following URL www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate FQ2 CH User s Manual Wiring 45 G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu 46 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet Connecting to Sensors from the Touch Finder Configurations Consisting of Only Sensors and the Touch Finder When only Sensors and a Touch Fi
251. ect the Sensor and Touch Finder during measurements in the above situation clear the selection of the Sensor from the list of Sensors on the Touch Finder before you disconnect the cable Changing the Polarity of the Output Signals You can change the polarity of the output signals that are assigned to OUTO to OUT3 regardless of what signal is assigned to the output Seitings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output OUTO Polarity OUT1 Polarity or OUT2 Polarity Item Description OUTO Polarity OUT1 Polarity or OUT2 Polarity Positive default The output signal that is assigned to OUTO to OUTS is turned ON when the Sen sor is executing a process Negative The output signal that is assigned to OUTO to OUTS is turned ON when the Sen sor can receive the trigger FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 203 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado Buljjo4ju0D 204 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device The following Sensor functions can be controlled with command inputs from an external device without connecting the Touch Finder Function Description Reference Switching the scene This command changes the scene when the line process changes p 204 Re registering the model This command re registers the judgement references for measurement
252. ectly OR If this signal was ON it will be turned OFF DO to D15 If these signals were ON they will be turned OFF GATE This signal does not change while clearing the OR and D signals However do not clear the OR and D signals while the GATE signal is ON The command will not be executed correctly Also the D and GATE outputs may not function correctly ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function INO Turn OFF IN1 Turn ON IN2 to IN5 Turn OFF IN6 Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for clearing the OR and D signals FQ2 CH User s Manual Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 237 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado Buljjosju0D 238 Saving Data in the Sensor This command saves the current settings scene data and system data in the Sensor Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 101000 1101000 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF pei o gt lt 101000 signals ON for 1 ms min IN7 signal Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 ON BUSY signal o O y O OFF ON ACK signal 4 OFF ACK output time Output Signa
253. ed change the settings so that the BUSY signal remains ON until logging has been completed During operation do not input the next trigger until the BUSY signal turns OFF p gt In Out I O setting I O terminals Output Tab Page BUSY output Change the BUSY output parameter to Data logging Trigger signal Sensor Touch Finder Data Image Logging Logging Display i lt lt _ gt Image input Measurements ON BUSY OFF Note File logging cannot be used when performing continuous measurements e If you use the PC Tool the logging time may vary by up to 100 ms depending on the application conditions of your computer If logging data to an SD card the write time varies depending on the amount of the available space on the SD card Reference value For SDHC class 4 the time required to write image data is approx 200 to 800 ms FQ2 CH User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 169 suoouny u lu nuo p Z 170 Checking Recent Measurement Trends Recent Results Logging The most recent measurement results can be logged inside the Sensor Even if data is not logged in external memory such as an SD card trends in measurement results can be easily checked on the Touch Finder However if the power supply is turned OFF or the scene is changed this data will be lost Trend monitor a om 3 uenen LW Recent measurement results
254. ed as measurement data Measured item Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Scroll X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the amount of position compensation for the X coordinate Scroll Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the amount of position compensation for the Y coordinate Position X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the X coordinate of the measured edge position Position Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the Y coordinate of the measured edge position When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table LI 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 164 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the edge position cannot be detected when teaching Perform the following e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected adjust the Noise level on the Details Tab Page and try teaching again Edge Not Found If an edge is not found the measurement result will be NG Perform the following e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected make sure the Edge level parameter on the Details Tab Page is correct LT Edge level p 84 Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing BA Applying the Resu
255. ed for more than one Sen sor or if there is Sensor that is not in the subnet You can change this IP address and subnet mask This setting is valid only when automatic setting of the Sen sor s IP address is OFF Auto sensor detection The Touch Finder can detect Sensors ON default OFF p 160 and automatically connect to them in the order that it detects them Logging setting You must enable file logging before you ON default OFF p 168 can execute it Language Changes the language to display on the English German French Italian Span System p 189 Touch Finder ish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chi nese Korean or Japanese The default language is selected at startup Time settings Used to set the current date and time Default Selected at startup System p 189 Touch screen calib Used when there is an offset between s a p 190 the touch screen positions and pointers Initialize Initializes the Touch Finder settings oan ao p 189 Restart Restarts the Touch Finder nae p 189 Update Updates the Touch Finder system to the p 432 most recent data FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 385 z L seolpueddy Run Mode Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Graphic Displays the input image p 138 Q no Graphics Details Displays the inspection item indiv
256. ed normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Measurement result e Returns the measurement result as the response when data output is set The measurement result is not output when data output is not set Q Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 341 Each data item requires 4 bytes Up to 1 024 bytes of data can be received FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 341 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Clearing Measurement Values 280F 00102010 This command clears the measurement values Command Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00102010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00102010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Clearing Errors 280F 00102040 This command clears the error output status error output and error indicator Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00102040 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00102040 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution end
257. ed normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error oe Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Saving Data in the Sensor 280F 00103010 This command saves the current setting data system data scene groups and calibration data in the Sensor Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00103010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00103010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Re registering Models 280F 00104010 This command re registers the model for a registered search inspection item such as the Search Position Compensation item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00104010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00104010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands oe yeusauy yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Resetting the Sensor 280F 0010F010 This command resets the Sens
258. ed on a threshold that is set for a density change If you change the edge level perform teaching again Note Edge Level An edge is detected in the following way 1 The density change distribution of the entire measurement region is determined 2 The minimum density change is 0 The maximum density change is 100 3 The location where the density change intersects with the edge level is detected as the edge 100 pesnw Maximum density change Measurement 50 4 Edge level region 0 AA Minimum density change Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual e Noise Is Mistaken as an Edge p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Edge pos comp Details Tab Page Meas parameter Noise level Parameter Setting Description Noise level Range 0 to 255 Sets the density level to be considered as noise Default 128 If the difference between the maximum and minimum density changes in the region is below the noise level it will be assumed that there is no edge Increase this value if noise is incorrectly detected as an edge If you change the noise level perform teaching again Noise threshold The maximum and minimum density deviations and densities within the edge detection region are determined If the difference is less than the noise threshold it is assumed that there are no edges Normally there
259. ee eee eee eee 2 3 Installation wisiecnon Aki Sine eee ieee ea tee sede ie Wes Installation PrecautiOnS ssp resna ia Seve ee ee ee eae ee Pee Mounting to DIN Track 0 0 c ee eee Mounting to a Control Panel 0 0 0 0 eee eee Using the Touch Finder as a Portable Device with Battery Mounting to DIN Track 0 0 cece eee 2 4 WING ae ae e aie cas E E ne wd Beets ane daw aged wus neste at I O Signal Circuit Diagrams 0 0 eee Power Supply Specifications When a Switching Regulator Is Connected Attaching the LED Warning Label 0 0000 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet 0 0 ccc cece Connecting to Sensors from the Touch Finder 0 000 0 eee Connecting to Sensors from External Devices Such as PLCs Connecting to Sensors from a Computer Using the PC Tool 3 Taking Images 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration 0 20 e cece eee eee 3 2 Setting Conditions for Taking Images 000e ee eee eee 3 3 Adjusting Image Quality 0 00 c cece Adjusting the FOCUS iiaei te A cade nen e eee Ha A were S Adjusting Image Brightness with External Lighting Adjusting the Brightness 0 0002 Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects 00000 00 0c eee FQ2 CH User s Manual C s u3 u09 Jo alge Improving the Image Quality of Metallic and other Shiny Surfaces
260. eflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search pos comp Details Tab Page Output parameter e Unstable Search Position Compensation Results Inclined Measurement Objects Adjust the Angle range parameter to increase the range in which a search is made for the model The Search Position Compensation item judges whether an image is OK or NG according to the correlation with a previously registered image pattern For this reason if the object is at an angle the correlation is reduced and the image may be judged as NG To achieve an OK judgement for the same image pattern even when the object is at an angle the rotation range must be widened Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search pos comp Details Tab Page Model parameter 1 Set Rotation to Yes 2 Press Angle range and set the following range Parameter Setting Description Angle range Range 180 to 180 A search position compensation is performed within the set angle range Default Lower limit 180 The larger the angle range the longer the processing time Upper limit 180 If you change the angle range perform teaching again LT r 68
261. elete Scene g 5 Data 0 to Sets the range of the output data to Range 999 999 999 9999 to Scene ci 5 Data 15 judge OK 999 999 999 999 2 5 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 2 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 o ie iS D D 2 ne Ule 2 Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 217 Bias 2 judgement results of an inspection item v ajs in the overall judgement a f a Data output Sets whether to output the judgement No Yes default Scene p 217 g results m FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 375 z L seolpueddy 376 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 3 3 Data settings Data0 to Data31 Scene H SIS l 2 Data settings Sets the output data Inspection item text strings Scene p 217 A 18 Sica Changes copies or clears the data Scene 2 Copy Scene a D Delete Scene g Output for Sets the output form Binary default or BCD Scene p 218 S mat 2 o B 2 a gt O S pe ola 2 Output form Sets whether to output the data No Yes default Scene p 218 sig 5 2 s 23 O a S gs9 Oo a A5 z O o S I O monitor Used to check I O connections ie oe p 159 5 Q Test Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Continuous test Used to check the individual judgement
262. em such as the Search Position Compensation item 280F 0010F010 Restarts the Sensor p 344 280F 00104020 Executes teaching for all applicable inspection p 344 items Scene control com 280F 00201000 Acquires the current scene number p 345 mands 280F 00301000 Changes the scene number being used p 346 Data acquisition setting 280F 00401010 Acquires image adjustment data p 347 commands 280F 00501010 Sets image adjustment data p 348 280F 00401020 Acquires the inspection item data p 349 280F 00501020 Sets the inspection item data p 350 280F 00403000 Acquires the version information of the Sensor p 351 software 280F 00205000 Acquires the latest error code of the Sensor p 351 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual FINS Command Details Executing Measurements 280F 00101010 This command executes one measurement If Ethernet output is not set only the measurement is performed If Ethernet output is set the measurement is performed and the result is returned as response data Command Format MRC 1 byte 28 SRC 1 byte OF Vision Sensor command code 4 bytes 00101010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Measurement 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes result 1 024 bytes 28 OF End code 00101010 Measurement result End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution end
263. ement JG scroll DY Cance To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 253 u194 3 yBnosy Buyoauu0D 6 Assigning More Than One Inspection Result to the Same Output Data You can assign more than one inspection result to the same data output to output all of the assigned results This is possible for the following inspection results Parameters for the same inspection item You can assign up to five inspection results The following procedure shows how to assign more than one inspection result to data 0 p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set 1 Press 0 Data 0 2 Press Multi data setting 3 Set the following items on the display to set expres sions Item Description Expression Register the expression to use to output multiple data Examples LPR 0 1 PO X PO Y LPC 0 1 PO X PO Y Const Used to insert numbers and symbols into the expression Data Used to select the inspection items for which to output data and insert the parameters to output into the expression Example Selecting Parameters for the Search Position Compensation Item at Position Com pensation Item 0 Inspection item PO Search position comp Judgement result Judgement JG Correlation Corr
264. ement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 or position compensa sition 1 Data logging ON ion TH 313 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 lor detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON ion XO 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON ion YO 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON ion X1 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON ion Y1 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 or detected edge angle sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 settings theta display sition 701 Detected edge angle Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 display sition 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 XO display sition 703 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 YO display sition 704 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X1 display sition 705 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y1 display sition External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual OCR
265. ent The signal is valid when the measurements are completed i e when the BUSY signal changes from ON to OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 219 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjo4ju0D Signal Function D These signals output the parallel judgement output data and the calculation results of the expressions that are set for parallel data output You can set whether the signal turns ON for an OK or for an NG judgement in the Judgment output condi tion output setting LT Changing the Signal Specifications p 203 GATE This signal is used to control the timing of reading the D signals at an external device It is turned ON for the period of time that is required to reliably read the D signals at the external device Set the output period so that the total output time is shorter than the measurement interval i e the TRIG signal input interval The GATE signal is output only if parallel judgement output and parallel data output are set The OR signal will be ON while the TRIG signal can be input Input Signals Signal Function TRIG This signal is used to input a measurement trigger from an external device such as a photoelectric switch One measurement is performed on the rising edge OFF to ON transition of the TRIG signal Keep the TRIG signal ON for at least 1 ms Aligning the Data Output
266. er limits of measurement position X for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of measurement position Y for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 77 sobew uiye L Angle Range 180 to 180 Adjust the upper and lower limits of angle for an OK judgement Defaults Lower limit 180 Upper limit 180 e Select the Results to Output You can use multiple conditions to determine which results to output from all the objects detected with a correlation at the candidate level or higher Only the results that meet all the specified conditions are output p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search pos comp Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Extraction condition and adjust the candi andidate leve 0 Shape pos comp date level so that only objects higher than a certain correlation are detected 12345 q ee rr Pa Extraction con Range Description dition Candidate level 0 to 100 Outputs only objects with a correlation that is higher Defaults Lower limit 80 Upper limit 100 than the specified candidate level Note The processing time changes if you change the candidate level e R
267. er to the following manuals for details on the tag data link settings that are made with the Network Configurator e NJ series CPU Unit Built in EtherNet IP Port User s Manual Cat No W506 e CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual Cat No W465 e CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual for NJ series CPU Unit Cat No W495 To connect the FQ2 to an NJ CJ series CPU Unit install the EDS file that defines the connection information for the FQ2 in the Network Configurator Download the EDS file from the OMRON website After tag data links are set the Vision Sensor will automatically be restarted to enable the settings Tags Tag Sets and Connection Settings The communications areas in the PLC are set as tag data link connections as shown in the following table Tag and Tag Set Settings in the PLC Parameter Settings Command area Response area and output area Type of tags and Output tag set Input tag set tag set Tag and tag set 1 O memory addresses or variable names I O memory addresses or variable names names Data size 20 bytes 48 to 272 bytes total size of response area and output area 4 Specify the I O memory address of the first word in the response area The output area is assigned immediately after the response area If you specify a variable name the variable is assigned for both the response area and output area Refer to Accessing Communications Areas Using Variables with NJ s
268. eration of the system If the measurement interval is short communications errors may occur depending on the measurement processing time of the Sensor and the settings in the PLC Set the timeout time in the connection settings so that it is longer than the measurement processing time of the Sensor or increase the measurement interval it These are the connection settings for tag data links Make these settings from the Network Configurator FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 281 u194 3 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Sample Ladder Programming Command Response Communications The following sample program is used to clear measurement values The Clear Measurement Values command lower bytes 2010 upper bytes 0010 is sent to the Vision Sensor First RUN Period Flag MOV Sets the lower word of the Clear Measurement Values command 2010 MOV Sets the upper word of the Clear 0010 Measurement Values command 3 word Execution Control Command Command Execution condition Completed FLG Active BUSY H H Turns ON Command Execution Bit Command Execution Bit Control Command Completed FLG RSET When the control command is completed the Command Execution Bit is turned OFF Command Execution Bit Create the ladder program to control the TRIG signal so that it does not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON If not a TRIG input e
269. ere is a characteristic detect and correct the position pattern A me LT Search Position An image pattern is recognized to detect and correct the position O Shape Search Position Compensation p 68 There is a characteristic pattern The measure ment object is Edge Rotation Position Compensation at an angle The positions of two edges are There is no characteristic detected and the angle of the line pattern that connects those positions is used to correct the position LT Edge Rotation Position Compensation p 91 Applying the Results of Position Compensation You can apply the results of position compensation either to the Camera image or to the previous image from before position compensation was applied If you apply the results of position compensation to the Camera image only the position information from position compensation is applied to the image to be measured O lusing Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items p 67 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual e Setting the Image for Position Compensation You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing You can set the image for position compensation for each position compensation item p gt Image Image adjustment Position compensation item name Modify 1 Press Details Scroll parameter 2 Set the source image to Camera or Prev
270. ere is no response from the PLC within the time that is set e From when measurements are completed until the DSA Bit turns ON e From when the GATE flag turns ON until the DSA Bit turns OFF From when the GATE flag turns OFF until the DSA Bit turns ON 0 1 to 120 0 s default 10 s Data output period This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No Set the period for outputting measurement results Set a value that is longer that the GATE ON output time and shorter than the measurement interval of the Sensor 2 to 5 000 ms default 40 ms GATE signal ON period This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No Set the time to turn ON the GATE signal Set the time that is required for the PLC to read the measurement results Set the cycle time of the PLC so that it is longer than the packet interval RPI 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms default 20 0 ms FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 249 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 250 Tag Data Link Setting Methods This section describes how to set data links for EtherNet IP The communications areas in the PLC for which data links are created to the Sensor are specified as tags and tag sets and the connections are set for tag data link communications Tags tag sets and connections are set from the Network Configurator Ref
271. erence num ber Specifies the external reference number Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Acquired value FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands Returns the data for the specified inspection item Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 349 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Setting the Inspection Item Data 280F 00501020 This command sets the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Inspection item number 4 bytes External reference Set value 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes number 4 bytes 28 OF 00501020 Inspection item number from 00 External reference Set value 1 000 to 1F 2 digits max number times the actual value Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00501020 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Inspection item number Specifies the number of the inspection item to set External reference num Specifies the external reference number ber 7 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Setting Specifies the set value 0 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 sel Controlling Operation and Outpu
272. erformed e g if the display pattern is changed or the inspection item is changed when displaying images for NG results is set the display will change to refreshing the most recent mea surement results and the most recent NG display will disappear To ensure that you can check the NG results log the NG results O Checking Recent Measurement Trends Recent Results Logging p 170 Automatically Changing to the Display for Any Sensor with an NG Result You can change the settings to automatically display the Sensor for which the measurement result is NG if more than one Sensor is connected gt Run Mode Sensor monitor NG Sensor Hiding the Menu You can hide the menu and display only the image on the Touch Finder or PC Tool to check the part of the image hidden behind the menu If you press the icon again the menu will be displayed gt Setup Mode or Run Mode Turning ON OFF the Touch Finder Backlight You can use Eco Mode to turn OFF the LCD backlight and reduce the power consumed by the Touch Finder whenever there is no operation on the Touch Finder for 30 seconds or longer The LCD backlight will turn ON whenever any part of the touch panel is pressed gt siz Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings LCD Backlight ECO mode Changing the Brightness of the Touch Finder The brightness of the LCD backlight can be changed to any of five levels gt a Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings
273. eries Controllers on p 263 for information on how to access the sig nals in the communications areas from the user program when variables are assigned Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Settings in the FQ2 Device Parameter Settings 1 Right click the FQ2 in the network on the Network Configurator and select Parameter Edit 2 The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Make the required settings Edit Device Parameters pau Parameters Parameter Name All parameters 0001 Input Size 0002 Output Size 0003 RPI Default Setup i Expand All Collapse All EE Parameter name Value Setting range 001 Input Size The total size of response area and output 48 to 272 area 002 Output Size The data size of command area 20 003 RPI The requested packet interval 10000 4 Although the data size can be set as high as 502 bytes with the current version set one of the following as the total data size for the output area data output size and the response area 16 bytes 48 bytes default 80 bytes 144 bytes 272 bytes 2 Although the data size can be set as high as 502 bytes with the current version use the default setting of 20 bytes 3 The packet interval RPI is set in the connection settings between the PLC and the Sensor No setting is required here FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Ope
274. esponse data have been stored BUSY Command Execution This signal is ON while the Vision Sensor is Active executing a control command It is OFF while the Vision Sensor is not execut ing a control command READY Ready This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor Command can execute a command response commu E nications This signal turns OFF when the Vision Sensor i cannot execute a command ERR Error This signal turns ON when an error is detected Command in the Vision Sensor response commu nications Important This flag turns ON when an error occurs in PLC link communications This signal will remain OFF for any errors other than PLC Link communications errors This signal turns OFF when the Clear Error ERRCLR signal from the PLC turns ON GATE Data Output Completed This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor Data output after finishes outputting data measurements If handshaking is enabled the GATE signal turns OFF automatically when you turn OFF the Data Output Request DSA signal from the PLC PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Signal Signal name Function Application Command code Command code This I O port returns the command code that Command was executed response commu nications Response code Response code This I O port contains the response code of the executed comma
275. eter Setting Description Source image Camera camera image The filter is applied to the image that is taken by the Camera Prev previous image The filter is applied to the image that resulted from the previous filter items or posi tion compensation items in the processing order Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Region to Filter You can specify the region to which to apply the filter p gt Image Image adjustment Add filter Filter item to select 1 Press lt lt Filter region on the right of the display Drag to move the region 2 Adjust the size and position of the region to which Drag a corner to size the rectangle the filter is to be applied o4 thing To fine tune the region press lt q Console on the right of the display to display the console This will allow you to change the coordinates of the rectangle at the pix el level Setting the Brightness Range to Extract for Background Suppression Item Only The range in which to enhance the contrast and the brightness range to extract are set for the Background Suppression item The Background Suppression item works as described below to suppress the background for the specified brightness range Enhancing Contrast The range of the input brightness that is within the specified brightness range 0 to 255 is converted to 255 levels to enhance the contrast e Background Suppression Input
276. ethod Resistance film tion interface Life expect 1 000 000 operations ancy Exter Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T nal inter face SD card SDHC compliant Class 4 or higher recommended Ratings Power supply voltage DC power connection 21 6 to 26 4 VDC DC power connection 21 6 to 26 4 VDC including ripple including ripple AC adapter manufactured by Sino Ameri can Japan Co Ltd connection 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Battery connection FQ BAT1 Battery 1 cell 3 7 V Continuous operation on Bat 1 5h tery Current consumption DC power connection 0 2 A max DC power connection 0 2 A max Charging battery 0 4 A max Insulation resistance Between all lead wires and case 0 5 MQ at 250 V 420 Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual Model with AC DC battery power supply Item Model with DC power supply FQ2 D30 FQ2 D31 Environ Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 50 C Operating 0 to 50 C when mounted to DIN mental Storage 25 to 65 C Track or panel immu with no icing or condensation 0 to 40 C when operated on a Battery nity Storage 25 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensation Ambient atmosphere No corrosive gas Vibration resistance destruction 10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0 35 mm X Y Z directions 8 min each 10 times Shock resistance destr
277. etry modes Normal retry exposure shutter speed retry scene retry and trigger retry cannot be used at the same time When scene retry is ON the normal retry and exposure retry modes in the same scene are OFF When normal retry exposure retry or scene retry is ON trigger retry is OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Retry Function 185 suoljoun JUs UsAUODD Z Setting normal retry e Set the retry mode to Normal retry in Retry details p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Retry details 1 Press Normal retry for the retry mode 2 Press OK e Specify the maximum count and interval p gt Inspect Retry details 1 Set the maximum count and interval Parameter Settings Description Max count 0 to 20 default 4 Sets the maximum number of retries Interval 32 to 999 default 100 Sets the capture interval msec Setting exposure retry e Set the retry mode to Exposure retry in Retry details p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Retry details 1 Press Exposure retry for the retry mode e Set the brightness shutter speed step increment count and decrement count gt Inspect Retry details 7 Set the shutter speed step increment count and decrement count Setting the Retry Function FQ2 CH User s Manual Parameter Brightness shutter speed step Settings Brightness 1 to 20 default 2 Shutter speed 0 01 to 1 00 default 0
278. ewing diffuse reflections is normally safe see also note Class 4 Lasers which are also capable of producing hazardous diffuse reflections They may cause skin injuries and could also constitute a fire hazard Their use requires extreme caution Note Conditions for safe viewing of diffuse reflections for Class 3B visible lasers are minimum viewing distance of 13 cm between screen and cornea and a maximum viewing time of 10 s Other viewing conditions require a comparison of the diffuse reflection exposure with the MPE FQ2 CH User s Manual Requirements from Regulations and Standards 437 z L seolpueddy 12 7 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications This section lists the objects that are mounted in the Sensor 1 1 01h Identity Object Class Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Revision UINT Revision of the object 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Maximum instance number 1 3 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of object instances 1 4 Get Revision Structure Revision of Identity object 1 1 Major Revision UINT Major revision 1 Minor Revision UINT Minor revision 1 7 Get Maximum ID Number UINT Attribute ID of instance 7 Instance Attributes attributes Instance Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Vendor ID UINT Vendor ID 47 2 Get Device Type UINT General device
279. f the model DIST first_position_X first_position_Y second_position_X second_position_Y Example Finding the distance between the centers of gravity of region 0 and region 1 DIST RO X R0 Y R1 X R1 Y The following calculation is performed internally J RA X RO X R1 Y R0 Y e Finds the length of a perpendicular line from point x y to line ax by c 0 DIST X_coordinate_of_point Y_coordinate_of_point coefficient_a_of_line coefficient_b_of_line coefficient_c_of_line FQ2 CH User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 119 suonjoedsu dN buiyjes 74 Setting Judgement Parameters for Expressions 1 Press Judgement on the Settings Tab Page Inspect gt Calculation 2 Press an expression between 0 to 31 and set the cor responding judgement parameters using the slider 3 Press the OK Button Reflecting the Judgement Results for Expressions to the Overall Judgement Results You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of a calculation in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Inspect Calculation Details Tab Page Output parameter Reflect 120 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Inspection Item Data That Can Be Used in Expressions Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default st
280. fects on product performance 1 Installation Site Do not install this product in locations subjected to the following conditions e Ambient temperature outside the rating e Rapid temperature fluctuations causing condensation e Relative humidity outside the range of 35 to 85 e Direct vibration or shock Strong ambient light such as other laser beams light from arc welding machines or ultraviolet light e Direct sunlight or near heaters Strong magnetic or electric field Also do not install this product in locations subjected to the following conditions to ensure its protective performance as described in the specifications e Presence of corrosive or flammable gases e Presence of dust salt or iron particles e Water oil or chemical fumes or spray or mist atmospheres Installing and Using a Sensor with Built in Lighting The front panel plate may occasionally become fogged from the inside if the Sensor is used in location with high humidity and the temperature changes drastically e Do not install any objects except for the special mounting brackets within the dotted lines in the following figure The front panel plate may become fogged from the inside pm j rT a a Water proof Sheet 25mm l Hes nm I Tesmm l I I i I 1 i l 1 l 25 mm 25mm UL 25 mm re alai 125 mm I I I I pat amit Lo I aa I 04 I I I L L
281. ference position when it was registered position X SY1 Edge1 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position Y FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 89 sobew uiye L Two edge Midpoint Compensation This position compensation item detects edges in two directions If the specified density is detected it is recognized as an edge Two edge positions are detected The image is adjusted so that the coordinates of the midpoint position of a line that connects the two detected edge positions matches the position when the edges were registered Midpoint position center of a line that connects positions 1 and 2 Registered position of the edge Detected edge positions positions 1 and 2 Measurement a region for edge 0 Measurement The image is adjusted so that the region for edge 1 midpoint appears at the position it Edge search Edge search was in when it was registered direction for edge 0 direction for edge 1 Density of edge to be found p gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp 2 Press Edge 2Edge midpoint comp 3 Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Two edge Midpoint Compensation below 4 Press OK 5 Press Back e Detailed Settings fo
282. g Test Tab Page Test Measurement and Results Verification Adjusting Judgement Parameters Saving the Settings Starting Operation Run Mode Elements Section 3 Taking Images Section 7 Convenient Functions Section 3 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken Section 4 Setting Up Inspections Section 4 Setting Up Inspections Section 7 7 11 Setting the Retry Function Section 8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection Section 9 Connecting through Ethernet Section 10 Connecting with RS 232C 77 7 Section 5 Testing and Saving Settings Section 6 Operation 1 In Setup Mode the Sensor can be set up and adjusted but it does not output signals on the I O lines 2 In Run Mode the Sensor performs measurements and outputs signals on the I O lines Basic Operational Flow FQ2 CH User s Manual Installation and Connections 2 1 System Configuration 0 eee eee eee 24 2 2 Part Names and Functions 0 0c eee eee eee eee 27 2 3 lnstallation once ee a ssc ees when Ste saeco ase te a Sa sane ee nate ay ae 30 2 4 Wiring eos ee ch te cee eae Sie et che Satie gc 35 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet 0 0 e eee eee eee 46 24 2 1 System Configuration Ethernet EtherNet IP No protocol or PLC Link Connection Setup Tool Control PLC Touch Finder orPC Tool industrial EtherNet IP or Ethernet
283. g Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 detected edge position sition 1 Data logging ON X 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 detected edge position sition 1 Data logging ON Y 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui Position compensation X 0 settings X display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui Position compensation Y 0 Y display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui Detected edge position X 0 X display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF 703 Detected edge position Setting Acqui Detected edge position Y 0 Y display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 395 z L seolpueddy 396 Two edge Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG
284. g measurement conditions for Sensors p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Edge pos comp Details Tab Page Meas parameter Item Parameter Description Measurement methods Projection default A projection is formed based on the gray level and any position of intersection between the gray level value and the threshold edge level is detected as an edge This detection method is used when you must process an image with exces sive noise or when the edges are blurry Differentiation A differentiated waveform is created that represents the amount of change in gray level between neighboring pixels The maximum value of the differenti ated waveform that exceeds the threshold edge level is detected as an edge This detection method is used for low contrast images Density change Light to Dark default Detects as an edge any position within the specified region that changes from white to black Dark to Light Detects as an edge any position within the specified region that changes from black to white Unstable Edge Position Results There Is an Edge But It Cannot Be Detected p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Edge pos comp Details Tab Page Meas parameter Edge level Parameter Setting Description Edge level Range 0 to 100 Set the density change level to detect as an edge Default 50 The edge point is found bas
285. g switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 position X sition 1 Data logging ON 316 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 i position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 i correlation sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 Y display sition 702 Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 on sition 704 Position Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 os sition FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 393 z L seolpueddy Edge Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logge
286. g_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM SS IFZ 3 image data LOGIMAGE number 2 Example The following name would be used for measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10 2012 img_2012_ 05 10 22 10_21 IFZ Data logging mea sensor_name LOGDATA 2 File name_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS CSV 4 surement data Example The following name would be used for measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10 2012 2012_05_ 10 22 10 _21 CSV 1 A five digit number is assigned as a name to the image data storage folder in the order of folder creation as shown below Up to 100 images are stored in each folder 00000 00001 2 Files are stored in the following folder when the PC Tool is used My Documents OMRON FQ SDCard 3 You can change the img at the beginning of the file name 4 You can add a character string to the beginning of the file name e Setting the File Name for Logged Data You can set a character string to add to the beginning of the file name for logged data Image data You can change the img_ at the beginning of the file name for logged data to another text string Measurement data You can add a character string to the beginning of the file name for logged data gt si Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings File format 1 Select the item for which to add to or change the file name and then press Logging image file or Logging data file Press File name prefix Enter the file name up to 15 alph
287. ge Enhance edges Enhances image edges between light and dark Background Suppression Extracts a specific range of brightness to increase the image contrast and suppress the unnecessary background Example Increasing Contrast L Any areas that are outside of the specified range of brightness are removed as the background Also the brightness within the specified range is converted to 255 levels to enhance the contrast FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 61 sobew uiye L Setting Filter Items p gt Image Image adjustment 1 2 3 Press an unused number and then press Add filter Press the filter item to use ma Color Gray Filter A Make any detailed settings as required for the filter Refer to the detailed settings for each of the following fil ter items Sas ads en id Press Back 3 Make any the following settings as required for each filter item Setting the Source Image for Filtering LT Ip 62 Setting the Region to Filter LT p 63 e Setting the Brightness Range to Extract for Back ground Suppression Item Only LT p 63 Seiting the Image to Filter Source Image You must set the image to which the filter is to be applied p gt Image Image adjustment Add filter Filter item to select 1 Press lt Source image on the right of the display 2 Set the source image to Camera or Prev Param
288. ge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 1 sition 99 999 9999 men 186 Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 men 187 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 men 188 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 men 190 Edge angle upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 s Adjust judge sition men 191 Edge angle lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sition men 192 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 360 to 360 360 Adjust judge sation upper limit sition men 193 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 360 to 360 360 Adjust judge sation lower limit sition men FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 403 z L seolpueddy 404 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judg
289. ging the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal p 228 This control signal is used to turn ON external lighting when an image is taken Connect this signal to external lighting This signal is output to an external device when exposure of the imaging elements is completed If you want to move the Sensor to the next measurement location after a measurement is completed move the Sensor only after this signal turns ON Shutter Output Signal SHTOUT ON Trigger input TRIG OFF Trigger delay ON Imaging element Shutter time shutter signal OFF ON SHTOUT OFF 10 ms The SHTOUT signal turns ON for approximately 10 ms fixed when the shutter time exposure period elapses after the trigger is input from an external device Wiring FQ2 CH User s Manual RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ SDU2L FQ2 cH O00O0O00 M E 1 2 17 18 z sensor o 3 4 19 20 j He ie 5 6 21 22 7 8 23 24 FQ WUO i z E A Sensor Data Unit Cable H a lle ea 13 114 29 30 15 16 31 32 m ee sion Screw size M3 Power SUPPI 12E N zav f Tightening torque Power supply 0 V i gf fos 0 54 N m E Heo RS 232C connector Frame ground 4 f
290. gions and measurement directions for both edge 0 and edge 1 p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge position comp Modify Basic 1 Press Teach Edged region 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera 3 Move the rectangle to the location to be measured and then press OK This concludes setting the measurement region and edge search direction for edge 0 Next go to step 4 to set the measurement region and edge search direction for edge 1 4 Press q Edge1 region on the right of the dis EEETAIT play move the rectangle to the location to be mea 5 sured and then press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching E e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing BA Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 66 Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge position comp Modify Details Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item BA Interpolation p 75 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual e Measurement Data That Can
291. hange bit W0 00 turns ON the scene number is input to INO to IN3 and IN4 is turned ON Wwo 00 Scene change a If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after the i scene number is input the trigger to change the scene IN5 is turned ON T0000 OUT1 INS The trigger to change the scene IN5 is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0001 BUSY When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that the scene has been changed processing after changing the scene is performed W0 01 turned ON I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 CIO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 CIO 1 15 Note The BUSY signal will be ON while the scene it being changed If the cycle time is too long the PLC may not be able to detect when the BUSY signal is ON If necessary turn OFF W0 00 after a suitable time elapses Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Registering the Measurement Reference Again The model can be re registered with commands from an external device such as a PLC based on the image that was just input when the line process was changed Inspection item Re registered data Search Position Compensation and Shape Search Position Compensation Model data Edge Position Compensation None Note
292. he Sensors to connect to select them Note The Sensors that can be set are indicated by an asterisk before the Sensor name e You cannot select the check box if a Sensor that was registered by the user cannot be detected e The names of Sensors that are on the same network as the Touch Finder are given in parentheses FQ2 CH User s Manual Connecting to More Than One Sensor 161 suoljoun JUs UsAUDD Z Selecting the Display When More Than One Sensor Is Connected Selecting the Display When More Than One Sensor Is Connected You can select the display to appear on the Touch Finder when more than one Sensor is connected gt a Setup Mode or Run Mode TF Settings Startup display Startup screen type 1 Select one of the following display types Display type Multi Sensor Description Simultaneously displays the images from up to eight detected Sensors The display positions for Sensors that are not connected will remain blank The Sensors are connected in the order that they are detected You can change the display positions of the Sensors Specifying Sensor Display Positions for Multiple Sensors Multi Sensor or Auto Only p 162 If there are more than eight Sensors that can be connected select the Sensors to con nect from the list of Sensors LT Selecting the Sensors to Connect p 161 Register the Sensor to connect to display a specific Sensor LT Registering
293. he Touch Finder ON and OFF 6 Touch pen holder The touch pen can be stored here when it is not being used 7 Touch pen Used to operate the touch panel 8 DC power supply connector Used to connect a DC power supply 1 43 9 Slider Used to mount the Touch Finder to a DIN Track 10 Ethernet port Used when connecting the Touch Finder to the Sensor with an Ethernet cable Insert the connector until it locks in place 11 Strap holder This is a holder for attaching the strap 12 AC power supply connector Used to connect the AC adapter 1 Applicable to the FQ2 D31 only 28 Part Names and Functions FQ2 CH User s Manual Sensor Data Units Front Surface of Parallel Interface Back Surface of Parallel Interface RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit Sensor Data Unit Sensor Data Unit No Name Description 1 Sensor connector Connects to the FQ2 CH 2 Power supply and ground termi Connects to the 24 V power source and the ground line nal block 3 Parallel I O connector Connects to the I O connector 4 I O indicators POWER Lights green when power is being supplied ERROR Lights red when an error occurs RUN Lights green during operation BUSY Lights yellow when the Sensor is executing a process SENSOR Lights yellow when the Sensor is connected OR OK Lights green when the overall judgement result is OK OR NG Lights red when the ove
294. he model registration region can be formed freely by combining enabled and disabled regions Example Figure 1 Enabled range Figure 2 Disabled range The gray section wa Tg is the model i 1 oN region or i E m 2a XN Pad Figure 3 Enabled range p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Model region 1 Draw the figure according to the section that you want to mask LT p 72 2 gt While the figure to be masked is selected press q on the right of the display and then press OR NOT The selected area will be removed from the model Every time you press OR NOT the area will switch be tween being enabled and disabled OR Enabled range NOT Disabled range ABC Change type of region to OR NOT Console 1 23 Aon One All Fine tuning the Position of the Region This section describes the console which is useful to fine tune the position of the measurement region or the model registration region in 1 pixel increments p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Model region 1 Press lt q Console on the right side of the display where you draw the region The console will appear 2 To adjust the position of the figure press within the frame To adjust the size of the figure press a
295. he parallel outputs Refer to the following section for the specifications of the ACK signal LT 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit p 214 Introduction to RS 232C Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual 10 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications If you connect an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to the Vision Sensor you can use no protocol communications between an external device such as a PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control from the external device via command response communications or to output data after measurements You can use these communications methods simultaneously Command Response Communications With no protocol communications the external device sends a control command to the Vision Sensor and receives a response back from the Vision Sensor This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform single measurements or change the scene External device Sensor Data Unit Vision Sensor i Command gt Changing the scene number e Executing one measurement etc lt _ Response OK etc The external device sends a command as an ASCII string e g MEASURE for a single measurement The Vision Sensor then returns a response such as OK NG or some value Data Out
296. he same network as the Sensor dis connect the other devices from the network and check the update speed If the update speed returns to normal check the specifications of the disconnected devices and take suitable measures If there are power lines running in parallel with the Ethernet cable or if there are inverters or other sources of noise near the communications cable separate the communications cable from them and check the update speed Noise may be adversely affecting the communications response Data is not logged properly Check to see if the logging setting in the Sensor are correct p 164 If logging to an SD card is not possible check the available space on the SD card and check to see if the SD card is write protected p 176 The ERROR indicator lights Check the error history to see what error has occurred and take suitable measures p 360 The measurement trigger is not input Check to see it the measurement trigger is set correctly The image brightness does not stabilize Turn ON the brightness correction mode When the Brightness Correction Mode is ON the timing when images are taken changes Check that the images of the measured objects taken when the Brightness Correction Mode is ON are appropriate p 53 FQ2 CH User s Manual Basic Troubleshooting 363 Buljooyse qnod L L L MEMO 7 Basic Troubleshooting FQ2 CH User s Manual Appendices 12 1 Me
297. he scene to copy Switching Scenes from an External Device e Changing Scenes with a Parallel Input Command T p 204 p 230 e Changing Scenes with a PLC Link Command O p 301 Changing Scenes with an EtherNet IP Command LT p 273 Changing Scenes with a TCP No protocol Command O pe 327 e Changing Scenes with a FINS TCP No protocol Command LT p 346 FQ2 CH User s Manual Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process 147 suoljoun JUsIUsAUOD Z 148 Setting the Startup Scene gt siz Setup Mode Sensor settings Startup settings The following items can be set Item Startup mode Purpose Select whether the startup scene number is set manually Setting range ON OFF The scene number when the settings were saved will be the startup scene number The star tup mode is set to OFF in the default settings Startup scene Set the scene number to use at startup Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process Standard models 0 to 31 Single function models 0 to 8 Default 0 FQ2 CH User s Manual 7 2 Calibration Calibration Calibration is used to convert Camera coordinates into actual coordinates You can set calibration to output the detected position in the actual coordinates You can convert pixels to actual dimensions and then output them Example 540 pixels 30 mm Y
298. he shutter speed and gain When HDR is ON the shutter speed and gain are automatically adjusted for the optimum exposure When HDR is OFF the gain is fixed gt si Setup Mode Sensor settings Retry details Retry mode 1 Select the retry mode Retry mode Description Normal retry Scanning is repeated the specified number of times at the specified interval until the entire code is successfully scanned The maximum count and interval are set The settings are configured in the retry settings of each scene Exposure retry Scanning is repeated the specified number of times while varying the exposure when HDR is OFF the shutter time is varied until the entire code is successfully scanned The brightness step shutter speed step when HDR is OFF increment count and decrement count are specified The settings are configured in the retry settings of each scene Scene retry Scanning is repeated the specified number of times while switching the scene until the entire code is successfully scanned Auto or Fixed is selected for the switch order Auto Automatically decides the switch order based on the scanning success rate Fixed Switches scenes in the set order Trigger retry When the trigger signal is ON scanning is repeated until the entire code is successfully scanned To use trigger retry the I O input mode must be set to expanded mode None default Retry is not performed Combining r
299. i g L Sem Om For the I O connector harness use an FQ VP2 Parallel Cable for the FQ SDU2 or a MIL standard harness such as the OMRON XZ2F The Cables are sold separately Signal Power supply 24 V Application These terminals are for the external power supply 24 V Power supply 0 V e Wire the power supply separately from other devices If the wiring for other devices is placed together or in the same duct as the wiring for the Vision Sensor the influence of electromagnetic induction may cause the Sensor to malfunction or may damage it Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA Frame ground FQ2 CH User s Manual This is the frame ground terminal Connect it to the ground wire Wiring 39 G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejersu 40 FQ SDU20 SDU25 Parallel Pin Signal Names Pin Signal IN Function Pin Signal IN Function OUT OUT 1 INO IN Command input 17 COMINO Input signal common RESET 2 INT IN Command input and INO to INS 3 IN2 IN Command input 18 COMIN1 Input signal common TRIG 4 IN3 IN Command input 19 TRIG IN Measurement trigger input 5 IN4 IN Command input 20 INC 6 IN5 IN Command input 21 NCT a 7 Nc 22 RESET IN Reset input 8 NC 23 NC 9 NC 24 ACK OUT Command execution completed flag 10
300. ictionary data is backed up All dictionary data The file name extension is DGP sensor_name DGP All dictionary data is backed up Sensor system data The file name extension is SYD sensor_name SYD All system data in the Sensor is backed up The system data is the same for all scenes All Sensor data The file name extension is BKD sensor_name BKD All settings in the Sensor all scene data Sensor system data and calibra tion group data are backed up Touch Finder data The file name extension is MSD MSD All settings in the Touch Finder are backed up Calibration data file name extension CLB The calibration settings for each scene are backed up Calibration group data file name extension CGP The calibration settings for all scenes are backed up 1 For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder My Documents OMRON FQ Saving Sensor Settings FQ2 CH User s Manual Restoring Data to the Sensor from External Memory p gt Setup Mode Load from file 1 Press the data to be restored Load from file 2 The selected data will be read from external memory and displayed Press the file to load FQ2 CH User s Manual Saving Sensor Settings 175 suoljoun JUsIUsAUOD Z With an FQ2 Vision Sensor the following folders are automatically created in the SD card according to the data that is saved The specified data is sa
301. idual 8 judgement results and measurement val oO ues no Statistical data Displays the total number of measure ments and the total number of NG overall judgements and the NG ratio from when the power supply was turned ON All results Region Displays the inspection item individual judgement results for all inspection items Trend Monitor Displays the individual judgement results p 140 saved in the Sensor in a trend monitor Histogram Displays the individual judgement results p 141 saved in the Sensor in a histogram Model region Changes to Setup Mode and changes the output form for measurement values Insp region Changes to Setup Mode and changes the parameters for judgement conditions Clear results Clears the judgement results that have been output Adjust judgement Adjusts judgement parameters without p 143 Except for statistical stopping measurements data Auto display trend Automatically sets the display range OFF or ON default p 140 monitor and histo according to the measurement results p 141 gram only Display range trend Changes the display range of measure 999 999 999 to 999 999 999 p 140 monitor and histo ment values p 141 gram only Number of data Changes the number of displayed mea 200 400 or 1 000 default 200 p 140 trend monitor only surement values Number of data his Changes the number of displayed mea 5 to 1 000
302. ient when more than one Sensor is connected p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Information q Rename Checking Available Memory in the Sensor If a setting cannot be made check the amount of memory that is available in the Sensor gt ie Setup Mode Sensor settings Information q Memory state Correcting the Touch Screen Positions of the Touch Finder Use this function to correct the touch screen positions if they are offset from the opposite position gt siz Setup Mode TF settings Touch screen calib Setting the Resolution of Measurement Objects Displayed on the PC Tool Use this function to set the resolution of measurement object that are displayed on the Touch Finder on the computer p gt Run Mode TF settings Resolution Rotating the Touch Finder Image by 180 You can rotate the Camera image by 180 This setting applies to logged images as well p gt Image Camera setup lt lt Rotate 180 Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator You can change the BUSY indicator to a RUN indicator p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output BUSY LED Setting the Inspection Timeout Time The time after which inspection times out can be set msec gt sie Run Mode Sensor settings Timeout Functions Related to the System FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Qutputting Data with a Parallel Connection 8 1 Co
303. ies M B File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protocol TCP IP a Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notific Notify me when this 5 Select the Use the following IP address Option and en ation area when connected connection has limited or no connectivity Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties ter the following IP address and subnet mask General IP address 10 5 5 101 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 6 Click the OK Button This completes the settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway 10 5 5 110 255 255 255 0 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Connections on Existing Networks Set the Ethernet settings of the Sensors and the computer PC Tool to the same settings as the existing network Refer to Connecting to Sensors from the Touch Finder on page 46 for the IP address settings in the Sensors Note e If you connect the PC Tool to a Sensor on a different network through a router set fixed IP e If
304. image data 184 DSA 38 ECO mode 158 edge level 84 Edge position comp edge position compensation 65 edge position compensation 82 edge rotation position compensation 91 Enhance edges 61 Erosion 61 ERROR 38 40 error histories 360 error history deleting 361 errors in error history 360 viewing 361 error messages 362 ERROR signal 209 errors clearing 204 errors stored in the error history 360 Ethernet 46 Ethernet cable 427 connector 27 Ethernet no protocol commands 317 Ethernet port Touch Finder 28 exposure retry 186 external lighting 53 59 external trigger 194 Extract Edges 61 Extract Horiz Edges 61 Extract vertical edges 61 field separator 168 FQ2 CH User s Manual file format files logging filter items FINS commands FINS TCP no protocol commands focus adjustment screw formatting an SD Card FQ Ethernet Cable frame ground frozen images Gain GATE Graphics Graphics Details GUI language handshaking HDR function hiding the menu high dynamic range histograms auto display class display range I O Cable connector I O Cables I O indicators 232C_COM BUSY OR NG OR OK POWER ERROR RUN SENSOR 1 O monitor image adjustment image data logging image input increasing speed partial input image input mode images displaying last NG image displaying saved images frozen live updating zooming in zooming out zooming to fit display INO to IN5 INO to IN7 FQ2 CH User s Manual 168 165
305. ined variables are used to access the communications areas for the Sensor using the following notation Command Area Signal name Variable name EXE ElPOutput ControlFlag F 0 TRIG E lPOutput ControlFlag F 1 ERCLR ElPOutput ControlFlag F 15 DSA ElPOutput ControlFlag F 16 Command code ElPOutput CommandCode Command parameter 1 EIlPOutput CommandParam1 Command parameter 2 ElPOutput CommandParam2 Command parameter 3 EIlPOutput CommandParam3 FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 265 yeusau y uBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 266 Response Area Signal name Variable name FLG EIPInput StatusFlag F 0 BUSY EIPInput StatusFlag F 1 READY EIPInput StatusFlag F 2 OR EIPInput StatusFlag F 3 RUN EIPInput StatusFlag F 4 ERR EIPInput StatusFlag F 15 GATE EIPInput StatusFlag F 16 Command code EIPInput CommandCodeEcho Response code EIPInput ResposeCode Response data Output Area EIPInput ResposeData Signal name Variable name Output data 1 EIPInput OutputData 0 Output data 8 EIPInput OutputData 7 Accessing Communications Areas by Specifying I O Memory Addresses AT specifications can be set for variables to individually specify the I O memory addresses that are assigned in the communications areas 1 Setting Tag Sets Network Configurator Specif
306. ing you will also need to adjust the timing to turn ON external lighting Delay time Delay from when the trigger is input until when Sensor input is started Trigger input Sensor p gt Image Trigger setup Trigger delay 1 A TRIG signal is input Images are input continuously 2 Select the image with the measurement object in the p center using Ki and gO Input the TRIG signal 3 Press the image 4 Press OK Note The delay time can be set using the adjustment bar or by directly entering a value Triager delay Input the TRIG signal Move the bar to the left or right Or Directly input the delay time Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting External Lighting Timing When you use a trigger delay you must adjust the timing to turn ON external lighting so that it matches the trigger delay timing Using a Strobe Trigger Signal to Control External Lighting If a Sensor Data Unit is connected you can change the output time of the strobe trigger signal STGOUT to adjust the timing of the external lighting LT Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal p 228 p gt Image Camera setup 4 Lightning control Preventing Mutual Interference of Multiple Sensors When the same trigger signal is input to multiple Sensors the lighting from one Sensor may affect the measurements of the other Sensors This is called mutua
307. ing Is Disabled 1 lt gt The data is output according to the set 2 output cycle 1 and output time 2 lt gt After data output is completed the GATE signal turns ON and the output data is maintained for the data output Response Data Output ON Area Completed hold time GATE signal OFF Output data 1 to 64 ON Output Area DATA1 to DATA64 OFF i Here the Vision Sensor ends measurements and can output data 250 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Set the parameters so that the following conditions are met for the data output period and time Set the timeout time in the connection settings between the PLC and Sensor so that it is longer than the measure ment processing time of the Sensor Set the data output period so that it is longer that the GATE signal ON period and shorter than the measurement interval of the Sensor Set the GATE signal ON period so that it is longer than the cycle time of the PLC and longer than the packet interval RPI e When operating under high load conditions a considerable leeway is required in the measurement interval to enable stable communications On a network to which many devices are connected performance may drop e g responses may be delayed or packets lost or communications errors may occur when there is temporarily high traffic on the network Test the operation under actual conditions before you start actual op
308. ing One Measurement for Each External Trigger A measurement trigger is input as the TRIG signal from a proximity sensor PLC or other external device One measurement is performed when the TRIG signal turns ON 1 TRIG signal ON Or other device Trigger input Sensor measurements once Wiring Color Signal Description The signals shown at the left are used Pink TRIG Trigger signal Refer to the following information for signal wiring Black OUTO OR Overall judgement default LT wiring p 35 assignment Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default assignment Timing Chart ON TRIG signal E ON for 1 ms min OFF ON i BUSY di ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions OR signal lt Turned ON when overall judgement is NG OR output ON for NG 1 Turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 Measurement begins and the BUSY signal is turned ON during the measurement process 3 When the measurement has been finished the measurement result is output using an OR signal and the BUSY signal is turned OFF 1 You can also set the signal to be turned OFF after data logging image logging or displaying results in the BUSY output When the Brightness Correction Mode is ON the timing when images are taken is delayed LT Triming Chart When the Brightness Correction Mode Is ON p 53 i Controlling Operation and Outputting Dat
309. inserted for unused digits OFF Spaces are inserted for unused digits Example The following examples are for when five integer digits and three decimal digits are set and the data is 100 000 ON 00100 000 OFF _ 100 000 The underscore indi cates a space Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 2 G Field Selects the separator to use between None default comma tab space CR Scene p 314 3 3 2 separa output data LF or CR LF w s a w tor 5 ta Si 9 2 Z g Record Selects the separator to use between None default comma tab space CR Scene 2 8 separa sets of output data LF or CR LF Bie im Ea tor O S 2 Zc fam o ds Deci Selects the numerical expression for Floating point decimal or fixed decimal Scene mal binary output default T output Fixed decimal point data is multiplies by z form 1 000 and the result is output E 5 2 fo o r 5 Output data set The same as for no protocol data output above Scene p 256 p 291 S Output format Scene w ne ae 3 2 Settings Data0 to Data15 Scene oO 5l m 2 Settings Sets the data from the inspection item to Inspection item text strings Scene p 216 judge oO 2 Rename Changes copies or clears the data Scene 5 Col 2 py Scene 9 g D
310. ion Add item OCR Settings Tab Page QNS data Press Verification Press Master data regist Press the character string to register in the master 4 You can use any of the following three methods to register character strings in the master data from the menu display Auto Manual A character string is read from an image and registered in the master data The procedure is essentially the same as the procedure for teaching in step 2 A character string is entered directly in the master data You can use a software key board to register a character string with up to 32 characters You can set letters numbers symbols and the following wild cards and A wildcard for a character string of 0 or more characters A wildcard for one character Item ref Select this item to use the immediately pre ceding read results as the verification charac ter string The following inspection items can be used as references OCR You cannot ref erence an inspection item that is after the cur rent inspection item After a character string is registered a reference item number such as Ref 00 will be displayed to the right of the character string in the master data Reading and Verifying Character Strings Verification DOER 2 Auto teach No 12345 Ps FQ2 CH User s Manual 5 Repeat the above procedure to register more than one character string in the
311. ion 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 12N to 3 1251 N Master data 12N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 1261 Verification con Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 ditions number 13 0to 31 1262 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 13N to 3 1263 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 13N to 3 1271 N Master data 13N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1281 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 14 0 to 31 1282 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 14N to 3 1283 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 14N to 3 1291 N Master data 14N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1301 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 15 0to 31 1302 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 15N to 3 1303 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 ae x2 N 0 ning digit 15N to 3 1311 N Master data 15N Setting Acquisition 32 cha
312. ion Sensor First word of Bits Contents command area 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents SEES ea ETS 8to11 4t07 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired scene number Select Scene Command Code 0030 1000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command HEA 12to 15 8to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Scene number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents response area 12t015 8to11 4t07 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 273 yeusauy uBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Get Image Adjustment Data Command Code 0040 1010 Comma
313. ion compensation is turned ON the image will be compensated for a 15 to 15 rotational variation This setting compensates for rota tional variations in the placement of the workpiece on the line and not for rotational variations in the characters themselves that result from printing conditions Slant compensation ON OFF default If slant compensation is turned ON the image will be compensated for a 20 to 20 slant variation This setting compensates for slant variations in the placement of the workpiece on the line or in the printing mecha nism and not for italic fonts Hyphen height upp th 0 to 100 Sets the upper limit of the height of the region to treat as a hyphen or other symbol Hyphen height low th 0 to 100 Sets the lower limit of the height of the region to treat as a hyphen or other symbol Slender char th 1 to 10 Sets the ratio of the height to the width of the detection character rectan gle to judge as thin characters I J 1 and 106 Reading and Verifying Character Strings FQ2 CH User s Manual Parameters That Are Automatically Set during Teaching The following measurement parameters are automatically set when teaching is performed e Character color Printing type Dot ver interval Dot hor interval e Noise filter size e Char thick th e Rotation compensation e Slant compensation Boundary correction Changing the Output Code for Errors
314. ion for details LT 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 46 To use EtherNet IP communications do not automatically assign an IP address to the Vision Sensor Set a specific IP address and do not change it Initial Settings for EtherNet IP Communications gt siz Setup Mode Sensor settings Data output Link data output 1 Press Communication type 2 Press EtherNet IP 3 Set the EtherNet IP communications parameters as Handshake setting Set to Yes described in the following table FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 247 jeuseu y yBnosy Buyoauu0D 6 248 Parameter Handshake setting Description Set whether to synchronize with the PLC when data is output No Measurement results are output without synchronizing with the PLC LT Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Disabled p 280 Yes Measurement results are output while syn chronizing with the PLC LT Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled p 280 Setting range e Yes No default Yes Output data size Set the data size to output from the output area Any changes in the setting are applied when the Sensor is restarted Note If the total size of the data that is specified as output data exceeds the size that is set here all of the data will not be output at the same time but will be separated over more than one cycle
315. it 23N to 3 1463 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 23N to 3 1471 N Master data 23N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 1481 Verification con Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 ditions number 24 0to 31 1482 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 24N to 3 1483 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 24N to 3 44914N Master data 24N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1501 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 25 0to 31 1502 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 am x2 N 0 digit 25N to 3 1503 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 25N to 3 1511 N Master data 25N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max se x2 N 0 to 3 1521 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 26 0 to 31 1522 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 26N to 3 1523 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 ae x2 N 0 ning digit 26N
316. ividual reg on the right of the display 674 607 727 680 ABCDE 123468 Papaya 2 Select the region to delete and press the Delete But ton 3 Press the OK Button Changing the Measurement Parameters 1 Onthe right of the display to add characters press Neas Parameter O Dictionary data0 EJ Meas Parameter to enable changing the mea Character color surement parameters 10 Reading and Verifying Character Strings FQ2 CH User s Manual Extracting Characters Based on Specified Character Formats 1 To extract characters based on a specified character fires format press Kl Modify chara on the right of the display O Dictionary data0 2 Press a line to enter the character format for that line from the software keyboard that is displayed Enter 12345 the character format for each line Setting Dictionary Parameters P Inspect Inspection Add item OCR Details Tab Page 1 Press Dictionary param Dictionary param DOGR Dictionary ref individual char 2 Press Dictionary ref and select the dictionary to Enae use FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings i suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 74 112 3 Press Individual char and select the letter or num ber to use individual char 0 0CR Iphabet rte w s ke 12345 B individual char 0 0CR a lt 4 Press Back Outputting Read Characters to an Exter
317. jH Output data 1 ro Output Area to 64 DATA1 to oOo DATA64 OFF i i E i i i f i i i Here the Vision Sensor ends 4 f t tt measurements and can output data 4 5 1 After measurements are completed the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is turned ON by the PLC and a request is made to the Vision Sensor to output the data 2 The Vision Sensor outputs the data After the data is output the Data Output Completed GATE signal turns ON 3 The master confirms that the Data Output Completed GATE signal has turned ON loads the data and turns OFF the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal 4 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Data Output Request DSA signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Data Output Completed GATE signal 5 The Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is turned ON from the PLC and a request is made to output the data 1 If the data output request signal is not manipulated within the control timeout time 100 to 120 000 ms in the EtherNet IP settings and data output error will occur and the ERR signal will turn ON When the ERCLR signal is turned ON the ERR signal will turn OFF However if a timeout occurs again the ERR signal will turn ON again Therefore correctly request data output DSA control or execute a Clear Data Output Buffer command 2 Indicates that the data to output is separated and output more than once Data Output after Measurements When Handshak
318. k areas the dynamic range can be made wider to improve the quality of the images Polarizing filter for Sensors Specular reflections can be eliminated from an image by attaching a polarizing filter to the with Built in Lighting Sensor If the measurement object must be moving use a polarizing filter Also if reflections can not be sufficiently removed by using the HDR function use a polarizing filter as well HDR Function The HDR function is used for objects that have a large difference between light and dark areas For this kind of object clear images cannot be achieved with the standard brightness setting The HDR function combines several images of different brightnesses shutter speed so that the resulting image has a lower degree of contrast and can be measured stably for the desired characteristic Inputting Images with a Limit Range of Brightness Combining Images to Create an Image with a Wide Dynamic Range Dark mm Bright Observe the following precautions e Use the HDR function only for objects that are not moving to avoid image blurring Several images are taken with different shutter speeds and combined If the object moves while the image is being taken the image will become blurred e Images with different brightnesses are combined so the resulting image will have a lower degree of con trast p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press 4q HDR on the right side of the display 2 Set the best level for
319. l Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment imit sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit sition 99 999 9999 ment 184 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ow a condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Settin
320. l interference This kind of interference can be prevented offsetting the image input timing of each Sensor from when the trigger signal is received Example A trigger i e the TRIG signal is input to Sensor 0 and Sensor 1 at the same time TRIG signal Fa Timing of taking the image Sensor 0 i No trigger delaY Timing of taking the image i I Sensor 1 Sensori JL LLE e Sensor 1 1 Change to the setup for to Sensor 1 trigger delay LT p 50 2 Press Image Trigger setup Trigger delay Trigger Sensor Sensor 0 immediately begins image input when the trigger is input Sensor 1 begins image input after the specified time has passed 3 Setthe trigger input delay time for Sensor 1 LT p 58 The delay time for preventing mutual interference must be longer than the shutter time When the lighting built into the Sensor is used the shutter time is 4 ms max Therefore make the delay at least 4 ms FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images 59 sobew uiye L 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken Image Adjustment You can adjust the image that is taken by the Sensor to make it easy to measure There are mainly the following two types of items that you can use to adjust the image Filtering the Images Filter Items These items filter the image by eliminating image noise with filters to make them suitable for measurement Compensating for Position Offse
321. l it clicks into place 3 Close the cover to the SD card slot Removing an SD Card from the Touch Finder 1 Open the cover to the SD card slot on the top of the Touch Finder 2 Press in on the SD card until you hear a click 3 Pull out the SD card 4 Close the cover to the SD card slot e Never remove the SD card while data is being saved or read The data on the SD card may be corrupted Do not restart or turn OFF the power supply to the Sensor or Touch Finder while a message is being displayed saying that data is being saved to or read from the SD card The settings or system data may be corrupted FQ2 CH User s Manual SD Card Operations NTE suoljoun JUs UsAUDD Z 178 Checking the Available Space on the SD Card Before saving data to the SD card use the following display to make sure that there is sufficient space available on the SD card P si Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings SD card SD card information The following information in the SD card inserted in the Touch Finder can be checked S0 card infurmalion Formatting an SD Card p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings SD card Format Press Yes to start formatting SD Card Operations FQ2 CH User s Manual 7 9 Convenient Functions for Operation This section describes the functions that can be used during Sensor operation Setting a Password to Prevent Unwanted Changes A password can be set to prevent
322. lity Adjusting the Focus p gt Image Camera setup 1 Display the Camera Setup Display The focus can be seen as a numerical value The higher the value the better the focus Imane gt Camera setup Focus Level 2 Adjust the focus of the Sensor while checking the im age and focus value on the Touch Finder Turn clockwise to focus on closer objects For a Sensor with Built in Lighting manually adjust the The field of view will focus using the focus adjustment screw on the Sensor narrow In the default settings the field of view is set to the nar C rowest setting 3 Press Back Turn the screw counterclockwise to focus on objects at a distance The field of view will widen Focus adjustment screw Sensor with Built in Lighting e Turn the focus adjustment screw clockwise or counterclockwise a little bit to make sure that it has not already reached the dead stop Do not force the screw if it does not rotate anymore This will damage the Sensor Do not turn the focus adjustment screw with a force that is greater than 0 1 N m This may damage it a2 Adjusting Image Quality FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting Image Brightness with External Lighting You can adjust image brightness with external lighting or by setting the Sensor sensitivity Using a Strobe Trigger Signal to Control External Lighting If a Data Unit is connected you can change the output time of the strobe trigger signal STGOUT to a
323. llowing information for Green IN1 OFF signal wiring Red IN2 OFF White IN3 ON LU 2 4 Wiring p 35 Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for external teaching Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart 1 Turn ON INO and IN3 and turn OFF IN1 IN2 and IN4 INO to IN4 snas lt COC gt lt 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the Lese i Allow 5 ms min and then BUSY signal is OFF to execute i turn ON INS external teaching ON IN5 signal m ON for 1 ms min 3 The BUSY signal turns ON while OFF d external teaching is being executed ON BUSY signal OFF 212 Start external teaching End external teaching Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Sample Ladder Program This sample program is used to input IN5 to external teaching Wwo 00 ee When the external teaching bit W0 00 turns ON INO and IN3 are turned ON External teaching bit Wwo 00 External teaching bit If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after INO and IN3 turn ON the command input for external teaching IN5 is turned ON T0000 OUT1 IN5 The command input for external teaching IN5 is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0001 BUSY When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that external teaching has been completed processing after external teaching is executed W0 01 is turned ON
324. ls Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal will be ON while data is being saved in the Sensor ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function IN1 to IN3 Turn OFF IN4 Turn ON IN5 Turn OFF IN6 Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for saving data in the Sensor Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Connecting through Ethernet 9 1 Introduction lt 3 2 s 05 seats Slit EE ae Se 240 9 2 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 241 9 3 PLC Link Connections 00 eee eee eee eee eens 283 9 4 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 2 000 c cece eee eee 309 9 5 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands easa a eis Siew eaaa tas ow Ris icon E a aa by aaa a aaie aa Taia Saa 338 u104 4 yno Huyosuu0D 6 With the FQ2 you can use any of the following protocols to transfer data through Ethernet TCP no protocol commands Commands are sent from the PLC to control the Sensor p 309 Received data is stored in the buffer memory of the specified port FINS
325. lts of Position Compensation p 66 Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment Edge position comp Modify Details Scroll parameter Interpolation LT Interpolation p 75 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the Y coordinate X Position X edge position This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 X sured edge position Y Position Y edge position This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Y sured edge position SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the edge 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 position when it was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999
326. m Description Image logging image data All All images will be logged regardless of the measurement results e Only NG Only images for which the overall judgement was NG will be logged None No images will be logged default Data logging measurement All All measurement data Measured values and calculation results will be logged regardless of the data measurement results Only NG Only measurement data Measured values and calculation results for which the overall judgement was NG will be logged None No measurement data Measured values and calculation results will be logged default Note The logging parameter settings are the same for recent results logging Selecting the Measurement Data To Log Use the following procedure to select the measurement data to log p gt In Out Log setting Measurement data Select data 1 Press the inspection item or expression that has the ppREAY parameter for which to log data Logging upper limit 2 Press the parameter for which to log data to select it PESEE O 0CR Logging upper limi Heasurement values to log Note The procedure to select the measurement data to log is the same for recent results logging IG Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Storage Locations and File Names for Logged File Data Data Storage location File name Image logging sensor_name EN im
327. mages In Sensor 20 images If a Touch Finder is used images can be saved up to the capacity of an SD card Auxiliary function Math arithmetic calculation functions trigonometric functions and logic functions Measurement trigger FQ2 CH User s Manual External trigger single or continuous Communications trigger Ethernet TCP no protocol Ethernet FINS TCP no protocol EtherNet IP or PLC Link z L seolpueddy Specifications and Dimensions az Item Inspection and ID models Model NPN FQ2 CH10 M PNP FQ2 CH15 M I O specifica Input signals 7 signals tions Single measurement input TRIG Control command input INO to IN5 Output signals 3 signals e Control output BUSY Overall judgement output OR Error output ERROR Note The assignments of the three output signals OUTO to OUT2 can be changed to the individual judgements of the inspection items the image input ready output READY or the external lighting timing output STGOUT Ethernet specifications 100Base TX 10Base T Communications Ethernet TCP no protocol Ethernet FINS TCP no protocol EtherNet IP or PLC Link I O expansion Possible by connecting FQ SDU1L Sensor Data Unit 11 inputs and 32 outputs RS 232C Possible by connecting FQ SDU2L Sensor Data Unit Input specifications Refer to Table 2 Output specifications
328. mand code 13 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Save Data in Sensor Command Code 0010 3010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 3 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG m Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Re register Model Command Code 0010 4010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0100 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0100 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 ee ie a he 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 15 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG External Teaching Command Code 0010 4020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 3 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 Command code
329. mat p 314 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications You can send commands from an external device to control the Sensor The commands and the command formats are the same as for no protocol communications for an Ethernet connection LT Controlling the Sensor from an External Device p 317 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications 357 O Ozez su ym Buyoeuu09 MEMO 8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Troubleshooting 11 1 Error Histories 222 sia8 2 eaaa ee eee ee a sea eee 360 11 2 Error Messages 0 00 c eee eee eee 362 11 3 Basic Troubleshooting 00 eee cece eee eee eee 363 11 1 Error Histories Error histories are stored with the PC Tool and in the Sensor and in the Touch Finder Up to 100 errors will be stored in the error history in the Sensor or Touch Finder Errors Stored in the Error History Error in error history Cause Points to check Measures to perform TRIG Input Error ere Error code 01040302 A TRIG signal was input when the BUSY signal for Sensor measurement was ON Check the program in the PLC or other host to see if an inter lock or similar measure has been implemented If a relay or other device with contacts is being used as the input device see if chatte
330. mat for Saving Measurement Data The output CSV file format can be changed according to the external device p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings File format Logging data file 1 Press Output format 2 Change the required items in the CSV format 3 Press Back Item Symbol Field separator None comma default tabs space colon semicolon CR or CR LF Decimal symbol None point default or comma Record separator None comma tabs space colon semicolon CR or CR LF default Enabling File Logging You must enable file logging before you can execute it p gt Setup Mode TF settings Logging setting 1 Press ON Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Starting and Stopping Logging After logging is started i e set to ON the specified image data and measurement data will be saved in the SD card or computer hard disk each time measurements are performed p gt Run Mode 1 Press Logging 2 Press Image logging or Data logging 3 Press ON to start logging Press OFF to stop logging 4 Press Back Note To save logged data you must first select either All all data is saved or Only NG only NG data is saved in the logging parameters LT setting Logging Conditions p 165 Ensuring That All Measurement Results Are Logged in External Memory To ensure that all measurement results are actually sav
331. mber 8 0to 31 1162 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 ea x2 N 0 digit 8N to 3 1163 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 8N to 3 1171 N Master data 8N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1181 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 9 0 to 31 1182 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 a x2 N 0 digit 9N to 3 1183 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 9N to 3 1191 N Master data 9N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1201 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 10 0to 31 1202 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 10N to 3 1203 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 10N to 3 1211 N Master data 10N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1221 Reference unit Setting Acquisition number 11 1222 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 11N to 3 1223 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 11N to 3 1231 N Master data 11N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1241 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 12 0to 31 1242 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 12N to 3 1243 4N Verification begin Setting Acquisit
332. ment starts when the TRIG signal turns ON while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 The BUSY signal turns ON when measurement begins 3 The TRIG signal turns OFF when the BUSY signal turns ON 4 The OR of the measurement results is output when measurements are completed 5 The BUSY signal turns OFF when the BUSY output condition is met FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 277 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Execution of Control Commands Other Than Continuous Measurements with the Control Command Execu tion Bit EXE Signal ON j i j i i i i i Command code OFF i j i itt ON i i i i i Command parameters Command OFF i ro Area rit i i i i i i Control Command ON 1 i Execution Bit EXE signal OFF mat POE i tt i i i i oe ae TE Command code i rt i OFF i i i i AE EE i 4 a i i tat Command ON p Execution Active i i ee tt BUSY signal OFF m Y l tt i i La i tty R ON o E PA READY signal o OFF i Li 7 ot i tt i ttt i tt i ttt ON i pA i ttt Response code i tt i i i OFF oeoo i tt i i i i i E i ttt ON j tt v i i i te i i i Response data i it i ta i a i i i i i OFF p4 al i t i E SE Control Command ON i tt i i Completed FLG signal OFF 11 i tt i i i EN i a na BS g cS 1 Set th
333. mera image 1 g sition 1 Previous image 121 Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 sition Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea only sured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure sition 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 ane a tions sition Erosion Median Extract Edges Extract Horizontal Edges Extract Vertical Edges Enhance edges External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure si
334. min OFF 4 ON ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions Turned ON when overall OR signal x lt judgement is NG OR output ON for NG Overall judgement BUSY signal OFF due Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Note The timing for updating the OR signal and the ON time after judgement processing can be adjusted LT Adjusting the judgement output timing p 200 Getting Individual Judgements and Expression Judgements Up to three judgement results of individual inspection items item judgement signals ORO to OR31 and expression judgements expression 0 judgement to expression 31 judgement can be assigned to terminals OUTO to OUT2 and output to external devices Output terminal Default assignment Output signals that can be assigned OUTO OR Total judgement Control signals OR BUSY ERROR READY and RUN STG strobe trigger OUTI BUSY Item judgements ORO Item 0 judgement to OR31 OUT2 ERROR Item 31 judgement Expression judgements Expression 0 judgement to expression 31 judgement The timing for updating the ORO to OR31 signals and the ON time after judgement processing can be changed LT Jadiusting the judgement output timing p 200 Wiring Example Signals are assigned to terminals OUTO to OUT2 as shown below OUTO Item 2 j
335. mmand Is Not Processed Normally E r cr Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Measurement result The measurement results corresponding to the number of measurements made are out put when data output is set The measurement result is not output when data output is not set BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 311 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 321 u194 3 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 End Continuous Measurements The command ends continuous measurements lt Command Format gt MEA Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally jo K Data returned result for the number of continuous measurements Measurement CR CR made Delimiter O 5 Note Set the data output to output measurement results If data output is not set only the command response is output LT Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 311 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Utility commands CLRMEAS Clear Measurement Values This command clears the measurement values lt Command Format gt Command _ efit Rim elals jor Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed
336. n Acquires the latest error information p 305 Command Details Single Measurement Command Code 1010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command Ae 12to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 4 byte binary 43 0000 0000 0001 ooo0 78 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents pee G 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Note The measurement results are written to the output area if data output is set The measurement results are not output if data output is not set ha Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 288 FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 297 yeusauly yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Start Continuous Measurements Command Code 1020 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents eae 12 to 15 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents een a T 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 Aenea it the 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 45 0000 0000 0000 0000
337. n Compensation item but it performs processing to detect differences in colors and patterns in addition to processing for image pattern shapes Note To perform position compensation for a rotated image pattern use the Shape Search Position Compensation item Setup Procedure for Shape Search Position Compensation Step 1 Selecting the Position Compensation Items p gt Image Image adjustment Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp Add pos comp 2 Press Model Search pos comp LT Registering inspection items p 97 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and partial image as reference data for the measurement p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search pos comp Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera Aa Q Move the rectangle to the location to be measured Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching Drag a corner to Drag the rectangle size the rectangle to move it O Shape pos comp p6 222 948 836 Hodel region ABCDE 12345 Cancel The following data is stored as the measurement reference I
338. n etc Menu Tables 367 z L seolpueddy 368 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence S E 5 5 Edge 0 Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene E a RS 2S region surement region changes the measure 3 5 5 Edge 1 ment direction etc 8 3 region 2 p O Edit Ref Set the reference angle 180 to 180 default 0 Scene E z 6 langle re Edge Rota co pra Sd tion Position 5 amp Compensa 5 tion only 25 E oS mS Qu Te es Ss cay ss Eg 55 g Judgement Sets the judgement conditions for position compensation items Scene Meas Parameter Sets the measurement and output parameters for position compensation items Scene D Q Output parameter Scene Source image You can select the image to which to Camera Prev default Scene p 75 e apply the results of position compensa g tion processing a z Interpolation You can select the precision of position Bilinear None default Scene p 75 a compensation a Inspect Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Add item Modify Inspection Delete Item selected Copy Rename Menu Tables Used to add modify delete copy or change the name of an inspection item p 98 15 alphanumeric characters p 98 FQ2 CH User s Manual
339. n 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 1N to 3 1031 N Master data 1N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 1041 Verification con Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 ditions number 2 0 to 31 1042 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 2N to 3 1043 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 2N to 3 1051 N Master data 2N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1061 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 3 0to 31 1062 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 am x2 N 0 digit 3N to 3 1063 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 3N to 3 1071 N Master data 3N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1081 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 4 0to 31 1082 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 4N to 3 1083 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 ae x2 N 0 ning digit 4N to 3 1091 N Master data 4N Setting Acquisition 32 charac
340. n 3 214 Setting the Measurement Trigger 0 araura eee ee eee eee 214 setting Output Data cc ae pees te eet atte Ra ete Rha awit eg 215 Aligning the Data Output Timing with the External Device 220 Changing the Settings of the I O Signals 0 0 00 e eee eee 228 Controlling Operation from an External Device 000005 229 9 Connecting through Ethernet 9 1 Introduction 2 0 cece eee eee eee 240 9 2 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 241 Introduction to EtherNet IP 0 0 00 cece ee 241 FQ2 Communications for EtherNet IP Connections 243 Setting Up EtherNet IP Communications 000 cee eee eee 247 Tag Data Link Setting Methods 0 0 000 00 000005 250 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 253 Memory Assignments and Commands 20 0 cece eee eee 259 Timing Chart for EtherNet IP Communications 00055 277 Sample Ladder Programming 0000 e cece eee ee eee 282 9 3 PLC Link Connections 0 00 c cece teen eee 283 Setting Up PLC Link Communications 00000 cee eee 286 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 288 Memory Assignments for PLC Link Communications 293 Timing Chart For PLC Link Communications 0 0 306 Sample Ladder Programming
341. n Je Jor lt Response gt Change Scene Number This command changes the scene number to use lt Command Format gt slejejnje for s ler L Delimiter n Delimiter Scene number Scene number 2 digits max 2 digits max lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally o k or Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r eR Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Scene number Specifies the scene number 0 to 31 to change to FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications gar u194 3 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Data Acquisition Setting Commands POSITIONDATA or PD Get Image Adjustment Data This command acquires parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item lt Command Format gt Command External reference data 4 digits max HHA _ Pfols ijtjifojnjojajrja for or Space Item Delimiter 0x20 number ej TTT EET le ity we Delimiter Command Space Space External reference data 0x20 0x20 4 digits max Space Item 0x20 number lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the item number of th
342. n YO _ Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 15 Standard position X1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 16 Standard position Y1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 17 Standard midpoint Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SMX Logged data position X only 99 999 9999 18 Standard midpoint Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SMY Logged data position Y only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 gt tions sition sation 2 1 Position compensation D based on internal edge a position measurement o D 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 g image sition 1 Previous image 149 Edge level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 Monochrome 50 N sition Cameras FQ2 CH User s Manual 399 External Reference Parameters 400 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 150 Mea Noise level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sur
343. nal Device After a measurement you can automatically output the character string that was read with the OCR inspection item to a PLC or other external device The character strings are output after outputting the output data output data settings 0 to 31 such as the inspection item parameters and calculation result Refer to the description for the communications format for the setting procedure and output specifications to output the character string Outputting Character Strings EtherNet IP p 256 e PLC Link p 291 TCP No protocol Communications p 316 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgment not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 16 Measurement timeout error 17 Format not entered error IN Index This is the verification result i e the 2 Verification OFF or reading error master data number 1 Verification is NG 0 to 31 Master data No N Number of read characters This is the total number of charac 0 to 128 ters that were read for all four lines SIM Similarity This is the lowest simil
344. nal Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications Command Format This section describes the command format for no protocol communications Commands defined in the command list can be used Set commands and parameters in ASCII If the command has an argument parameter set the parameter after inserting a space 0x20 If it has multiple parameters insert a space before each parameter Place a delimiter at the end of the command No space is required before the delimiter The delimiter is always CR lt Command Format gt Command Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Space Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 0x20 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications gir u194 3 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 lt Response Format gt If a parameter is attached the parameter and delimiter are output when the command is processed normally and the command execution result is OK A delimiter is inserted at the end of the response The delimiter is always CR Command Execution Result Parameter jt e or Delimiter o Jor Delimiter If the command is not processed normally the command execution result is NG Command Execution Result N e or Delimiter An error occurs in the following cases A non existent command was specified The number of parameters is incorrect The parameter range is incorrect The parameter content is inc
345. nal turning ON between when the STEP signal turns ON and the measurement results are output Reading Data When the GATE Signal Is Output No Handshaking The Sensor will output the measurement results without synchronizing with the external device but the GATE signal is also output The GATE signal is used to control the timing of when the external device reads the measurement data Adjust the external device so that it reads the measurement results when the GATE signal is output External device Note 1 Measurement processing and results output OR and DO to D15 2 GATE signal 4 You can change the settings of when the GATE signal is turned ON after the measurement data is output and the length of time that the GATE signal will remain ON Setting the Output Timing fo the GATE Signal p 220 The GATE signal will not be output if there is no data set for parallel judgement output and parallel data output If only the OR signal is output read the OR signal when the BUSY signal turns OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 221 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoju0D 222 Single Measurement Example Three Data Items Set for Parallel Data Output Timing Chart N Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered O RUN signal B OFF ON TRIG signal ON for 1 ms min OFF ON
346. nd Treats dark areas at the edges of the ON or OFF default Scene ary cor measurement region as noise and rection removes them from the read candi dates Rotation Turned ON when characters on the ON or OFF default Scene compen workpiece are rotated because the sation workpiece itself is rotated Correction is possible in a rotation range of 15 Slant Used when the characters are at a ON or OFF default Scene compen slant Correction is possible in a rota sation tion range of 15 Hyphen Sets the upper limit of the height of the 0 to 100 default 30 Scene height region to treat as a hyphen or other upp th symbol Hyphen Sets the lower limit of the region to 0 to 100 default 70 Scene height treat as a hyphen or other symbol low th Slender Sets the ratio of the height to the width 1 to 10 default 3 Scene char th of the detection rectangle to judge as thin characters I J 1 and Continuous test Same as Continuous test on the Test Tab Page Scene p 126 FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 369 z L seolpueddy for read errors NG Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 Judgement Scene D Di T i Similarity Sets the similarity of the read charac O to 100 defaults lower limit 60 upper Scene p 103 2 8 ters that is to be judged as OK
347. nd Response data Response data This I O port contains the response data of the executed command Output Area Vision Sensor Slave to PLC Master First Bits Contents word 1 e fae ie sh i 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Output data DATA 0 0 32 bits 1 14 Output data DATA 7 7 32 bits 15 128 Output data DATA 63 63 32 bits 129 512 Output data pen DATA 255 255 32 bits 513 Signal Signal name Function Application DATA0 255 Output data 0 to 255 These I O ports output the output data thatis Data output after specified for the data output method The range of the data that can be output is determined by the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting as follows Minimum setting 32 bytes Output data 0 to 7 Default setting 256 bytes Output data 0 to 63 Maximum setting 1 024 bytes Output data 0 to 255 measurements If the size of data that is output exceeds the set value of the number of output data upper value setting the remain ing data will be discarded O Allocating Output Data p 291 FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 295 u194 3 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Command Tables for PLC Link Communications This section describes the commands used in PLC Link communications Measurement Control Commands 1010 0010 Single Measurement Performs a single measurement p 297 1020 0010 Start Continuous Measure Exec
348. nd PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents ee 12 to 15 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 45 0000 0000 0000 ooo0 pe 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents ore Se E T 8 to 11 4107 0 to 3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0100 0000 ee ee ea me 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 ok GENE sut 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 7 0000 0000 0000 gogg ee times the valle Set Image Adjustment Data Command Code 0050 1010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents ees 12to 15 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 45 0000 0000 0000 gog e number 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 9 0000 0000 0000 ooog 1900 times value zd Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents Pei els Sika lar Oy rea Fs 8 to 11
349. nd then restart the Vision Sensor LT 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor p 133 LT Restarting the Sensor p 189 The port number on the FQ2 Vision Sensor is always 9877 Initial Settings for PLC Link Communications You must set the IP address of the PLC to connect to assign the Command Area Response Area and Output Area and make other settings to perform PLC Link communications gt sa Setup Mode Sensor settings Data output Link data output 1 Press Communication type 2 Press PLC link SYSMAC or PLC link MELSEC depending on the PLC that is connected 3 Press Area settings Here you specify the addresses in the I O memory of the PLC that are to be allocated as the communica tions areas for PLC Link communications Press Command Response and Output and set the memory area Area type and first word Ad dress in the I O memory of the PLC to allocate to each of these communications areas When you are finished press Back 286 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Item Description Setting range Command com Area type Select the area for the If PLC Link SYSMAC is selected mand area Command Area in the CIO Area CIO PLC Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO to EMC Default ClO Area CIO If PLC Link MELSEC is selected Data Register Data registers File Register File registers Li
350. nder are used IP addresses are automatically assigned No settings are required to use Ethernet Connections on Existing Networks If a Sensor or Touch Finder is connected to a network where a PLC or computer is already connected the Ethernet settings must be made compatible with the existing network Set the IP addresses with one of the following methods Setting Fixed IP Addresses e Sensor gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Network Ethernet IP address setting 1 Press Fixed 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask according to the network settings Note e If you connect the Touch Finder or PC Tool to a Sensor on a different network through a router set fixed IP addresses e If you use an EtherNet IP connections set fixed IP address for the Sensors e Touch Finder gt se Setup Mode TF settings Ethernet AUTO 1 Press OFF 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask according to the network settings Using a DHCP Server e Sensor gt si Setup Mode Sensor settings Network Ethernet IP address setting Press DHCP e Touch Finder gt si Setup Mode TF settings Ethernet AUTO 1 Press ON Setting Up Ethernet FQ2 CH User s Manual Connecting to Sensors from External Devices Such as PLCs Set the IP address of the Sensor according to the network where the external devices such as PLCs are connected gt si
351. ng Test Measurements 127 sBunjes Bulnes pue Buse G Checking the Measurement Takt Time The measurement time of this Sensor can be checked from the Setup or Run Mode display Measurement Stabil ity BO EO The measurement time is the time taken from when a trigger is input until when all measurement processes are executed During the measurement time this Sensor will not accept the next trigger This means that the measurement time is the basic measurement takt time Inputting a trigger Measurement time Measurement takt time File Image input Measurement logging 28 Shortening the Measurement Takt Time FQ2 CH User s Manual Increasing Image Input Speed With the partial input function it is possible to input only images that are in the region that is necessary for measurements The image measurement region becomes smaller and therefore the image input time is shortened Consider the offset in the measurement object when you set the range The image in the input range will be displayed in the inspection item setting displays and measurement displays p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press 4q Partial input on the right side of the dis play 2 Change the input size 3 Press OK 4 Press Back Partial Input Changing the Image Input Mode Pixel sampling can be applied to the input image to reduce image input time p gt Image Camera setup Image input mode Pa
352. ni cations became impossible after they were established Check to see if communications were cut off with the data link partner device and to see if a cable is broken Check the cable connection to the data link partner device EtherNet IP communica tions error Error code 01010101 A timeout occurred in process ing to output the measurement results via EtherNet IP Make sure that handshake pro cessing is being performed by the master Also make sure that the measurement interval is long enough Check the measurement interval and handshake processing Change the timeout time so that it is suitable for the ladder program processing time Output buffer error Error code 01010701 An output data buffer overflow occurred during output process ing of measurement results for PLC Link or EtherNet IP e Check the measurement inter val to see if it is long enough Make sure that handshake pro cessing is being performed by the master Check the measurement interval and handshake processing SD card output error Error code None A write to the SD card failed An attempt was made to save more data than the available space on the SD card Check to see if the SD card is locked Check to see if there is sufficient space available on the SD card Unlock the SD card Delete unnecessary files from the SD card Note ere If an error that is indicated by this icon occurs the ERR
353. nications This signal returns to OFF when the Command Execution Active BUSY signal goes ON DSA Data Output Turn ON this signal from the PLC to request data output Data output Request Bit When this signal turns ON the Vision Sensor outputs after measure This bitcan be data ments ly wh E R Turn OFF the DSA signal from the PLC when the Data 9 Output Completed GATE signal from the Vision Sensor enabled turns ON ERCLR Clear Error Turn ON this signal to turn OFF the error ERR signal Command from the Vision Sensor response com munications Turn OFF this signal from the PLC when the error ERR signal goes OFF FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 259 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Signal Signal name Function Application method Command code Command code This I O port stores the command code Command response com Parameters 1 to 3 Command param These I O ports store the command parameters po P munications eters Output Connection to PLC Vision Sensor Originator to PLC Target Response Area Bits Contents ia az We de wv 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 ERR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv RUN OR READY BUSY FLG Vision Sta tus Flags 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv
354. nit p 214 If an RS 232C Sensor Data Unit is mounted you can transfer data through an RS 232C connection using TCP no protocol commands LT 10 Connecting with RS 232C p 353 Introduction FQ2 CH User s Manual 9 2 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP Introduction to EtherNet IP EtherNet IP is an industrial multi vendor network that uses Ethernet The EtherNet IP specifications are open standards managed by the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association EtherNet IP is used by a wide range of industrial devices Because EtherNet IP uses standard Ethernet technology various general purpose Ethernet devices can be used in the network EtherNet IP has mainly the following features High speed High capacity Data Exchange through Tag Data Links The EtherNet IP protocol supports implicit communications which allows cyclic communications called tag data links with EtherNet IP devices Tag Data Links at Specified Communications Cycle for Each Application Regardless of the Number of Nodes Tag data links cyclic communications operate at the cyclic period that is specified for each application regardless of the number of nodes Data is exchanged over the network at the refresh cycle that is set for each connection The communications refresh cycle will not increase even if the number of nodes is increased i e the concurrency of the connection s data is maintained Because the refresh cycle can
355. nk Register Link registers Default Data Register Address Set the first address of the 0 to 99 999 command area in the PLC Default 0 Response Area type Set the PLC memory area Same as for the Command Area response area for the response area Address Set the first address of the 0 to 99 999 response area in the PLC Default 100 Output output Area type Set the PLC memory area Same as for the Command Area area for the output area Address Set the first address of the 0 to 99 999 output area in the PLC Default 200 4 Set the communications protocol Comm type to PLC Link communications jala vulput nication type PLC link SYSH Output handshake Retry details Retry interval TONON 256 Max output data yeusauly yBnoiy Buyosuu0D Item Description Setting range Output handshake Enables or disables handshaking No or Yes Yes Data is output when the DSA signal from the PLC turns Default No ON No Data is output regardless of the signal state from the PLC o Retry details Enables or disables retrying communications ON or OFF Default OFF Retry interval Sets the interval for retrying communications This setting is enabled only when Retry details is set to ON 0 to 2 147 483 647 ms Default 10 000 ms Max output data Sets the maximum data size that can be output at one time through PLC Link communications Set the number of bytes Any output data that is beyond this valu
356. nsionsS 0 00 cece e eee eee 415 SONSOfiec He miau serana iea ae aa selenide adalat elle eee 415 Touch Finder js asa eae oh te ae ee Chile dias eRe ae Eko 420 Sensor Data sUnits cco snd eaae a ane ed toa a a a S raaa 424 System Requirements for PC Tool for FQ 020 e eee eee eee 427 OPONSE aa ieee are eee esa ee eee pe nea era 427 12 4 Updating the Software cece eee eee 432 Step 1 Update the software for the PC Tool or Touch Finder 432 Step 2 Update the software for the Sensor 000 0 eee eee 432 12 5 LED Satety x oxigen sessed aa a wish el eve cet a E a aa etates a 433 Warning Label 1 sc 005 ska chee eer ee be eee ee eed oe ede ee bees 433 12 6 Requirements from Regulations and Standards 0 434 FOrEUIOPe Poris idara n Orie dle tte Mtoe da elt tt Obata dad Alaa oe 434 FOREUOPG siegen noise aa A a Sadat een bead 436 Ror Europa tity Pease ae eters AAA y Ew ee dene Mew SYR eae te 437 12 7 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications 438 Index 442 Revision History ciare sc nearen ieee tra Doe eee ea 446 15 FQ2 CH User s Manual Introduction 1 1 FQ2 CH series Optical Character Recognition Sensors 18 1 2 Measurement Process 0 00 c cece eee eee eee eee eee 19 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements 000eee eee 20 1 4 Basic Operational Flow 0 00 ccc eee eee 22 1 1 FQ2 CH series Optical Cha
357. nsor change output This signal is OFF while the Vision Sensor is operating normally Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Signal Signal name Function Application method RUN Run Mode This signal is ON while the Vision Sensor is in Run Mode Sensor status h This signal is OFF while the Vision Sensor is not in Run enange output Mode GATE Data Output Com This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor finishes out Data output pleted putting data If Handshake setting is set to Yes this signal automati cally turns OFF when the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal from the PLC turns OFF If Handshake setting is set to No this signal turns OFF after the data output period has elapsed after measure ments Command code Command code This I O port returns the command code that was exe cuted Response code Response code This I O port contains the response code of the executed command Response data Response data This I O port contains the response data of the executed command Command response com munications If measurements are executed in parallel the EtherNet IP BUSY signal will also turn ON FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 261 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 e Output Area The output area is assigned immediately after the response
358. nsor Data Unit to an external device FQ SDU1 Parallel cable for FQ VP2 This cable connects the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device FQ SDU2 RS 232C cable Recommended This cable connects the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device to connect to a PLC XW2Z 200S V 2 m or XW2Z 500S V 5 m 1 The shape and dimensions of the Ethernet connector plug and jack are specified in ISO IEC8877 1992 JIS X 5110 1996 and RJ 45 of the FCC regulations To prevent connector connection failures the structure of the jack of this product does not allow insertion of plugs that do not comply with the standard If a commercially available plug cannot be inserted it is likely that the plug is non compliant Do not connect network devices other than PLCs on the same network as the Touch Finder or computer If another device is connected the responsiveness of displays and settings of the Touch Finder or computer may become slow FQ2 CH User s Manual System Configuration G SUOMOBUUOD pue uonejersu Connection Compatibility Yes Supported No Not supported EtherNet IP No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PLC Link on Ethernet No one Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes TCP no protocol communi Yes Yes No No Yes Yes cations on Ethernet FINS TCP no protocol com Yes Yes No No Yes Yes munications on Ethernet RS 232C Yes Yes No No E Yes No Parallel Sensor s stan Yes Yes Yes Yes No
359. nt in Run Mode adjustment during operation All Region All Sensor data Angle Angle range auto connect Background Suppression backing up data backlight basic troubleshooting Battery specifications battery level brightness brightness correction mode Brightness step BUSY BUSY Indicator BUSY signal BUSY signal output polarity calibration calibration data saving calibration group data saving calibration pattern camera image camera image file Camera input camera setup capturing image changing from BUSY indicator 428 28 38 40 228 143 143 139 174 78 71 79 20 61 174 158 363 44 421 190 55 53 187 38 40 190 192 202 149 174 174 150 155 180 157 139 52 180 190 changing line process using scenes 146 checking the error histories clearing the error histories COMINO COMIN1 COMOUT COMOUTO COMOUT1 configuration 361 361 38 40 38 40 38 40 38 97 connecting to more than one Sensor 160 connection automatic console Correlation eee Index 20 73 69 77 CSV 168 DO to D15 38 data saving 174 saving to file 174 DC power supply connector Touch Finder 28 decimal symbol 168 Decrement count 187 Definitions of Laser Classification 437 deleting log 172 detailed EtherNet IP communications specifications 438 Dilate 61 DIN Track mounting section 29 display elements 21 display language 189 display patterns 181 display types 138 displaying
360. ntrolling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s a Parallel Connection 00 00 e cece eee eee eee eee 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit s suer aede enai e i a a a A eee eee 214 8 1 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection Basic Operation with a Parallel Connection This section describes the basic connections and signal flow with external devices With the default settings the Sensor operates in the following manner Trigger Sensor External device lei 3 Judgement dli 3 il results output S Measurement trigger input 2 Measurements performed 1 Measurement on trigger input 4 The trigger to perform measurements once is turned ON TRIG signal OFF You can confirm if measurements are in progress 2 Executing ON F a M measurement ON while measure processing OFF his signal stays ON until the next measurement trigger can be input ments are iniprogress Turned ON when overall judgement is NG BUSY signal oF judg output overall judgement results are judgement OR signal output You can also use the READY signal which will turn ON when a measurement trigger can be input You can assign the READY signal to any output from OUTO to OUT2 QI Getting Individual Judgements and Expression Judgements p 199 Measurement ON trigger input
361. nu Tables cccseccsetsestenseeseeeenteenseeeene 366 12 2 External Reference Parameters 388 12 3 Specifications and Dimension 415 12 4 Updating the Software cesssese 432 12 5 LED Safety inc cicccsecssdeeecceecessenceetecenstcadacete 433 12 6 Requirements from Regulations and Stan MAS ideo eaten AT 434 12 7 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications ccesecseceeceseeeeeesseenseeeneeneeee 438 12 1 Menu Tables Image Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Focus The value shown here is used as a refer a p 52 ence when adjusting the focus with the focus adjustment screw oO 5 Image mode Pixel sampling can be applied to the Normal default or Fast Scene p 129 o g input image to reduce image input time Shutter speed Sets the shutter speed for Normal Mode 1 1 to 1 50 000 Scene p 54 Normal mode 1 250 to 1 50 000 for Sensors with Built in Lighting Default 1 250 Gain If the gain is high the image will be Range 16 to 64 default 16 Scene p 54 Normal mode bright If the gain is low the image will be dark Brightness Sets the brightness level of the image for 1 to 100 Scene p 55 HDR mode HDR Mode HDR Suppresses reflections and differences OFF default Level 1 to Level4 Scene p 56 in brightness Brightness correc Use to stabilize the brightness ON or OFF default
362. nual e Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the contrast of the image within the model registration region is too low Select a region with a larger contrast between light and dark areas compared to the region that was registered as the model and re register it as the model e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing BA Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 66 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment Search position comp Modify Details Scroll parameter Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 75 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999
363. numbers and symbols into the expression Data Used to select the inspection items for which to output data and insert the parameters to output into the expression Example Selecting Parameters for the Search Item at Inspection Item 0 Inspection item PO Search position comp Judgement result Judgement JG Correlation Corre CR Math Either of the following two functions can be inserted LPR function order of the measurement data The measurement data is output in order Format LPR start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 e LPC function order of the detection points Data is output for each detected measurement point Format LPC start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections ae yeusauly yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 290 Expression Setting Example This example registers an expression to output the following inspection results for data 0 Inspection item PO Search position comp Parameters to output Position X Position Y Reference SX and Reference SY Multi point output setting Multi point output Check Box selected Count 4 LPR 0 1 P0 X PO Y PO SX PO SY I Function Number_of_data data_A data_B data_d Detection count Start_number
364. o 100 0 N 0 to 127 3500 N ndividual stability Acquisition only 0 to 100 0 N 0 to 127 1 To acquire the detected texi 414 External Reference Parameters string use the ITEMDATA2 command FQ2 CH User s Manual 12 3 Specifications and Dimensions Sensor Specifications Item Inspection and ID models Model NPN FQ2 CH10 M PNP FQ2 CH15 M Field of view Refer to Table 1 Installation distance Refer to Table 1 Main functions Inspection items OCR and Model Dictionary Number of simultaneous measure ments 32 Position compensation Supported 360 Model position compensation Edge position compensa tion Number of registered scenes 32 Calibration Supported Retrying Normal retry exposure retry scene retry and trigger retry Image input Image processing method Monochrome Image filter High dynamic range HDR image adjustment and polarizing filter attach ment Image elements 1 3 inch Monochrome CMOS Shutter Built in lighting lit 1 250 to 1 50 000 Built in lighting not lit 1 1 to 1 50 000 Processing resolution 752x480 Partial input function Supported horizontally only Lighting Lighting method Pulse Lighting color White Data logging Measurement data In Sensor 1 000 items If a Touch Finder is used results can be saved up to the capacity of an SD card I
365. o select them A cross mark will be displayed on the selected position You can enlarge the display BA Image Zoom p 156 e You can fine tune the coordinates that are set Press lt q Console on the right of the display to display the console Press the Cross Key on the console to change the coordinates one pixel at a time 6 Press OK 7 Enter the actual coordinates of the specified position Press lt q Actual coord on the right of the display Enter the actual X and Y coordinates and press OK Repeat the above steps 4 to 8 to set the coordinates of the remaining positions 10 When you have finished setting the coordinates for all of the positions press Generate parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual No 4 Uncont iaured d No 5 Une antigured v Cross mark 996 0 242 FQ Serie Puint courd selling Point Actual Specify point No 1 8 l No 3 Configured No 4 ncn igured 4 Unconf iaured No 5 Uneontigured lv Calibration suoljoun JUs UsAUODD Z 152 11 The calibration parameters will be displayed Wud ify The items in the calibration parameters are listed in the following table Coefficient Cnett ic lente efficient E Cueff ic ient F E Item Setting Calculated va Calculated va Calculated va Calculated va Calculated va m mM O O BW Calculated val Reference Description
366. of the Touch Finder 2 Press the switch toward ON Power Supply Specifications Use a power supply that meets the following specifications The power supply is sold separately Item Description Power supply voltage 24 VDC 21 6 to 26 4 V Output current 0 65 A min Recommended Power Supply S8VS 01524 24 VDC 0 65 A External power supply terminal screws M3 5 tightening torque 1 0 N m Recommended power line wire size AWG16 to AWG22 length of 5 m max Important e Supply power from a DC power supply for which measures have been applied to prevent high voltages e g a safety extra low voltage circuit If UL certification is required for the overall system use a UL Class Il DC power supply When using the FQ2 D31 do not connect a switching regulator and AC Adapter FQ AC FQ2 CH User s Manual at the same time Wiring 43 G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu 44 Charging the Battery This section describes how to charge and install the FQ2 D31 Battery and provides applicable precautions Charge the Battery while it is attached to the Touch Finder Use the AC adapter to charge the battery Mounting the Battery in the Touch Finder 1 2 Do not insert the battery in the wrong orientation 3 Remove the screw from the battery cover on the top of the lt Touch Finder slide the cover in the direction of the arrow and open the battery cover Fac
367. ogging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ne condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 nme judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 nm ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion XO 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON ion YO 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON ion X1 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 ior detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion Y1 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y display sition 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 ne X0 display sition 703 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 YO display sition 704 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X1 display sition 705 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y1 display sition
368. older My Documents OMRON FQ 180 z Convenient Functions for Operation FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Startup Run Display Pattern You can select the startup run display pattern gt si Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Startup display Display pattern 1 Select from the following Graphics Graphics Details Statistical data All results region Trend monitor or Histogram Specifying the Sensors to Connect Continuously You can specify one Sensor to connect to the Touch Finder The Touch Finder will connect to that Sensor each time the Touch Finder is started p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Startup display 1 Set Specify sensor to ON 2 Set Sensor selection to the IP address of the Sensor Note If the Touch Finder cannot connect to the specified Sensor when the Touch Finder is started it will continue to retry until a connection is made If connection to the specified Sensor is not possible press the Cancel Button to cancel connecting to the specified Sensor Monitoring and Setting Up a Sensor from Two Touch Finders You can monitor and set up the same Sensor from two Touch Finders You can simultaneously monitor the Sensor from both Touch Finders You can set up the Sensor only from one of the two Touch Finders at any one time Touch Finder Touch Finder Sensor Switching Hub You can monitor the same Sensor at the
369. on and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 CH User s Manual Timing Chart 1 Specify the scene number INO to IN4 signals S aa with the INO to IN4 signals in Standard Mode x cene NUMOSEN tO Standard Mode Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN5 2 Turn ON the INS signal while the BUSY signal is ON to ON IN5 signal m ON for 1 ms min change the scene to the OFF i specified scene 3 The BUSY signal turns ON BUSY signal ii o il while the scene is being OFF switched Start scene change End scene change 1 In Expanded Mode specify scene numbers 0 to 15 using the INO to IN3 signals 1 1 1 Le 1 1 1 Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode The scene numbers that can be used depend on the input mode Standard mode default Scene 0 to 31 Expanded mode Scene 0 to 15 Note Even in Expanded Mode you can use menu commands or Ethernet no protocol commands to change to scenes 0 to 31 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 205 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D 206 Sample Ladder Program This sample program is used to change the scene when the input mode is set to Expanded Mode The scene changes to scene 1 when W0 00 turns ON Wwo 00 t Scene change bit When the scene c
370. ons that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the product At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document FQ2 CH User s Manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON P
371. onsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof COPYRIGHT AND COPY PERMISSION This document shall not be copied for sales or promotions without permission This document is protected by copyright and is intended solely for use in conjunction with the product Please notify us before copying or reproducing this document in any manner for any other purpose If copying or transmitting this document to another please copy or transmit it in its entirety FQ2 CH User s Manual Meanings of Signal Words The following signal words are used in this manual Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in minor or VAN WARNING moderate injury or may result in serious injury or death Additionally there may be significant property damage Meanings of Alert Symbols The following alert symbols are used in this manual Indicates general prohibitions for which there is no specific symbol Indicates the possibility of laser radiation Indicates the possibility of explosion under specific conditions Indicates prohibition when there is a risk of minor injury from electrical shock or other source if the product is disassembled This product is not designed or rated for ensuring safety of persons Do not use it for such purposes 2 e eO The Sensor emits visible light which may adversely affect the eyes in rare in
372. or Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 0010F010 Response Format If process is completed normally the Sensor is reset There is therefore no response External Teaching 280F 00104020 This command performs teaching for all applicable inspection items Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00104020 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00104020 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Sdi Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Getting the Scene Number 280F 00201000 This command acquires the scene number that is currently being used Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00201000 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Scene number 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00201000 Scene number that was acquired 2 digits max End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Scene number FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Oper
373. orrect Operation could not be performed normally for the operation command ore Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Command List The following table lists the no protocol commands Commands that can be used in no protocol Ethernet communications are listed below Type of command Command Abbreviation Function Reference Measurement control MEASURE M Executes one measurement p 320 and measurement acqui z sition E mands ag MEASURE C M C Starts continuous measure p 321 ments MEASURE E M E Ends continuous measure p 322 ments Utility commands CLRMEAS None Clears the measurement val p 323 ues CLRERR None Clears the error output status p 324 error signal and error indica tor DATASAVE None Saves the settings data to the p 324 Sensor MODEL None This command re registers p 325 the model for a registered search inspection item such as the Search Position Com pensation item RESET None Restarts the Sensor p 325 TEACH None Executes teaching for all p 326 applicable inspection items Scene control com SCENE S Acquires the current scene p 326 mands number SCENE Scene_number S Scene_number Changes the scene number p 327 being used Data acquisition setting POSITIONDATA PD Acquires data from a position p 328 commands Item_number Item_number compensation item or filter External_referen
374. ory Locations The memory locations that are used to exchange data across a connection are specified as tags You can specify memory addresses or variables for tags A group of tags consists of an output tag set and an input tag set Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual FQ2 Communications for EtherNet IP Connections You can use EtherNet IP tag data links to communicate between the PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control via command response communications or to output data after measurements The FQ2 complies with EtherNet IP conformance test version A8 To connect to OMRON Controllers and communicate through EtherNet IP you use the Network Configurator to set up tag data links i e tags tag sets and connection settings Refer to the following manuals for details on the tag data link settings that are made with the Network Configurator e NJ series CPU Unit Built in EtherNet IP Port User s Manual Cat No W506 e CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual Cat No W465 e CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual for NJ series CPU Unit Cat No W495 Types of Communications Command Response Communications With EtherNet IP communications cyclic tag data link communications are performed with the connections that are set between the PLC and Vision Sensor Command response control signals are handled by storing control commands from the PLC to the Vision Sensor and
375. os comp ABCIDE k 12345 El Measurement region region that is searched for the model If the model region is changed perform teaching again LT p 68 Changing the Measurement Region The region within which the model is searched can be changed In the default settings the whole display is set as the measurement region You can edit the measurement region in the same way as for a search region Changing the Measurement Region p 74 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data Parameter Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Scroll X 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement X amount of position compensation Scroll Y 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement Y amount of position compensation Correlation 0 to 100 This is the measured correlation Position X 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position X Position Y 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position Y Angle 180 to 180 This is the measurement angle When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table LI 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 164 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Ma
376. osition Compensation Search position comp Search Position Compensation Edge position comp edge position compensation The density changes in the object are used to detect and correct the position e Edge position comp Edge Position Compensation 2Edge position comp Two edge Position Compensation e 2Edge midpoint comp Two edge Midpoint Compensation Edge rot pos comp Edge Rotation Position Compensation FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 65 sobew uiye L 66 Features of the Position Compensation Items Edge Position Compensation Position Compensation The position is corrected in either The E is offset in the X or Y direction E one direction LT Edge Position Compensation p 82 Two edge Position Compensation Th ition is offset i The position is corrected at the position SOUSSE same time in both the X and Y two directions directions LT Two edge Position The measure Compensation p 87 ment object is Two edge Midpoint Compensation not at an angle z The positions of two edges are detected and then the coordinates of the midpoint between oi i those two positions is used to correct the corrected to the midpoint position in either the X or Y direction between two edges LT Two edge Midpoint Com pensation p 90 Search Position Compensation The position needs to be An image pattern is recognized to Th
377. ou can also compensate for offsets in the origin and coordinate system Origin of actual coordinates Camera coordinates 0 X Origin of Camera Y coordinates Origin of actual coordinates car direction for angles Origin of Camera coordinates e Calibration Conversion Methods There are the following three conversion methods for calibration Point specification You can enter the actual pixel coordinates of any position Reference You can measure a registered model and then enter the actual coordinates of the model Parameter You can enter the calibration values directly e Setting Calibration Use the following procedure to set calibration 1 Set the conversion method to use for calibration Select the calibration method point specification reference or parameter and enter the actual coordi nates or other values that are suitable for the selected method You can register up to 32 calibration patterns Calibration type Specify point point specifica tion Description Specify from two to ten points and enter their actual coordinates Reference LT Jp 150 Reference sampling refer ence Search for a registered model and enter the actual coordinates of the position where the model is detected LT Jp 152 Parameter Enter the numeric values of the parameters directly to calculate the calibration data LT Jp 154 FQ2 CH User s Manu
378. p sition 140 Rotation angle upper Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 141 Rotation angle lower Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 149 Mea Candidate level Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 T sure sition ment condition External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 150 Detec Detection point X Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 tion point sition coordi 151 nate Detection point Y Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 sition 156 Mea Model mode Setting Acqui 0 Stable 1 High speed 0 sure sition ment condition 160 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge ment for search coordinate X sition 999 men condi 161 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge or search coordinate X sition 99 999 9 men 999 162 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge or search coordinate Y sition 999 men 163 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge or search coordina
379. pection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings Use the following procedure to set the items to judge and the judgment conditions 1 Setting the Items to Judge You can assign the parameters from the inspection items to the data output signals DO to D15 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of PO Search P comp to DO p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page Press Settings Press I0 D0 Press P0 Search P comp KR QNS Press Position X X Settings Scroll Y DY To register something to D1 or higher repeat this pro cess 2 Setting the Judgement Conditions p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Judgement condition 2 Set the correlation range that is to be judged as OK mem Par Jda Output ment 2i Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Reflecting Judgement Results to the Overall Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement result of a parallel judgement output in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Details Tab Page Output parameter Reflect Stopping Data Output You can also prevent the judgement results th
380. play to the previous inspection the next inspection item number 0 Scened item number Specifies the A parameter to display on the histogram Number of measure p ment values m N Measurement values uoneiado 9 The distribution of the measurement values that are equivalent to the judgement values is displayed in a histogram for the selected inspection item gt se Run Mode Select display Histogram Arranging Histogram Display The display range on the horizontal axis and the number of data on the vertical axis of the histogram can be changed e Disabling Automatic Adjustment of the Display Range 1 Press lt q Auto display on the right of the histogram 2 Press OFF Changing the Display Range of the Horizontal Axis 1 Press lt Display range on the right of the histogram 2 Select the maximum measurement value the minimum measurement value and the class FQ2 CH User s Manual Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs lai e Changing the Number of Data on the Vertical Axis 1 Press lt Number of data on the right of the histogram 2 Select the maximum number of data to display Note e Histogram data is held until the power supply is turned OFF e You can select whether to display all data in the histogram or only data for which the overall judgement is NG Logging settings are applied to the histogram as well However they are not applied to hi
381. position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge position comp Modify Details Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item O Interpolatio n p 75 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DT Scroll 6 This is the amount of position compensa 180 to 180 tion X0 Edge 0 position X This is the X coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 position YO Edge 0 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 position X1 Edge 1 position X This is the X coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 position Y1 Edge 1 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 position TH Angle edge angle This is the measured angle 180 to 180 SX0 Edg0 ref pos edge 0 This is the X coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 reference position X position when it was registered SY0 Edg0 ref pos Y edge This is the Y coordinate of th
382. put 34 NC 5 D2 OUT Data output 35 NCT 6 D3 OUT Data output 36 RESET IN Reset input 7 D4 OUT Data output 37 INO IN Command input 8 D5 OUT Data output 38 IN1 IN Command input 9 D6 OUT Data output 39 IN2 IN Command input 10 D7 OUT Data output 40 IN3 IN Command input id D8 OUT Data output 41 IN4 IN Command input 12 D9 OUT Data output 42 IN5 IN Command input 13 D10 OUT Data output 43 IN6 IN Command input 14 D11 OUT Data output 44 IN7 IN Command input 15 D12 OUT Data output 45 NC 7 16 D13 OUT Data output 46 Nc 17 D14 OUT Data output 47 DSA IN Data send request signal 18 D15 OUT Data output 48 NC 19 NC 49 NC 20 INC 50 NC z 21 NCT 51 INC z 22 NC 52 ACK OUT oo execution completed ag 23 NC E 53 RUN OUT ON during measurement mode 24 NCT 54 BUSY OUT ON during process execution 25 NC 55 OR OUT Overall judgement result 26 NCT 56 ERROR OUT ON during error 27 NC 57 STGOUT OUT Strobe trigger output 2 3 28 NC z 58 SHTOUT OUT Shutter trigger output 29 NC 59 GATE OUT ON during the set output time 30 NCT 60 COMOUTO Output signal common ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT SHTOUT and GATE 1 Leave all signal terminals that are labeled NC open 2 You can select whether to turn the external lighting ON Positive or OFF Negative when the signal turns ON The setting is called the 3 4 38 strobe output polarity BA Chan
383. put after Measurements Immediately after a single or continuous measurement the Vision Sensor will automatically output to an external device e g a PLC the data for measurements that are specified for output in advance This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the external device Sensor Data Unit Vision Sensor External device m Up to 32 specified data ew Eme items can be automati cally output You must specify in advance the data to output up to 32 items after measurements That data is sent to the external device in either ASCII or binary format through a continuous serial connection There is no handshaking from the external device to confirm if it can receive the data FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications 355 O Ozez su ym Buyoeuu09 Setting Up No protocol Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details LT 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 46 Initial Settings for No protocol Communications To perform no protocol communications with RS 232C you must set the communications baud rate data length and other RS 232C communications parameters p gt Sensor settings Data output No p
384. put are performed at the same time parallel judgement output will be performed first followed by parallel data output Example Parallel Judgement Output of DO to D15 and Parallel Data Output of Data 0 DO D1 Parallel judgement Parallel data output output DO data 0 Parallel judgement Parallel data output output D1 data 0 D15 Parallel judgement Parallel data output output D15 data 0 Timing Chart The following timing chart shows the data output timing for parallel judgement outputs Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF ON TRIG signal ON for 1 ms min The FQ2 starts measurements when it detects the rising edge ON OFF to ON transition of the TRIG signal BUSY signal Measurements executed OFF l OR signal K Overall judgement A K lt ee e D signals judgement output DO to D15 i ON GATE GATE signal ON delay Outpt time time OFF r Output period i Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is ready to take measurement and it is in Run Mode The RUN signal is OFF in Setup Mode Change to Run Mode for operation BUSY This signal is ON when the Sensor is performing measurements changing scenes or performing other tasks Do not input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON The process that is currently being executed and the command that is input will not be executed correctly OR This signal outputs the overall judgem
385. put mode is selected this parameter sets the time that the OR signal is ON Setting range 1 to 1 000 ms When one shot output is selected as the output mode make the following value smaller than the trigger input period e One shot delay time One shot output time Changing the Judgement Output ON Conditions The ON condition for the OR signal or the ORO to OR31 signals can be set to be output when the judgement results are OK or when they are NG The default setting is when they are NG Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output OR output Item Description OR output OK ON The output is turned ON if the judgement is OK For the overall judgement the output is turned ON if all judgements are OK NG ON default The output is turned ON if the judgement is NG For the overall judgement the output is turned ON if even one judgements is NG Changing the Polarity of the BUSY Output The Sensor turns ON the BUSY output signal during measurements and other processing to indicate that a measurement trigger cannot be received The polarity of the BUSY signal can be reversed so that it is ON only when a trigger signal can be received In the default settings the BUSY signal is assigned to OUT1 If you change the assignment of the BUSY signal change the polarity of the corresponding output Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output OUT1 Polarity
386. r Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON gt Oo 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 3 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON Py 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 F position X sition 1 Data logging ON n 316 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 R position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 correlation sition 1 Data logging ON FQ2 CH User s Manual 391 External Reference Parameters 392 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 Y display sition 702 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sation display sition 703 Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 704 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 705 Position Y display
387. r If it exceeds 50 C install an cooling fan or an air condi tioner and maintain the temperature at 50 C or lower To prevent interference by noise do not mount the Sensor on panels which contain high voltage devices To keep the level of noise from the surrounding environment to a minimum install the Sensor and Touch Finder at least 10 m away from power lines FQ2 CH User s Manual Installation G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu Mounting to DIN Track Installation Procedure 1 Press the slider on the Touch Finder to the top 2 Hook the clip at the top of the Touch Finder on to the DIN Track 3 Press the Touch Finder onto the DIN Track until the bottom clip clicks into place Attach End Plates sold separately on the sides of the Touch Finder on the DIN Track If other devices will be installed next to the Touch Finder on the same DIN Track make sure that sufficient space is kept between the devices as indicated on previous page e Always hook the clip at the top of the Touch Finder on the DIN Track first If the lower clip is hooked on first the Touch Finder will not be mounted very securely Removal Procedure 1 Pull down on the slider on the Touch Finder 2 Lift the Touch Finder at the bottom and remove it from the DIN Track Mounting to a Control Panel The Touch Finder can be mounted on a panel using the FQ XPM Panel Mounting Adapter e Always turn OFF the Touch Finder power before attaching or
388. r Two edge Midpoint Compensation The settings for the Two edge Midpoint Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position Compensation item Make the settings in the same way as for the Edge Position Compensation Item However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Teaching Set the measurement regions and measurement directions for both edge 0 and edge 1 p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge midpoint comp Modify Basic Teach The settings are the same as those for the Two edge Position Compensation item LT Teaching p 88 e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 66 Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment 2ed midp comp Modify Details Scroll parameter Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 75 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in
389. r string for each of the inspection item that reads a character string such as the OCR inspection item Also when reading the character string fails you can output a specific character string that is set in advance QJ Outputting Read Character Strings p 316 Assigning Inspection Results to Output Data You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of PO Search P comp to data 0 for a binary output p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set Press 0 Data 0 Press Data setting Press P0 Search P comp KR NH Press Position X X Settings Scroll X DX Scroll Y DY Cance To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 311 u194 3 yBnosy Buyoauu0D 6 Assigning More Than One Inspection Result to the Same Output Data You can assign more than one inspection result to the same data output to output all of the assigned results This is possible for the following inspection results Parameters for the same inspection item You can assign up to five inspection results The following procedure shows how to assign more than one inspection res
390. r supply is turned ON Checking the Results of Logging The results of logging can be checked using the trend monitors histograms or statistical data LT p 138 Use the following menu command to check the image data p gt R Setup Mode Log FQ2 CH User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 171 suoloun JUs UsAUOD Z Deleting Logged Data The logged data will be deleted when the power supply to the Sensor is turned OFF or the scene is changed The logged data can also be deleted without turning OFF the power supply e Setup Mode p gt In Out Log setting 1 Press Delete Log Saving Logged Recent Results Data in a File Although the logged recent results data will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF it can be saved in a file in external memory The most recent 1 000 measurement values and the most recent 20 images will be saved p gt Setup Mode Save to file Logging Tab Page 1 Press the data to save 2 The following display will appear if Logging image is Select whether to save the most recently logged image or to save all of the image data that is logged in the Sensor The file storage locations and file format are given in the following table Item Storage location File name Statistical data sensor_name LOGDATA File name_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS CSV Example The following name would be used for measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10 2012 20
391. racter Recognition Sensors The FQ2 CH Series features Optical Character Recognition OCR Sensors with integrated cameras and controllers They can be used to easily read and verify IDs You can use parallel controls no protocol communications on Ethernet PLC Link communications on Ethernet and EtherNet IP communications on Ethernet as standard features You can also use a Data Unit to enable control with full scale parallel communications or RS 232C communications To set up and monitor the Vision Sensor you can use either the Touch Finder or the PC Tool running on a computer For actual operation you can use the Vision Sensor on a stand alone basis Setup Image Confirmation and Logging Tools Touch Finder FQ2 Vision Sensor Z Used to check images and set the SD judgement parameters It can also be i used to save measurement results and lhd A check status during operation v PC Tool Sensor with Built in Lighting After the Sensor has been set up it can be operated alone to perform measurements The same functions as those that are without the Touch Finder or PC Tool provided by the Touch Finder can be performed from a computer The PC Tool is available free of charge 18 FQ2 CH series Optical Character Recognition Sensors FQ2 CH User s Manual This section describes the basic flow of the measurement process e The measurement is started by inputting a trigger signal f
392. racters max x2 N 0 to 3 1321 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 16 0to 31 1322 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 16N to 3 1323 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 16N to 3 1331 N Master data 16N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1341 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 17 0to 31 1342 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 17N to 3 1343 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 17N to 3 1351 N Master data 17N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1361 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 18 0 to 31 1362 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 18N to 3 FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 411 z L seolpueddy 412 External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 1363 N Verification con Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ditions ning digit 18N to 3 1371 N Master data 18N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1381 Reference unit Setting Acquisition
393. rall judgement result is OFF or an error occurs 232C_COM Lights yellow during RS 232C communications Provided only on the FQ SDU20 5 DIN Track mounting section Mounts the Data Unit to a DIN Track 6 Slider Used to secure the Data Unit to a DIN Track 7 RS 232C connector Connects to the RS 232C connector 8 Parallel I O connector Connects to the I O connector FQ2 CH User s Manual Part Names and Functions G SUONOBUUOD pue uonejesu Installing the Sensor Installation Procedure 1 Align the tabs on one side of the Mounting Bracket with the slot on the Sensor The FQ XL Mounting Bracket can be attached to the back side or front of the Sensor 2 Press the Mounting Bracket onto the Sensor until the oth er tabs click into place 3 Use the following optical charts to check the field of view Mounting Bracket and installation distance of the Sensor so that it is mount ed at the correct position Tightening torque M4 1 2 N m Horizontal field of view a lt Vertical field of view Installation distance L FQ2 CH1L1010F Installation distance L mm 55 1 45 L 1 35 6 8 10 12 14 Horizontal field of view mm FQ2 CH101050F Installation distance L mm 210 Pai Pail 130 a a 50 7 0 20 40 60 Horizontal field of view mm 0 Installation FQ2 CH User s Manu
394. rallel output DO to D15 Parallel data output Measurement values for inspection items and The data is output as 16 bit data on DO to results from expressions D15 Outputting the Overall Judgement Result OR Signal When the results of the inspection items are judged if even one individual judgement result is NG the OR output signal is turned ON Note e You can also turn ON the overall judgement result output signal when all individual judgement results are OK LT Changing the Judgement Output ON Conditions p 202 You can select whether to use the judgement result of one of the calculations 0 through 31 as the overall judge ment LT Using Calculation Results without Applying Them to the Overall Judgement p 120 e You can adjust the timing for outputting the OR signal and the ON time after judgement processing BA Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing p 200 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 215 8 UONDBUUOD J eed e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado ulijjonuon Parallel Judgement Outputs You can set judgement conditions for parallel output and then output the judgement results for those conditions Setting the Items to Judge and the Judgement Conditions You can assign up to 16 judgement results to and output them from the DO to D15 signals As the items to judge you can specify the measurement data from ins
395. rameter Setting Description Image Input High speed or Standard Pixel sampling can be applied to the input image to Mode Default High speed reduce image input time If you change the image input mode perform teaching again FQ2 CH User s Manual Shortening the Measurement Takt Time 129 sBuijas Bulaes pue Buns L G 5 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters Adjusting Judgement Parameters While Looking at Measurement Results If correct judgements are not possible you can move directly from the Setup Mode display to the judgement parameters display to make adjustments p gt Test Continuous test Either display 1 Press lt q Adjust judgement on the right of the display 2 Press the parameters and adjust the values of the freer judgment conditions for them Upper limit Lower limit Setting Up the Best Judgement Parameters Automatically The judgement parameters of the selected inspection items can be automatically adjusted by using actual workpieces which are considered as good and faulty products p gt Test Continuous test 1 Move to the inspection item for which you want to au tomatically adjust the judgement parameters and press lt lt Adjust judgement on the right side of the display 2 Press lt Auto adjustment MIROWSCUUSE ETE 3 Display a sample image of a good object and press o OK Teach Display a sample image of a bad object etitiny 170000 4 A
396. rately from this product Wiring them together or placing them in the same duct may cause induction resulting in malfunction or damage e Use the products within the power supply voltages specified in this manual e Use the specified size of crimp terminals to wire connections Do not connect wires that have been simply twisted together directly to the power supply or terminal block Use a DC power supply with safety measures against high voltages safety extra low voltage circuit Use independent power sources for the products Do not use a shared power source e Tighten mounting screws at the torque specified in this manual e Always turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables or the power supply wiring 3 Battery Do not short the positive and negative terminals of the Battery Do not use the Touch Finder in an environment that exceeds the operating temperature range of the Battery If the Touch Finder is used at temperatures that exceed the operating temperature range the protective device may activate and prevent charging Do not connect the Battery directly to a power supply or car cigarette lighter socket Do not use the Touch Finder with any other type of battery e Turn OFF the power supply immediately if the Battery leaks or produces an odor Electrolyte leaked from the Battery may ignite possibly causing smoke rupture or fire e If during usage charging or storage the Battery produces
397. ration through EtherNet IP 251 jeuseu y yBnosy Buyyoauu0D 6 252 Connection Settings Parameter Setting Originator device PLC Input tag set PLC_tag_set_name Byte This is the total size of the response area and output area that you set Connection type Any default multi cast connection Output tag set PLC_tag_set_name 20Byte Target device Vision Sen Output tag set Input_101 Byte sor This is the total size of the response area and output area that you set Input tag set Output_100 20Byte Packet interval RPI Any default 20 0 2 a If multi cast connections are used however use an Ethernet switch that has multi cast filtering unless the tag set is received by all nodes in the network 2 Set the same value as you set for the refreshing task period in the EtherNet IP communications settings If I O memory addresses are specified for the communications areas the information in the communications areas will be cleared when the operating mode of the PLC changes unless addresses in the CIO Area which are main tained are specified The following assembly object is required to specify instances when the EDS file is not used Assembly Object Settings Parameter name Setting Remarks Instance ID 100 Output connection 101 Input connection Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Data To Output
398. rd and backward destruction Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP20 Materials Case PC ABS PC Size 62 x 90 x 65 WxHxD Excluding connectors DIN Track and protrusions Weight Approx 150 g Accessories Instruction Manual Table 1 Item NPN PNP Input specifi ON Shorted to 0 V or 1 5 V max ON Shorted to power supply voltage or power supply volt cations OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max age 1 5 V max OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max Output speci NPN open collector PNP open collector fications 1 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 1 2 V max 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 1 2 V max 1 Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA 424 Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual Dimensions FQ SDU10 SDU15 FQ2 CH User s Manual Unit mm wo PCI Specifications and Dimensions 425 A L seolpueddy FQ SDU20 SDU25 Unit mm 54 1
399. read characters on 0 to 32 This is the number of characters that were read on line 1 ine 1 Number of read characters on 0 to 32 This is the number of characters that were read on line 2 ine 2 Number of read characters on 0 to 32 This is the number of characters that were read on line 3 ine 3 Number of read characters on 0 to 32 This is the number of characters that were read on line 4 ine 4 ndividual similarity 0 to 100 This is the similarity of read character N N 0 to 127 ndividual stability 0 to 100 This is the stability of read character N N 0 to 127 Failure to Read Characters e Failure to Read Characters during Teaching The read results may be unstable if the contrast is low Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast e The characters may not be in the measurement region Check to see if the measurement region is set cor rectly e The specified character format may not agree with the format of the read characters Check the character format FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings 113 suonoedsu dn Buiyjes y 114 4 4 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data You can set inspection item judgement results and measurement data with the Calculation menu command to use them in basic arithmetic operations and functions The judgement results of the calculations are reflected in the overall judgement Calculation Use the Calculation menu command to
400. red error 15 Out of range error DO to D31 Data 0 to 31 These are the values of the parameters that are 999 999 999 9999 to set for output data 0 to 31 999 999 999 9999 Output Specifications Only the integer portions of numbers are output All digits before the decimal point are rounded off The following range of values can be output Binary data 32768 to 32768 BCD data 999 to 999 If the measurement value is out of range the actual measurement value is not output and the minimum or maximum value of the range is output instead Data format Measurement value that is below the possi Measurement value that is above the possi ble output range ble output range Binary data A value of 32 767 is output A value of 32 768 is output BCD A value of 999 is output A value of 999 is output Note The data that is output to the OR and D signals after a measurement is held until the next measurement is per formed The values will continue to be output even after all measurements have been completed However if you set the output timing of the OR signal to One shot output in the Output mode parameter the OR signal will turn OFF after the specified output time has elapsed Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Data Output Timing Output Sequence If both parallel judgement output and parallel data out
401. references that were taught for character recognition and the actual result of reading the characters are detected and conditions are set to deter mine how accurately characters are read You can set conditions to verify that the character string Verification conditions that was read matches a specific character string The character strings to use to verify the character strings that are read are registered in the master data Judgement conditions Setup Procedure for Character Recognition Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item gt Inspect Inspection 7 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press OCR BA Registering inspection items p 97 Drag the arrow EF at the bottom of the menu to display all of the inspection items 100 FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings Step 2 Teaching For teaching you specify the measurement region and the format of the characters to read number of characters alphanumeric characters or symbols etc Detailed parameters to recognize the characters will be set automatically Also you can register the characters that are actually read when teaching as a verification condition in the master data QJ Step 4 Setting the Verification Conditions 1 Press TEACH insp region Date A 205 290 982 845 2 Place the characters to read in front of the camera 3 Move the rectangle around the character string to ABC
402. remaining data will be discarded Example Output data size 328 bytes Number of output data upper value setting 256 bytes Any output data that exceeds the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting 256 bytes is discarded Seiting the Output Format p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output 1 Press Output format 2 Press Output form 3 Seteithera floating point decimal or a fixed decimal for the output form Item Description Setting range Output form Set the output form for numerical data Floating point or fixed point default fixed point Outputting Character Strings You can set whether to output the character string that results from reading Outputting the character string is possible for the following inspection results OCR The procedure for outputting the character string is given here for two inspection items p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Link data output Output data set 1 Select the inspection item for which to output the character string 2 Setthe following items on the setting display Parameter Setting Description String output ON OFF OFF default Sets whether to output the character string that results Yes from reading Partial output ON OFF No default Sets whether to specify the range of characters to output Yes Output string setup 1 to 128 for OCR Sets the o
403. ring Filter Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Shape Sear pos Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll 6 DT 180 to 180 0 Position X xX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 180 to 180 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference angle ST 180 to 180 0 Correlation CR 0 to 100 0 Search position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position X xX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Correlation CR 0 to 100 0 Edge position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Ref position X xX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Ref position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 FQ2 CH User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 121 suonoedsu dn Buas
404. ring has occurred e Program interlocks to control the TRIG so that they do not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON e Switch from a device with con tacts e g relay to a device without contacts e g SSR or PLC transistor output IN Input Error AO ERR Error code 11020900 A no protocol command or PLC link command was input when the BUSY signal was ON Is an interlock or other counter measure provided e g ina ladder program in the PLC e Program interlocks such as in a ladder program so that no protocol commands and PLC link commands are not input while the BUSY signal is ON Scene Data Error se err Error code 01030800 The scene data to switch to is corrupted The scene data to be switched to is corrupted Reset the scene data from the beginning Model Error ME ERR Error code 01050405 or 01050500 A model was re registered with an image with low contrast Check the image to see if the contrast is too low to register the model Increase the image contrast and try again to register the model Logging Error Error code 02160702 or 02160703 Some data was not saved when logging data to files on an SD card Check to see if the BUSY output parameter is set to Measurement Set a sufficiently long measure ment interval or set the BUSY output condition to Data logging or Image logging Communications error Error code 01010100 Normal EtherNet IP commu
405. rity Sets the parity None Odd Even default None System p 356 Stop bit Sets the number of stop bits Abit 2bit default 1bit System p 356 Flow con Sets the controls for the flow of commu None Xon Xoff default None System p 356 trol nications with the software Delimiter Set the delimiter to add to the end of CR LF or CR LF default CR System p 356 commands and responses Interval Timeout s Set the time in seconds to 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored System p 356 timeout generate a timeout error default 0 s text Interval Timeout s Set the time in seconds to 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored System p 356 time generate a timeout error default 0 s out after Xoff reception 2 Communication Sets the communications type to use for Invalid default PLC link SYSMAC System p 286 2 type EtherNet IP or PLC Link outputs PLC link MELSEC EtherNet IP sS Area set p 287 2 tings Only when communications type is PLC Link g 8 Sets the area to write command data to PLC Link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One System lt the Sensor CIO Area CIO default 5 Control inputs command codes and Work Area WR Oo lt command parameters are written to this Holding Bit Area HR area Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO to EMC PLC Link MELSEC QnU Q QnAS Data Register File Register Link Register 3 Set the first address of the command 0 to 99 999 default 0 System 5 area ne lt
406. rocedures 1 Defining the Data Types of the Variables Define data types for variables that match the structures of the communications areas 1 Defining a Data Type for Signal Access First define a BOOL array data type to access the control signals and status signals Here a data type called U_EIPFlag is defined Name of data type U_EIPFlag Type of derivative data type Union Name of data type Data type U_EIPFlag UNION F ARRAY 0 31JOF BOOL es Specifies an array of BOOL data from 0 to 31 W DWORD gt o 32 bit bit string data 2 Defining Data Types for Communications Area Access Data types are defined to access the communications areas with one data type for the command area and another data type for the response and output areas Here data types called S_ElPOutput and S_EIPInput are defined Data Type to Access the Command Area Name of data type S_ElPOutput Type of derivative data type Structure Name of data type Data type S_ElPOutput STRUCT ControlFlag U_EIPFlag ttt The data type that was defined above 1 CommandCode DWORD gt o oen 32 bit bit string data CommandParam1 UDINT tts 32 bit integer data CommandParam2 UDINT ttt 32 bit integer data CommandParam3 DINT tts 32 bit integer data FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 263 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Assignment Example for Variable Data T
407. rom an external device 3 Images are taken according to the trigger re a 2 The image is measured to see if it matches the configured settings e You can also perform calculations based on the measurement results from inspection items The overall judgement of all inspection items are output using OR logic You can output detailed measurement result from the inspection items Measurement data and image data can be logged in memory in the Sensor or in an SD card FQ2 CH User s Manual Measurement Process o 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements Startup Display 1 The Sensor is automatically detected by the Touch Finder when power supply to the Sensor and Touch Finder is turned ON The Auto Connect Display will appear if the Sensor can not be detected Check that cables are connected cor rectly to the Sensor and Touch Finder and then press Auto connect Auto connect FQ Series Note If the Sensor is still not detected after pressing Auto Connect refer to the following information LI The Sensor cannot be detected p 363 2 When the Sensor is detected the following display will appear e The Setup Mode will appear if a Sensor that has not been set up is connected Camera setup Trigorr setup re Image adjustment The Run Mode will appear if a Sensor that has been set up is connected Note When the Touch Finder is starte
408. rotocol data 1 Press Communication type No protocol RS 232C 2 Set the RS 232C communications parameters Note Comm type If you connect to an OMRON PLC set the PLC to Host Link communications No protocol RS2320 A Data lengh 8 Parity None Item Baud rate bps Description Set the baud rate to use for RS 232C communications Set the same baud rate as the external device that you will communi cate with Baud rate I Stop bit 1 Flow control Parameter 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 default 38400 Data length bits Set the same data length as the external device that you will communi cate with 7 bits or 8 bits default 8 bits Parity Sets the parity Set the same setting as the one in the PLC communica None Odd or Even default tions specifications none Stop bit Set the number of stop bits Set the same value as the one in the PLC 1 bit or 2 bits default 1 bit communications specifications Flow control Controls the flow of communications with the software None or Xon Xoff default none Delimiter Set the delimiter to add to the end of commands and responses CR LF or CR LF default Set the same delimiter as the external device that you will communicate with CR Interval timeout Set the time in seconds to generate a timeout error 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored default 0 s Total timeou
409. rror will occur and the ERROR signal will turn ON Note While the trigger input TRIG signal for parallel measurements is ON the EtherNet IP BUSY signal will also be ON Therefore no EtherNet IP commands will be executed Any EtherNet IP commands will be executed after execution of the parallel commands You can also use a EtherNet IP to perform measurements and output data with the paral lel I O measurement trigger signal TRIG Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled Execution Data Output condition Completed GATE it Data Output Completed GATE Data Output Request Bit DSA RSET Data Output Request Bit DSA zsa Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 CH User s Manual 9 3 PLC Link Connections You can use a PLC Link to communicate between the PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control via command response communications or to output data after measurements You can use these communications methods simultaneously Command Response Communications For PLC Link communications command response control signals are handled by storing control commands from the PLC to the Vision Sensor and responses from the Vision Sensor to the PLC in the I O memory of the PLC This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform single inspections or change the scene without using communications instructions PLC master
410. rt number Specify any communications port Serial port number Always specify 00 hex Command Codes for the FQ2 Command codes for the FQ2 consist of a 2 byte command code which consists of an MRC and SRC and a 4 byte Vision Sensor command code Example Command Code for a Single Measurement Command Command code Vision Sensor command code 4 bytes MRC 1 byte SRC 1 byte 28 00101010 Setting Up Communications FINS TCP Communications are set up in the same way as for TCP no protocol communications LT Setting Up No protocol Communications p 310 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 339 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 340 List of FINS Command List Commands The following table lists the FINS commands Commands that can be used in FINS Ethernet communications are listed below Type of command Command codes hex Function Reference MRC SRC com Vision Sensor com mand code mand code Measurement control 280F 00101010 Executes one measurement p 341 and measurement acquisition commands Utility commands 280F 00102010 Clears the measurement values p 342 280F 00102040 Clears the error output status error signal and p 342 error indicator 280F 00103010 Saves the settings data to the Sensor p 343 280F 00104010 This command re registers the model for a reg p 343 istered search inspection it
411. s Language Press the language to be displayed Setting the Time on the Touch Finder You can set the date and time p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Time settings Initializing the Sensor and Touch Finder e Initializing the Sensor gt si Setup Mode Sensor settings Initialize e Initializing the Touch Finder p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Initialize Restarting the Sensor and Touch Finder e Restarting the Sensor p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Restart e Restarting the Touch Finder p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Restart Checking Versions e Checking the Sensor Version p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Information e Checking the Touch Finder Version p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Information FQ2 CH User s Manual Functions Related to the System 1e9 suoljoun JUs UsAUOD Z 190 Checking the Touch Finder Battery Level p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Battery level The battery level is displayed only for a Touch Finder with a DC AC battery power supply FQ2 D31 e The settings will be lost if the battery runs out while you are making the settings If the battery level is low save the settings and charge the battery immediately Changing the Sensor Name An alphanumeric name can be assigned to a Sensor to make it easier to recognize This is conven
412. s FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 124 Model Reference X Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 region sition 125 Reference Y Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 sition 145 Detec Detection point X Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 tion coor sition dinate 146 Detection point Y Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 sition 147 Mea Sub pixel Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment 148 condi Candidate level Setting Acqui 0 to 100 70 tions sition 166 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui O to 100 100 Adjust judge ment for correlation sition ment condi 167 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 for correlation sition 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 gt judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 eu scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 se p scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data loggin
413. s as the execution trigger Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed Clearing Measurement Values This command clears the measurement values Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1000000 11000000 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 0 gt K 11000000 signals ON for 1 ms min IN7 signal Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 ON BUSY signal OFF ON ACK signal 4 OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal does not change while clearing measurement values ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function INO to IN5 Turn OFF ING Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for clearing measurement values Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 231 8 UONDBUUOD J eIed e y m eyeq Bumnd no pue uoneiado ulijonuonp 232 Clearing an Error This command clears the error output status
414. s for character recognition will be set automatically according to the specified character for mat LT Measurement Parameters That Are Automati cally Set by Teaching p 107 7 The character string that was successfully recog nized according to the specified character format conditions will be displayed Press Yes to register the read result in the master data The master data contains the character strings that are registered to verify whether the read character strings match specific character strings LT Step 4 Verification Conditions p 104 8 Press Back to end teaching 12 Reading and Verifying Character Strings FQ2 CH User s Manual Note You can use Kl on the right of the display to access the following menu commands to change the following settings Format You can change the setting of the character format Camera setup You can adjust the Camera focus brightness and other factors to input a better image LJ inputting Better Images p 52 Meas Parameter You can change the type of code to read the read settings etc LJ Detailed Settings p 106 Continuous test You can start test measurements of displayed images for the settings that were taught LT Test Measurements p 126 Step 3 Setting the Judgement Parameters Settings are made to check whether the characters that were read from the workpiece were recognized correctly Differences between the references that were taught
415. s3B see note 2 see note 3 Specular No require Class 1Mas_ No require Class 2M as_ Prevent unintentional reflections reflection ments for Class 3B ments for Class3B see note 2 see note 3 Eye protection No requirements Not required Required if engineering and for visible administrative procedures not emission practicable and MPE Required for exceeded non visible emission Protective No requirements Sometimes Specific clothing required requirements Training No require Class 1Mas_ No require Class 2Mas Required for all operator and maintenance ments for Class 3R ments for Class3R personnel see note 2 see note 3 Note 1 This table is intended to provide a convenient summary of requirements See text of this standard for complete precautions 2 Class 1M laser products that failed condition 1 of table10 of the standard Not required for Class 1M laser products that failed condition 2 of table10 of the standard See the text for details 3 Class 2M laser products that failed condition 1 of table10 of the standard Not required for Class 2M laser products that failed condition 2 of table10 of the standard See the text for details poe Requirements from Regulations and Standards FQ2 CH User s Manual Definitions of Laser Classification For Europe Laser Product Classifications EN Class Description Class 1 Laser that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation incl
416. sation Material Case PPE Cable length 1 5m Dimensions 78 x 50 x 30 mm without power cable Weight Approx 270 g Contents of label on AC Adapter INP 00 240V 50 60Hz 0 4A MADE IN CHINA Breit Bl Cc OUTPUT H 15V 1A 15W Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 CH User s Manual Dimensions e I O Cables FQ WD002 39 8 ut Unit mm 3 me 1 amp 5 ks ka 6 1 The cable length is given in the following table FQ WD002 FQ WD010 WD020 39 8 L Unit mm LL 5000 0 i 100 p 100 ees i w l S P 1 The cable length is given in the following table z Model L FQ WD010 10m FQ WD020 20m e FQ Ethernet Cable FQ WNO002 WNO010 WN020 Unit mm 44 7 L 54 7 la 5 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model L FQ WN002 2m FQ WN010 10m FQ WN020 20 m 429 FQ2 CH User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions rd L seolpueddy 430 e Sensor Data Unit Cable FQ WU002 WU005 WU010 WU020 12 pin round connector 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model FQ WU002 2m FQ WU005 5m FQ WU010 10m FQ WU020 20 m e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU1 FQ VP1002 VP1005 VP1010 30 pin flat cable connector Unit mm 42 7 i 7A
417. se can be registered as 12 f one scene N Inspection of small characters Inspection item 1 OCR Line Process Changes Inspection for Inspection for Inspection for product A product B product C EA Inspection for product Z Maximum Number of Scenes You can create up to 32 scenes e Settings Included with Scenes The following settings are changed when the scene is changed Camera image Image Tab Page and Inspection Items Inspect Tab Page The settings related to external I O specifications that are included in the output settings and the system settings for the overall Sensor are used for all of the scenes Refer to the following information for the data that is included in the scene data J 12 1 Menu Tables p 366 Creating New Scenes The default scene number is 0 To create another scene use the following procedure to switch the scene and then make the settings Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process FQ2 CH User s Manual p gt Setup Mode Select scene 1 Press the number of the scene to change to and then press Select 2 The scene will change Make the settings for the scene Changing Scene Names Copying Scenes and Deleting Scenes p Setup Mode Select scene 1 Press the number of the scene and then press Re name Copy or Clear 2 To change the name enter a new scene name in 15 al phanumeric characters or less To copy a scene press the number of t
418. sed number and then press Add pos comp 2 Press Edge Edge rot pos Comp 3 Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Edge Rotation Position Compensation below 4 Press OK 5 Press Back e Detailed Settings for Edge Rotation Position Compensation The settings for the Edge Rotation Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position Compensation item Make the settings in the same way as for the Edge Position Compensation Item However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Teaching Measurement Regions and Measurement Directions Set the measurement regions and measurement directions for both edge 0 and edge 1 p gt Image Image adjustment Edge rot pos Comp Modify Basic Teach The settings are the same as those for the Two edge Position Compensation item LT Teaching p 88 Reference Angle Set the reference angle Press lt q Edit Ref angle on the right of the display and set the angle Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 66 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of
419. set for parallel output called parallel judgement output and the results of measurement values and expressions for inspection items called parallel data output BA 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit p 214 Configuring the Operation The following settings can be selected depending on the system configuration and application Type of change Change Reference Changing the type of measurement trigger Performing continuous measurements p 195 Changing the output method of the judgement results Obtaining individual judgement results p 199 Adjust the judgement output timing p 200 Changing the judgement output ON conditions p 202 Changing the polarity of the BUSY output Reversing the polarity of the BUSY signal p 202 Changing the BUSY output condition Adjusting the end timing of the BUSY signal p 202 Changing the polarity of the output signals OUT1 to Reversing the output polarity of OUT1 to OUT3 p 202 OUT3 Setting the Measurement Trigger The measurement trigger can be chosen from the following two types e One shot measurement One measurement is performed for each external trigger e Continuous measurement Measurements are performed continuously FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 193 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Perform
420. set the calculation expressions and the judgement parameters for the calculation results Expression You can get up to 32 expressions You can also combine expressions You can use the following values in calculations e Filter item and position compensation item data measurement data reference values and judgement results e Inspection item data measurement data reference values and judgement results e Constants e Other calculation results Judgement Upper and lower limit values are used for the judgement of calculation results DO to D31 Each calculation judgement result JO to J31 is turned ON if the result falls within the upper and lower limits The OR logic of these results will be the overall judgement result JG You can reflect the judgement results JG of the calculations in the overall judgement You can also set the output parameters so that the judgement results are not reflected in the overall judgement Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting the Calculation Results The overall judgement JG of the calculations are reflected in the overall judgement of the inspection item The calculation results DO to 31 can be output as Ethernet outputs or it can be output by using logging Inspection items l0 to 131 Data logging Calculation Process Reference values Individual judgement results ORO to OR31 Overall judgement result O
421. signed to the ERCLR signal DO 15 BOOL d Assigned to the DSA signal D1 0 BOOL Commands EtherNet IP This section describes the EtherNet IP commands Measurement Control Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00101020 Start Continuous Measure Executes continuous measurements p 268 ments 00101030 End Continuous Measure Ends continuous measurements p 269 ments Utility Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00102010 Clear Measurement Values Clears all measurement result values p 269 00102020 Clear Data Output Buffer Clears all data in the data output buffer p 270 00103010 Save Data in Sensor Saves scene data and system data p 270 00104010 Re register Model Registers the model again for registered p 271 Search Position Compensation or Shape Search Position Compensation inspection items 00104020 Teach Executes teaching for all inspection items p 271 0010F010 Reset Resets the Vision Sensor p 272 00205000 Get Latest Error Information Acquires the latest error information p 272 Scene Control Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00201000 Get Scene Number Acquires the current scene number p 273 00301000 Select Scene Changes to the specified scene number p 273 FQ2 CH User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 267 yeusauly yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 268 Dat
422. sion Used to check the software version of p 189 the Touch Finder MAC address Used to check the MAC address of the Touch Finder Memory state Used to check the Touch Finder memory p 190 g state Error history View his Displays a history of errors that have System p 361 tory occurred in the Touch Finder Delete his Deletes the error history tory Battery level Used to check the battery level p 190 z 2 File name prefix You can set a character string to add to p 167 528 the beginning of the file name for logged a a data E mE D D D fo 2 File name prefix iv 9 Output format Used to set the output format for output p 168 D log data to a file 5 Field sep None Comma default Tab Space a arator Colon Semicolon CR or CR LF Decimal None Point default or Comma symbol Record None Comma Tab Space Colon separator Semicolon CR or CR LF default SD card SD card Displays the capacity and remaining p 178 informa memory in the SD card tion Format Formats an SD card p 178 Startup dis Startup You can select the display to appear on Multi Sensor NG sensor Single sensor p 162 play screen the Touch Finder when more than one __ Auto default type Sensor is connected Specify You can specify one Sensor to connect ON OFF default p 181 sensor to the Touch Finder Display Sets the display to use in
423. sition Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 XO Logged data X0 only 99 999 9999 7 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 YO Logged data YO only 99 999 9999 8 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x1 Logged data x1 only 99 999 9999 9 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y1 Logged data Y1 only 99 999 9999 10 Detected edge angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 TH Logged data only 11 Standard position XO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 12 Standard position YO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SYO Logged data only 99 999 9999 13 Standard position X1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Standard position Y1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 15 Standard edge angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 STH Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 tions sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 _ image sition 1 Previous image 149 Edge level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 aa sition 150 Noise level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 153 Monochrome density Set
424. sor Data Unit and connect the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device This allows you to output the results of judgement conditions measurements from inspection items and the results of expressions with parallel communications RS 232C Interface FQ SDU2 You can connect a Sensor Data Unit to the I O cable connector on the Vision Sensor Sensor Data Unit and connect the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device This allows you to use no protocol communications to send and receive commands inspection item parameters and other data between the Sensor and the external control device that is connected with the RS 232C cable You can also use the ACK signal parallel command normal completion signal for a parallel output from the Sensor Data Unit FQ Ethernet Cable FQ WNO Connects the Sensors to external devices such as the Touch Finder computers and PLCs Standard RJ45 Connects the Switching Hub to the Touch Finder computers and PLCs Use a con Ethernet Cable nector that complies with the FCC RJ45 standard STP shielded twisted pair cable category 5e or 6 impedance 100 Q VO Cable FQ WDO Connects the Sensor to the power supply and external devices Switching Hub W4S1 0 Used to connect multiple Sensors to one Touch Finder or PC Tool Sensor Data Unit FQ WUO This cable connects the FQ2 CH Sensor to the Sensor Data Unit cable Parallel cable for FQ VP1 This cable connects the Parallel Interface Se
425. stances Do not look directly into the light emitted from the Sensor When the subject is a specular reflective object protect your eyes from reflected light A lithium ion battery is built into the Touch Finder and may occasionally combust explode or burn if not treated properly Dispose of the Touch Finder as industrial waste and never disassemble apply pressure that would deform heat to 100 C or higher or incinerate the Touch Finder gt e High voltage parts inside danger of electrical shock Do not open the product cover B FQ2 CH User s Manual Precautions for Safe Use The following points are important to ensure safety so make sure that they are strictly observed 1 Installation Environment e Do not use the product in environments where it can be exposed to inflammable explosive gas e To secure the safety of operation and maintenance do not install the product close to high voltage devices and power devices e Install the product in such a way that its ventilation holes are not blocked e Tighten mounting screws at the torque specified in this manual 2 Power Supply and Wiring The power supply voltage must be within the rated range 24 VDC 10 and an AC voltage must not be used e Reverse connection of the power supply is not allowed Do not short the load of the open collector output The load must be within the rated range e High voltage lines and power lines must be wired sepa
426. stograms displayed in Setup Mode LU check recent measurement trends recent results logging p 170 ka Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs FQ2 CH User s Manual 6 4 Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation This Sensor enables judgement parameters to be adjusted while measurements are being performed Downtime can be eliminated with this feature because the production line does not have to be stopped while making adjustments Preparations This function is switched OFF as a default to prevent it from inadvertently working during operation Turn ON the function if you want to use it p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Adjustment mode in Run 1 Press ON Changing the Judgement Parameters in Run Mode This section describes how to change the judgement parameters without stopping measurement in Run Mode p gt Run Mode 1 Select the inspection item for which you want to ad just the judgement parameters using the Ki and D Buttons 2 Press lt Adjust judgement Judgement Similarity Stability uoneiado 9 3 Press the parameters and change the values of the judgment conditions for them with the slider Jud oement 4 Press OK E RE i Stability The judgement results with the changed judgement T parameters will appear The changed judgement parameters will not be reflected in the measurement result until OK is pressed FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting Judgemen
427. supply voltage 24 VDC 21 6 to 26 4 V Recommended Power Supply S8VS 060240 24 VDC 2 5 A External power supply terminal screws M4 tightening torque 1 2 N m Supply power from a DC power supply for which measures have been applied to prevent high voltages e g a safety extra low voltage circuit If UL certification is required for the overall system use a UL Class II DC power supply Attaching the LED Warning Label Attach the enclosed LED warning label to the cable or other location The LED warning label must be attached to a location that is readily visible from the Sensor Attachment Example Warning Label A WARNIG LED RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM Warning Label _ J 12 5 LED Safety p 433 Wiring FQ2 CH User s Manual Wiring Sensor Data Units Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ SDU1L FQ WUO Sensor Data Unit Cable Screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 54 N m FQ2 CH M SENSOR 0 PWR ERR Po SDU 1 a 2 3 1 3 2 of ssn 4 33 34 6 OR OK 35 36 8 37 38 10 39 40 ale ee 11 12 41 42 13 14 43 44 7 3 OR NG 5 7 9 15 16 45 46 17 18 47 48 Power supply 24 V T p yoo N 19 20 49 50 Power supply 0 V f a A Frame ground I i sofle Ije e 25 26 55 56 27 28 57 58 29 30 59
428. suren ee are completed a signal turns OFF a timeout error will occur timeout error will occur Timeout Time 2 If the DSA signal does not turn OFF within the specified time after the GATE signal turns ON a timeout error will occur 1 Turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 Measurement begins and the BUSY signal is turned ON during the measurement process 3 When the measurement has been finished the measurement result is output using an OR signal and the BUSY signal is turned OFF i You can also set the BUSY output parameter so that the BUSY signal is turned OFF after the completion of data logging image logging or displaying results 4 Turn ON the DSA signal from the external device to request data transmission after you have confirmed that the BUSY signal is OFF 2 2 If you do not turn ON the DSA signal within the specified timeout time after measurements are completed a timeout error will occur This is timeout time 1 5 When the DSA signal turns ON the DO to D31 signals are output and the GATE signal is turned ON 6 When the DSA signal is turned OFF the GATE signal turns OFF 3 If you do not turn OFF the DSA signal within the specified timeout time after the GATE signal turns ON a timeout error will occur This is timeout time 2 7 If more than one data item is being output for one measurement and you do not turn ON the DSA signal within the specified timeout time after the GATE signal turns O
429. t 356 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications Set the time in seconds to generate a timeout error 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored default 0 s FQ2 CH User s Manual Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can set the data to output automatically after measurements You can set up to 32 data items Data That Can Be Output You can output up to 32 data items data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item The setting procedure is the same as for no protocol communications for an Ethernet connection LT Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 311 Important Data Output Time and TRIG Signal Input Interval Set the input interval for the TRIG signal so that it is equal to or greater than the data output time If the input interval for the TRIG signal is shorter than the data output time the output data buffer will eventually overflow and output data will be discarded Setting the Output Format Set the output format for the output data The setting procedure and the data output formats are the same as for no protocol communications for an Ethernet connection LT Setting the Output For
430. t Mathematical operator Result of expression 0 FQ2 CH User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data avy suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 174 118 Example Adding the judgement result of inspection items 0 and 1 lOJG l1 JG Ens Judgement result for inspection item 1 Mathematical operator Judgement result for inspection item 0 Function List The following functions can be used in calculations Function Description SIN Finds the sine The result is a value between 1 and 1 The angle in the expression is in degrees SIN angle COS Finds the cosine The result is a value between 1 and 1 The angle in the expression is in degrees COS angle ATAN Finds the arctangent of the value Y component X component The result is a radian value between n and r ANGL Y_component X_component Example Finding the angle between the straight line joining the centers of region 0 and region 1 and horizontal ATAN R1 Y R0 Y R1 X R0 X If the two arguments are both 0 the result is 0 and the judgement is NG AND Finds the logical AND If one of the arguments is 0 the calculation result is 0 Otherwise it is 1 AND argument_1 argument_2 OR Finds the logical OR If both of the arguments are 0 the calculation result is 0 Otherwise it is 1 OR argument_1 argument_2 NOT Applies a logical NOT operation If the argument is 0 the calculation result is 1
431. t Position Compensation Items These items compensate for offset in the position or orientation of the image You can combine several filter items and position compensation items to adjust the image that was taken You can use a total of up to eight filter and position compensation items combined Flow of Image Adjustment The image that is taken by the Camera called the Camera image is adjusted in the order that the filter and position compensation items are registered Note You can specify the order of image adjustment by registering the items in the desired order but you cannot change the order of the items after you register them Image is taken on TRIG signal The image that is taken by the Camera Camera image Processed 0 Median filter item image Source image Camera image Camera process 0 image Processed image 1 Dilate filter item adjustment processes 0 and Source image Previous image Prev 1 Processed image 2 Search Position Compensation position compensation item processes 0 1 Source image Previous image Prev and 2 Measurements are performed with inspection items gg Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 CH User s Manual Note Specify the Camera image for the first filter item for image processing If you execute more than one filter item for the image set the source image for the other filter items to the previous image
432. t Parameters during Operation 133 MEMO a Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation FQ2 CH User s Manual Convenient Functions 7 1 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process 7 2 Calibration cccecceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeseeeeneeeseeeeseeenseenenees 7 3 Display FUNCTIONS cccsseesseeeeneeeeeneeeeenenenenenenenees 7 4 Monitoring the Signal I O StatuS cssssseees 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensot 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 7 7 Saving Sensor Settings ccsccseceseseeeeeteeseeeeees 7 8 SD Card Operations ccccscssetseeesseseeeseenseneeees 7 9 Convenient Functions for Operation 008 7 10 Convenient Functions for Setup scsseeeeneee 7 11 Setting the Retry Function c ceseeeeseeeeeeeees 7 12 Functions Related to the System sssseee suojouny JualueAu0g J 146 7 1 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process What Are Scenes With an FQ2 Vision Sensor the inspection items that can be processed at the same time are registered as scenes A command input from an external device or a touch panel operation can be used to select a certain scene If a scene is registered for each type of measurement object or inspection the line process can be changed simply by changing the scene when the measurement object or inspection changes Example Inspection of large characters ff Inspection item 0 OCR T EA The
433. t RUN Period Flag MOV Sets the lower word of the 1010 measurement command Sets the upper word of the measurement command Execution Control Command Command Execution condition Completed FLG Active BUSY f M Turns ON Command Execution Bit Command Execution Bit Control Command Completed FLG RSET When the control command is completed the Command Execution Bit is turned OFF Command Execution Bit Create the ladder program to control the TRIG signal so that it does not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON If not a TRIG input error will occur and the ERROR signal will turn ON Note You can combine both parallel and PLC Link communications PLC Link commands cannot be executed while the Command Execution Active BUSY parallel communications signal is ON during execution for the parallel measure ment trigger input TRIG signal Execute PLC Link commands while the Command Execution Active BUSY paral lel communications signal is OFF You can also perform measurements with the measurement trigger input TRIG signal in parallel I O and use PLC Link communications to output data Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled Execution Data Output condition Completed GATE h Data Output Request Bit DSA Data Output Completed GATE RSET Data Output Request Bit DSA 308 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s
434. t the scene number to use at startup Standard models 0 to 31 Single func scene tion models 0 to 7 Default 0 Password Password Enables ON or disables OFF the OFF default or ON System p 179 settings ON OFF password Enter Sets a password 15 characters max password z Timeout Sets the timeout time during measure 100 to 30000 ms default 30000 ms System p 185 D ments ne 3 Retry mode Sets the type of retry for measurements Normal retry Expose retry Scene retry System Trigger retry or None default Switch Order for Sets the method for changing scenes Auto default or Fixed System Scene retry only Retry scene for Changes the order in which to change 1st to 32nd System Scene retry only the scenes Scenes are registered in order from the first scene Adjustment mode in Sets whether to adjust measurement OFF default or ON p 143 Run contents in Run Mode la Ethernet p 46 8 IP address set Sets the method to use to set IP Auto default Fixed DHCP System x ting addresses o Z IP address Enter the IP address of the Sensor a b c d System p 46 2 Valid only when the IP address setting a 1 to 223 is set to Fixed b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 2 to 254 Default 10 5 5 100 Subnet mask Inputs the subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 System p 46 Valid only when the IP address setting Default 255 255 255 0 is set to Fixed Gateway Sets the default gateway address When 1 0 0 1 to 223
435. ta in which to automatically register the read result for teaching from an external device F T Meas Parameter Same as Teach Meas Parameter under Modify or Inspection Scene p 106 a Q Dictionary param Sets the model dictionary to register Scene p 107 custom characters Dictionary ref Sets the dictionary data to use for None or Dictionary data 0 to 31 Scene character recognition Individual char Used to select individual characters E Scene letters and numbers from the dictio Number nary data for character recognition 0to9 Alphabet AtoZ Reflect Specifies whether to reflect the judge Yes default or No Scene p 104 e ment results of an inspection item in S the overall judgement oO s Error string Sets the character string that is output 20 alphanumeric characters default Scene p 107 Q 3 370 Menu Tables FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 S 6 D Expression 0 to Sets the number of the expression for Scene p 116 lgl expression 31 which to set a calculation ZIPRE ae Q Expression set Sets the expressions Scene S WW tings Data Uses the measurement result of other Inspection item calculation symbols Scene p 121 items TJG Const Inputs constants or mathematical 0 to 9 calculation symbol
436. te This function can be used only when the input mode is set to Expanded Mode FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 195 8 UONDBUUOD Ja eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D 196 Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left r Gray INO OFF Command parameters for continu Areused MAN ous measurements Refer to the following informa Green IN1 OFF tion for signal wiring Red IN2 OFF BE Wiring p 35 White IN3 OFF Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for continuous measurements Black OUTO OR Overall judgement default assign ment Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default assignment Timing Chart BUSY output conditions OR output ON for NG ON 3 INO to IN4 signals m Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN5 are OFF OFF ON 14 IN5 signal OFF 1 Start continuous measurements End continuous measurements oN i i BUSY signal poor DEF ON while measurements are i i being processed depends on Turned ON when overall judgement is NG OR signal 1 Turn ON IN5 while INO to IN4 are OFF If status is held while the BUSY signal is OFF continuous measurements will begin and the BUSY signal will remain ON while continuous measurements are being performed 2 Continuous measurements end when IN
437. te Y sition 99 999 9 men 999 164 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge or search angle sition men 165 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge or search angle sition men 166 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui O to 100 100 Adjust judge or correlation sition men 167 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 Adjust judge or correlation sition men 168 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 999 men 169 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9 men 999 170 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 999 men 171 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9 ment 999 172 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sation upper limit sition ment 173 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sation lower limit sition ment 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch fo
438. tem lt Command Format gt Inspection External reference item number data number Command 2 digits max 4 digits max Set value iitfetmyotatryay 1 1 sen Jor or Space Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 0x20 dof 1 1 1 sfer Inspection item Ext ref Set value xternal reference ue Delimiter Command number data number 2 digits max 4 digits max Space Space Space 0x20 0x20 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r cr Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the inspection item number 0 to 31 External reference data Specifies the external reference data number 0 to 9999 number BA 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 Acquired value Returns the data for the specified inspection item O 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 388 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 331 u194 4 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 ITEMDATA2 command or ID2 Acquire Inspection Item Text String Data This command acquires the text string data of the specified inspection item lt Command Format gt Inspection External reference item number data number Command 2 digits max 3 digits max ee ittjetmiofajryalea for or Space Sp
439. tem Parameter Description Reference data Model image This is the partial image that is stored as the reference Reference position X Reference position Y Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters These are coordinates of the model image that are stored as reference p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search pos comp Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement 2 Press each parameter and set the range that is to be judged as OK Set the range for each of the following parameters Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are taken Note Judgement O Shape pos comp Judgement You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display Upper limit Lower limit Blue for OK Red for NG 3 Press OK to accept the value 4 Press Back to end making the setting Parameter Setting Description Scroll X The amount of position compensation in the X direction is displayed Scroll Y The amount of position compensation in the Y direction is displayed Correlation Range 0 to 100 Adjust the upper and lower limits of the correlation for an OK judge Defaults Lower limit 60 Upper limit 100 ment Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and low
440. ters max x2 N 0 to 3 1101 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 5 0to 31 1102 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 e x2 N 0 digit 5N to 3 1103 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 5N to 3 1111 N Master data 5N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1121 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 6 0to 31 1122 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 Eon x2 N 0 digit 6N to 3 1123 N Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ning digit 6N to 3 1131 N Master data 6N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1141 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 number 7 0to 31 1142 N Verification end Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 32 x2 N 0 digit 7N to 3 FQ2 CH User s Manual External Reference Parameters 409 rA L seolpueddy 410 External Category Data name Setting Acquisition Data range Default Expres Logged refer sion text data ence string Judge number ment parame ter 1143 N Verification con Verification begin Setting Acquisition 1 to 32 1 x2 N 0 ditions ning digit 7N to 3 1151 N Master data 7N Setting Acquisition 32 characters max x2 N 0 to 3 1161 Reference unit Setting Acquisition 1 OFF 1 nu
441. that is longer than the measurement interval the output timing will become delayed as measurements are repeated Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Item Parameter Description GATE ON delay 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms 1 0 ms default Set the time from when the result is output to the parallel interface until the GATE signal turns ON This is the time to wait until the data output stabilizes Set a value that is longer than the delay time of the external device Output time 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to None or Sync 5 0 ms default output Set the time to turn ON the GATE signal Set the time that is required for the external device to read the measurement results Timeout 0 5 to 120 0s This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to Handshaking 10 0 s default A timeout error will occur at the following times if there is no response from the external device within the time that is set When the DSA signal turns ON after measurements are completed When the DSA signal turns OFF after the GATE signal turns ON When the DSA signal turns ON after the GATE signal turns OFF Number of delay 1 to 15 default This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to Sync output Set the number of times to ignore the STEP sig
442. the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display Lower limit Blue for OK Red for NG 3 Press OK to accept the value 4 Press Back to end making the setting Parameter Setting Description Scroll X The amount of position compensation in the X direction is displayed Scroll Y The amount of position compensation in the Y direction is displayed Correlation Range 0 to 100 Adjust the upper and lower limits of the correlation for an OK judge Defaults Lower limit 60 Upper limit 100 ment Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of measurement position X for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of measurement position Y for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Increasing Measurement Position Accuracy You can increase the accuracy of measurement positioning You can calculate down to four decimal places p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Sub pixel and select Yes FQ2 CH User s Manual Weasure position by sub pixel Needs longer processing time _ ipa pe Adjusting the
443. the HDR Mode HOR mode As shown below the higher the level the wider the combined dy namic range will be Ree Level 1 Level 2 i Level 3 Level 4 Ses Dark Bright Adjusting Image Quality FQ2 CH User s Manual Using a Polarizing Filter Only for Sensors with Built in Lighting Specular reflections can be eliminated from an image by attaching an FQ XF1 Polarizing Filter to the Sensor Observe the following precautions e The image will be darker compared to when no filter is used e If the image becomes too dark adjust the brightness LT p 53 Mounting the Filter 1 Hook the filter in the hole at the top of the Sensor 2 Using the top section as a pivot point pull down the filter so that it attaches to the Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting Image Quality 57 sobew uiye L 3 4 Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images Delaying the Image Capture Timing from the Trigger Input If the measurement object is moving the position in the image of the feature that is to be measured will depend on the timing of the trigger signal A delay can be applied from when the trigger i e the TRIG signal is input until when the image is taken to synchronize the timing of image capture with the speed of moving objects If the object position varies in the image this delay cannot be used to make the object position more stable When you use a trigger delay with external light
444. the Sensor and Touch Finder If large dust particles adhere to the Camera use a blower brush used to clean camera lenses to blow them off Do not use breath from your mouth to blow the dust off To remove dust particles from the Camera wipe gently with a soft cloth for cleaning lenses moistened with a small amount of alcohol Do not use excessive force to wipe off dust particles Scratches to the Camera might cause error Editor s Note E Meaning of Symbols Menu items that are displayed on the Touch Finder LCD screen and windows dialog boxes and other GUI elements displayed on the PC are indicated enclosed by brackets E Visual Aids Important Indicates points that are important to achieve the full product performance such as operational precautions Note Indicates application procedures LT Indicates pages where related information can be found FQ2 CH User s Manual 1 Introduction 1 1 FQ2 CH series Optical Character Recognition Sensors 1 2 Measurement Process 00 ec eee e eee eee eee eee 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements 0000 sees startup Display ete T 4 ethiei ee bie tra ae eee ee Qed Display Elements ii 4 sous eictecg etches aceite adip tel eda WR eA 1 4 Basic Operational Flow 00 0 c cece eee eee eee 2 Installation and Connections 2 1 System Configuration 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 2 2 Part Names and FunctionS 0 cece e
445. the Sensors to Connect p 160 NG sensor Of the connected Sensors displays the image from the Sensor that most recently had an NG result Single sensor Displays the image from only one Sensor Of the Sensors the image from only the Sensor that is specified in Sensor selection is displayed If a Sensor is not specified in Sensor selection the image from the first Sensor that is detected will be displayed LT Specifying the Sensors to Connect Continuously p 181 Auto default Automatically adjusts the display according to the number of Sensors that are detected If more than one Sensor is detected the images from up to eight Sensors are displayed at the same time If eight Sensors are connected the display is the same as that for Multi sensor Specifying Sensor Display Positions for Multiple Sensors Multi Sensor or Auto Only If Startup screen type is set to Multi sensor or Auto 1 you can specify the position of the image on a split display for each Sensor that is displayed 1 This can be done only when the maximum number of Sensors eight are connected p gt Run Mode Sensor monitor Multi sensor 1 Press 4q Display position on the right of the dis play 2 Press the display of the Sensor for which to specify the display position A list of numbers for the display positions will be displayed 3 Selecta number from the list of display positions The display for th
446. tial output ON Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Aat OFF 143 Output end digit Setting Acquisition 1 to 128 128 ie oe 144 Output beginning Setting Acquisition 1 to 128 1 ace digit 150 Measurement Format character Setting Acquisition 32 characters max conditions string 0 151 Format character Setting Acquisition 32 characters max string 1 152 Format character Setting Acquisition 32 characters max string 2 153 Format character Setting Acquisition 32 characters max string 3 160 Output parame Dictionary registra Setting Acquisition 1 None or 0 to 31 1 ter tion processing unit 170 String output ON Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 ee OFF memory link 171 NG error code out Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 1 put memory link 172 Partial output ON Setting Acquisition 0 OFF 1 ON 0 aes Ae OFF memory link 173 Output end digit Setting Acquisition 1 to 128 128 eas a memory link 174 Output beginning Setting Acquisition 1 to 128 1 PIA ia digit memory link 200 N Measurement User model dictio Setting Acquisition 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 N 0 to conditions nary disable set 9 ting N number 200 N User model dictio Setting Acquisition 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 N 10 to nary disable set 31 ting N letter External Reference Parameters FQ2 CH User s Manual
447. ting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 0 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to External Reference Parameters Light FQ2 CH User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 157 Mea Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 sure 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia ment tion condi 169 tions Edge level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 sition 170 Noise level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 173 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 1 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 177 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 a aes 1 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 men condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 men 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 men 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge imit 0 sition 99 999 9999 men 185 Ed
448. tion 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 tions sition Background Suppression External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure sition 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 om tions sition gt 122 Image format Setting Acqui 0 Binary image 0 g sition 1 Monochrome image D 132 Grayscale lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 S sition p 133 Grayscale upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 ok sition N FQ2 CH User s Manual 389 External Reference Parameters 390 Shape Search Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea
449. tion Control DWORD Interface Control Flag 0x0000 4 Get Physical Link Object STRUCT of Path to the link object in the g physical layer 2 2 Path size UINT Path size 2 ey n Path Padded Segment to identify physical 20 F6 24 01 EPATH layer linked object N FQ2 CH User s Manual 439 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications 440 ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 5 Get Interface Configuration STRUCT of TCP IP network interface set tings IP Address UDINT IP address of the device Network Mask UDINT Network mask of the device Gateway Address UDINT Default gateway address Name Server UDINT Primary name server Name Server 2 UDINT Secondary name server Domain Name STRING Default domain name 6 Get Host Name STRING Host name Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 01 hex Get_Attribute_All No Yes 02 hex Set_Attribute_All No Yes OE hex Get_Attribute_Single No Yes 10 hex Set_Attribute_Single No Yes 1 5 F6h Ethernet Link Class Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Revision UINT Revision of the object 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Maximum instance number 1 3 Get Num Instance UINT Number of ports for which 1 instances are created Instance Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT Interface baud rate
450. tions Item Sensor Data Units FQ SDU1 Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit SDU10 NPN SDU15 PNP FQ SDU2L RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit SDU20 NPN SDU25 PNP VO Parallel I O SDU1 11 inputs TRIG RESET INO to IN7 and DSA specifi 24 outputs GATE DO to D15 ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT and SHTOUT cations SDU2 8 inputs INO to IN5 TRIG and RESET 7 outputs ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT SHTOUT RS 232C 1 channel 115 200 bps max FQ SDU2L only Sensor interface FQ2 CH connected with FQ WU Number of connected Sensors 1 0 OMRON interface Input specifications Output specifications Refer to Table 2 Rat Power supply voltage 21 6 to 26 4 VDC including ripple ings Insulation resistance Between all DC external terminals and case 0 5 MQ min at 250 VDC Current consumption 2 5 A max FQ2 CHO 00 M FQ SDULID 0 1 A max for FQ SDULIL Envi Ambient temperature Operating 0 to 50 C Storage 20 to 65 C with no icing or condensation ron range mental immu Ambient humidity Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensation nity range Ambient atmosphere No corrosive gas Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0 35 mm X Y Z directions 8 min each 10 times destruction Shock resistance 150 m s 3 times each in 6 directions up down right left forwa
451. tomatically be disabled If logging is disabled on both of the Touch Finders when they are connected logging will be performed only on the Touch Finder for which logging is enabled first You can use the following parameter to enable and disable logging p gt Setup Mode TF settings Logging setting Trend monitors and histo grams Monitoring or setup Trend monitors and histograms can be displayed only if logging is enabled Therefore they can be displayed only on the Touch Finder for which logging is enabled as described above Convenient Functions for Operation FQ2 CH User s Manual 7 10Convenient Functions for Setup This section describes the functions that can be used when setting inspection items Making Settings with Stored Images With an FQ2 Vision Sensor judgement parameters can be set by using the following images e Images saved in internal Sensor memory e Image files in an SD card Note You can also use images that were captured on the display LT capturing the Displayed Image p 180 Saving Image Data e Temporarily Saving Images in the Sensor The measured images can be temporarily saved inside the Sensor These images are held until the Sensor power supply is turned OFF gt In Out Log setting Image logging QJ Setting Logging Parameters for Image Data p 170 Saving Images in the Sensor to an SD Card The images that are temporarily s
452. ttering may cause the trigger to be input again during execution of a measurement Power Supply Specifications When a Switching Regulator Is Connected Use a power supply that meets the following specifications They are sold separately Item Description FQ2 CH O connection Power supply voltage 24 VDC 21 6 to 26 4 V Recommended Power Supplies S8VS 060240 24 VDC 2 5 A External power supply terminal screws M4 tightening torque 1 2 N m Supply power from a DC power supply for which measures have been applied to prevent high voltages e g a safety extra low voltage circuit If UL certification is required for the overall system use a UL Class II DC power supply Wiring FQ2 CH User s Manual Wiring the Touch Finder Power Supply Wiring Connecting the Power Supply 1 Loosen the two terminal screws using a Phillips screwdriver 2 Attach crimp terminals to the power lines Secure the positive and negative lines as indicated 24VDC amp using M3 screws Power supply tightening torque 0 54 N m 3 In environments where there is excessive noise at tach a ferrite core ZCAT1730 0730 from TDK or the equivalent to the power supply cable When you attach the ferrite core to the power supply cable wrap the cable only one time Turning ON the Touch Finder 1 Remove the cover from the power switch on the left side
453. tting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 351 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 MEMO oe Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Connecting with RS 232C 10 1 Introduction to RS 232C Connections cccssssssssssssecessseeeeeeeneeees 354 10 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No proto CO COMMUNICATIONS ccceeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeesneeeeseeeeenseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeneaes 355 354 10 1 Introduction to RS 232C Connections You can connect an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to the I O cable connector on the FQ2 If you connect a Sensor Data Unit you can use no protocol communications to send and receive commands inspection item parameters and other data between the Sensor and the external control device that is connected with the RS 232C cable Sensor Data Unit External device Sensor RS 232C Refer to the following sections for the specifications and wiring methods of the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit BA p 29 p 424 and BA Wiring Sensor Data Units p 37 Parallel Input Signals for an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit If you make a parallel connection through the parallel I O connector on the Sensor Data Unit the specifications of the parallel I O signals will change as given below in respect to the standard parallel communications of the Sensor e Output Signals You can use the ACK signal in t
454. tting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 CH User s Manual Getting the Software Version 280F 00403000 This command acquires the version information of the Sensor software Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00403000 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Software version 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes text string 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00403000 Software version 1 000 times the actual value End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Software version text Returns the software version string Example When the software version is 1 20 the response is 1200 4B0 hex Getting the Error Information 280F 00205000 This command acquires the latest error code from the Sensor Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00205000 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Error code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00205000 Error code Parameter Descriptions Error code Returns the latest error code If there is no error record the response is 00000000 1111 1 Error Histories p 360 FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outpu
455. turn OFF the error ERR sig Command nal from the Vision Sensor Response Commu ee nications Turn OFF this signal from PLC when the error ERR ie signal goes OFF Command code Command code This I O port stores the command code Command Response Commu Parameters 1 to Command parameters These I O ports store the command parameters See 3 FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 293 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 294 Response Area Vision Sensor Slave to PLC Master First Bits Contents word iS Me is Me ma o is ka 7 e 5 e is 2 1 0 0 ERR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv READY BUSY FLG Control signals 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv GATE 32 bits 2 Command code Com mand 3 code 32 bits 4 Response code Response code 32 45 bits 6 Response data Response data 32 7 bits Signal Signal name Function Application FLG Control Command Com This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor Command pleted completes execution of the control command response commu eae z nications This signal automatically turns OFF when the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal from the PLC turns OFF This signal turns ON after the control com mand code response code and r
456. uction 150 m s 3 times each in 6 direction up down right left forward and backward Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP20 Weight Approx 270 g without Battery and hand strap Dimensions 95 x 85 x 32 5 mm Materials Case ABS Accessories Touch Pen FQ XT Instruction Manual 1 This is a guideline for the time required for the brightness to diminish to half the initial brightness at room temperature and humidity No guarantee is implied The life of the backlight is greatly affected by the ambient temperature and humidity It will be shorter at lower or higher temperatures 2 This value is only a guideline No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by operating conditions 3 This value is only a guideline No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by the operating environment and operating conditions e Battery Specifications Item FQ BAT1 Battery type Secondary lithium ion battery Nominal capacity 1 800 mAh Rated voltage 3 7V Dimensions 35 3 x 53 1 x 11 4 mm Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 40 C Storage 25 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensation Charged in Touch Finder FQ2 D31 Charging method Charging time 2h Usage time 1 5h Battery backup life 300 charging cycles Weight 50 g max A This value is only a guideline No guarantee
457. udgement OR2 e OUT1 Item 5 judgement OR5 e OUT2 Item 14 judgement OR14 Color Signal Description The signals shown at the left are used Black OUTO OR2 Outputs the judgement for Refer to the following information for signal wiring OR2 2 4 Wiring p 35 Orange OUT1 ORS Outputs the judgement for LO 9 P OR5 Light OUT2 OR14 Outputs the judgement for blue OR14 As described above if terminals OUTO to OUT2 are all assigned to individual judgement output signals the BUSY signal and ERROR signal assigned as the default settings will no longer be output FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 199 8 UONDBUUOD a eseg e y m eyeq Buiindino pue uoneiado Buljjoyju0D Timing Chart Output ORO to OR31 signals are held until the next judgement output ON TRIG signal i ON for 1 ms min OFF ON BUSY signal are ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions Example ORO signal gt Turned ON when individual judgement is NG OR output ON for NG Turned ON when individual OR1 OR output ON for NG Individual judgement 1 The timing for updating the OR signal is when the measurement results are finalized regardless of the output settings of the BUSY signal BUSY output conditions Seitings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting
458. udges whether an image is OK or NG according to the correlation with a previously registered image pattern For this reason if the object is at an angle the correlation is reduced and the image may be judged as NG To achieve an OK judgement for the same image pattern even when the object is at an angle the rotation range must be widened p gt Image Image adjustment Add pos comp Model Search p comp Details Tab Page Model parameter 1 Set Rotation to Yes 2 Press Angle range and set the following range 3 Press Angle range and set the following range Parameter Setting Description Angle range Range 180 to 180 A search is performed within the set angle range Default Lower limit 180 The larger the angle range the longer the processing time Upper limit 180 Important If you change the angle range perform teaching again LT p 68 Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Low Contrast Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast of the mark LCI Adjust the brightness p 53 Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Variations in the Measurement Object Inconsistent portions can be masked so that they are omitted from matching LT Model masking p 73 e Increasing Processing Speed The following two methods can be used to reduce processing time Reduce the range in which a search is performed for the model LT Changing the measurement region p 74 Reduce the
459. uding the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing Class 1M Laser emitting in the wavelength range from 302 5 nm to 4000 nm which are safe under reasonably fore seeable conditions of operation but may be hazardous if the user employs optics within the beam Class 2 Laser that emit visible radiation in the wavelength range from 400 nm to 700 nm where eye protection is normally afforded by aversion responses including the blink reflex This reaction may be expected to provide adequate protection under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing Class 2M Laser that emit visible radiation in the wavelength range from 400 nm to 700 nm where eye protection is normally afforded by aversion responses including the blink reflex However viewing of the output may be more hazardous if the user employs optics within the beam Class 3R Laser that emit in the wavelength range from 302 5 nm to 10 nm where direct intrabeam viewing is potentially hazardous but the risk is lower than for Class 3B lasers and fewer manufacturing require ments and control measures for the user apply than for Class 3B lasers The accessible emission limit is within five times the AEL of Class 2 in the wavelength range from 400 nm to 700 nm and within five times the AEL of Class 1 for other wavelengths Class 3B Lasers that are normally hazardous when direct intrabeam exposure occurs i e within the NOHD Vi
460. ui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 tions sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 ed image sition 1 Previous image 149 Edge level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 R sition 150 Noise level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 153 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 0 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 157 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 170 Noise level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 173 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 1 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 177 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 1 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 99
461. ult to data 0 p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set 1 Press 0 Data 0 2 Press Multi data 3 Set the following items on the display to set expres sions Item Description Expression Register the expression to use to output multiple data Examples LPR 0 1 PO X PO Y LPC 0 1 PO X PO Y Const Used to insert numbers and symbols into the expression Data Used to select the inspection items for which to output data and insert the parameters to output into the expression Example Selecting Parameters for the Search Item at Inspection Item 0 Inspection item PO Search position comp Judgement result Judgement JG Correlation Corre CR Math Either of the following two functions can be inserted LPR function order of the measurement data The measurement data is output in order Format LPR start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 e LPC function order of the detection points Data is output for each detected measurement point Format LPC start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor sia Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 CH User s Manual Expression Setting Example
462. umber 0 S8cenell 3 gt Press Add item on the menu 0 Scenel 4 Select an inspection item such as OCR When registering multiple inspection items press the inspection item number after 1 and set it in the same way Note If more than seven inspection items are set drag the EE icon at the bottom of the menu upward to display the next inspection item numbers 97 FQ2 CH User s Manual Configuring Inspection Items suonjoedsu dN bulyjes 74 98 Modifying Existing Inspection Items 1 Press the number of the inspection item to be set 2 Press Modify on the menu Deleting Inspection Items 1 Press the number of the inspection item to be delet ed 2 Press Delete on the menu Note Inspect Inspection Fad 0 Scenel 2 0CR 2 0CR L L 2T ws Rename Ht ka Inspect Inspection Hodity me Rav ro Pc FO 0 8cenet Executing Similar Measurements in Different Places Copy an inspection item that is already registered Copy Change the name of an inspection item Rename Configuring Inspection Items FQ2 CH User s Manual 4 3 Reading and Verifying Character Strings Character String Recognition Character recognition is used to read characters in input images as character information based on font information that is registered in the Sensor in advance The characters that were read can be output to an e
463. utes continuous measurements p 298 ments 1030 0010 End Continuous Measure Ends continuous measurements p 298 ments Utility Commands 2010 0010 Clear Measurement Values Clears all measurement result values p 299 3010 0010 Save Data in Sensor Saves the current system data and scene p 299 groups in the Sensor 4010 0010 Re register Model Registers the model again p 299 4020 0010 External Teaching Performs reteaching p 300 F010 0010 Reset Vision Sensor Resets the Vision Sensor p 300 Scene Control Commands 1000 0020 Get Scene Number Acquires the current scene number p 301 1000 0030 Select Scene Changes to the specified scene number p 301 26 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Data Acquisition Setting Commands First word of com mand area hex Command name Function Reference 2 3 1010 0040 Get Image Adjustment Data Acquires data from a position compensation p 302 item or filter item 1010 0050 Set Image Adjustment Data Sets the specified data in a position compen p 302 sation item or filter item 1020 0040 Get Inspection Item Data Acquires the inspection item data p 303 1020 0050 Set Inspection Item Data Sets the inspection item data to the specified p 304 data 3000 0040 Get Software Version Informa Acquires the software version p 304 tion 5000 0020 Get Latest Error Informatio
464. utomatically Connecting Sensors The Touch Finder can detect Sensors and automatically connect to them in the order that it detects them The Touch Finder can detect up to 32 Sensors and it can connect to up to eight Sensors at the same time Set this parameter to OFF to connect to only a specific Sensor gt a Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings 1 Set Auto sensor detection to ON Note If there are more than eight Sensors available for connection use Specify sensor to select the Sensors to connect LT 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration p 50 Registering the Sensors to Connect You can set any of the Sensors for connection to the Touch Finder and register them gt iz Run Mode Sensor monitor Multi sensor 1 Press lt lt Specify sensor on the right of the dis MERETET play Switch sensor Display position 2 Press a blank line and then press Add 12 23 36 56 160 Connecting to More Than One Sensor FQ2 CH User s Manual 3 Enter the IP address 4 Press the IP address that you entered and then press Comm test to confirm that connection is possible a SE Hodity 23 0 0 0 Comm test Selecting the Sensors to Connect You can select the Sensors to connect to the Touch Finder from a list p gt Run Mode Sensor monitor Multi sensor 1 Press 4q Specify sensor on the right of the dis play 2 Press the check boxes of t
465. utput range NG String output on off Yes default Sets whether to output an NG string No FQ2 CH User s Manual PLC Link Connections 291 yeusau y yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Note Endian Little endian data is output Code Conversion The converted codes are outputted for the following character codes Character code Before conversion After conversion CR amp hOD amp h8541 LF amp hOA amp h8542 DEL amp h7F amp h8543 FF amp hFF amp h8544 Character Output Example When both the data and character string are output the character string is output after the data Example Read result 1 ABC Read result 2 0123 Data output Data 0 3 Number of characters 1 Data output Data 1 4 Number of characters 2 The following information will be output for the above Increment from first Output data Assigned output data address in output area 0 Data 4 bytes inspection item 0 Number of characters 1 2 Data 1 4 bytes Inspection item 1 Number of characters 3 4 A Inspection item 0 Characters ABC 5 B 6 7 0 Inspection item 1 Characters 0123 8 T 9 2 10 3 11 00 Filled with zeros Only when the character string length is not a multiple of 4 292 PLC Link Connections FQ2 CH User s Manual Memory Assignments for PLC Link Communications
466. ve table LI 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 164 e Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the contrast of the image within the model registration region is too low Select a region with a larger contrast between light and dark areas compared to the region that was registered as the model and re register it as the model sobew uiye L Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing L Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 66 Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment Shape Sear pos comp Modify 1 Press Details Scroll parameter Interpolation 2 Setthe interpolation to Bilinear or None Parameter Setting Description Interpolation Bilinear default Points are connected with lines to find approximations This create smoother images None Position compensation is performed at the pixel level FQ2 CH User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken ec 76 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Ju
467. ved in files in these folders sensor_name SCN Scene data The file name extension is SCN sensor_name SGP Scene group data The file name extension is SGP sensor_name DIC Dictionary data The file name extension is DIC sensor_name DGP All dictionary data The file name extension is DGP sensor_name SYD Sensor system data The file name extension is SYD sensor_name BKD All sensor data The file name extension is BKD sensor_name CLB Calibration data The file name extension is CLB sensor_name CGP Calibration data The file name extension is CGP MSD Touch Finder data The file name extension is MSD sensor_name LOGIMAGE Image data The file name extension is IFZ sensor_name LOGDATA Statistical data and measurement data The file name extension is CSV CAPTURE Captured images The file name extension is BMP Camera image data The file name extension is IFZ 1 For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder My Documents OMRON FQ Note The PC Tool does not support SD card operations SD Card Operations FQ2 CH User s Manual Inserting and Removing SD Cards Inserting an SD Card in the Touch Finder 1 Open the cover to the SD card slot on the top of the Touch Finder 2 Insert the SD card with the back of the SD card facing the front of the Touch Finder and press it in unti
468. vice External device Vision Sensor Data Up to 32 specified data z Lt items can be automati cally output You must specify in advance the data to output up to 32 items after measurements That data is sent to the external device in either ASCII or binary format through a continuous serial connection There is no handshaking from the external device to confirm if it can receive the data FQ2 CH User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 309 u194 3 yBnoiy Buyosuu0D 6 Setting Up No protocol Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details LT 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 46 Initial Settings for No protocol Communications You must set the communications method of the destination external device to perform no protocol communications p gt Sensor settings Data output No protocol data 1 Press No protocol TCP 2 Set Connection mode to either TCP server or TCP client When you are finished press Back 3 If you set Connection mode to TCP client set the Cunnection mode TCP server following parameters Item Description Setting range IP address Set the IP address of the external devi
469. xample When Data 0 Is 256 324 and Data 1 Is 1 000 00 03 E9 44 FF FF FC 18 0D _ er Data 0 256324 Data 1 1000 A delimiter will 256 324 x 1000 1 000 x 1000 be attached to the end Note Binary output does not use data separators i e field separators or record separators These separators are used only for ASCII output The following range of values can be output 2 147 483 648 lt Measured value lt 2 147 483 647 If the measured value is lower than 2 147 483 648 then 2 147 483 648 is output If the measured value is higher than 2 147 483 647 then 2 147 483 647 is output The following values are output if JG Judge is set OK 0 0 x 1000 NG 1000 1 x 1000 Note Data that is output after measurement is output until the last data even after the measurement is finished Data out put is not interrupted midway Outputting Character Strings You can set whether to output the character string that results from reading Outputting the character string is possible for the following inspection results OCR The procedure for outputting the character string is given here for two inspection items p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Noprotocol data output Output data set 1 Select the inspection item for which to output the character string 2 Setthe following items on the setting display Parameter Set value Des
470. xternal device You can also verify the character string that was read to see if it matches a character string that was registered in advance Measurement region 12 10 1 Range in which characters can be read PQD CE6800 Vertical 4 lines max Horizontal 32 characters max Characters That Can Be Recognized Item Description Numbers 0tod Letters AtoZ Symbols apostrophe hyphen period colon slash 1 Any symbols other than those that are listed above cannot be recognized 2 Normally only uppercase letters can be recognized Lowercase letters can be recognized if model dictionaries are used Each lowercase letter must be registered individually LT Model Dictionaries p 107 Note User fonts can be registered separately to enable recognition Dictionary File Registration p 107 FQ2 CH User s Manual Reading and Verifying Character Strings suono dsuj dn Buas y Setup Procedure for Character Recognition The setup for character recognition is performed in the following order The basic settings to recognize characters are made e Character format number of characters alphanumeric Teaching characters or symbols etc e Measurement region Detailed parameters to recognize characters These are set automatically Settings are made to check whether the characters that were read from the workpiece were recognized correctly Differences between the
471. y 122 Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string 2Edge position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position X X0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position Y YO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position X X1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position Y Y1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 ref position X SX0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion X Edge0 ref position Y SYO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion Y Edge1 ref position X SX1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion X Edge1 ref position Y SY1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion Y 2Edge midpoint Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position X X0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position Y YO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position X X1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position Y Y1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Midpoint X MX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Midpoint Y MY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 ref position X SX0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion X Edge0
472. y the tag names in the PLC directly by using the I O memory addresses that are assigned in the communications areas Output tags are specified for the input connections to the Sensor and input tags are specified for output connections to the PLC Setting Examples Output tag DO Input tag D100 Setting Variables Sysmac Studio Define variables with AT specifications to the I O memory addresses that are assigned in the communi cations areas as shown below Setting Examples Variable a AT specification DO 0 Variable b AT specification DO 1 Variable c AT specification DO 15 Variable d AT specification D1 0 Setting Connections Set the connections as shown in the following table Originator device PLC settings Target device Sensor settings Input tag set DO Output tag set Input101 Output tag set D100 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP Input tag set Output100 FQ2 CH User s Manual Example Setting Example for Variables to Access the Command Area Command Area PLC Output Tag DO Variables Used to Access the Command Area in the PLC from the User Program I O memory Settings address 15 te i 0 Variable name AT DO ERCLR eee TRIG EXE specification Data type Die FE DSA a Assigned to the EXE signal DO 0 BOOL b Assigned to the TRIG signal DO 1 BOOL c As
473. you use an EtherNet IP connections set fixed IP address for the Sensors addresses Setting Up Ethernet FQ2 CH User s Manual Taking Images 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration 000e eee eens 50 3 2 Setting Conditions for Taking Images 0 0eee eee e eens 51 3 3 Adjusting Image Quality 2 0 c eee eee eee 52 3 4 Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images 020eee ee eeee 58 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 205000000 60 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration If multiple Sensors are connected to a single Touch Finder or computer a list of the Sensors that are connected is displayed by default Use the following procedure to change to the Sensor to set up 1 Press Switch Sensor 2 Press the image of the Sensor to be set up which Is displayed will be displayed for Sensors that are not yet set Note Once the Touch Finder detects and records a Sensor the display or der for showing more than one Sensor is fixed Even if the system configuration is changed to reduce the number of Sensors the pre vious display location will remain for Sensors that were removed To update displays of multiple Sensors to the current connection sta tus press lt q Auto connect on the right of the display in step 2 to automatically reconnect 3 Press Sensor settings to return to Setup Mode 4 Press Yes
474. ype That Matches the Command Area Bits Iie Ws W i 2 S vr bl Ss 4 8 2 a o Control 0 ERR J TRIGJEXE Flag a T fT J T 7 J bsa Command 2 Command code Code 43 S_EIP Command 4 Parameter 1 Output Param1 45 Command 6 Parameter 2 Param2 7 Command 8 Parameter 3 Param3 9 Data Type to Access d Response and Output Areas Name of data type S_EIPInput Type of derivative data type Structure di The data type that was defined above 1 pens 32 bit bit string data verte 32 bit integer data tess 32 bit integer data Name of data type Data type S_EIPInput STRUCT StatusFlag U_EIPFlag CommandCodeEcho DWORD ResponseCode UDINT ResponseData DINT OutputData ARRAY O 7JOF DINT nests Specifies an array of DINT data from 0 to 7 Assignment Example for Variable Data Type That Matches the Response and Output Areas Response Area Bits 1S ike jas a2 ah i 2 ei vv a amp i 4b Ss 2 a Status 0 ERR J RUN OR READY BUSY FLG Flag 1 J J 7F J J JGATE Command 2 Command code CodeEcho 43 Response 4 Response code
475. ypes Single measurement One measurement is performed for each external trigger e Continuous measurement Measurements are performed continuously Refer to the following page for data output timing and signal status after measurement trigger execution LT Aligning the Data Output Timing with the External Device p 220 Performing One Measurement for Each External Trigger A measurement trigger is input as the TRIG signal from a proximity sensor PLC or other external device One measurement is performed when the TRIG signal turns ON 1 TRIG signal ON we Or other J SS device Trigger input Sensor 2 Performs measurements once au Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 CH User s Manual Performing Continuous Measurements Continuous measurements are performed while the continuous measurement command is input from an external device 1 IN7 signal ON INO to IN6 are OFF Or other measurements Setting Output Data You can set the data to output after measurements Output Data You can output any of the following data through the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Data Output contents Signal used to output the data OR signal Overall judgement result The results is output with the OR signal Parallel judgement Judgement results of the judgement conditions The results are assigned to and output with output that are set for pa
476. z measurements and the number of NG a overall judgements fo Image logging Sets the parameter to log measurement All Only NG or None default System p 165 image data p 170 Data log Condition Sets the parameter to log measurement All Only NG or None default System p 165 ging data from inspection items Select data You can select the parameters to log Parameter names for the filter items System p 165 from the parameters in the filter items position compensation items inspection position compensation items inspection items and expression that are set items and expression that are set Delete Log Resets the log data without turning OFF System p 172 the power supply FQ2 CH User s Manual Menu Tables 371 z L seolpueddy 372 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 2 OUTO Control Used to assign output signals to OUTO OR Total judgement default BUSY System p 200 S Slo signal OUT1 and OUT2 ERROR READY RUN STG O QUT2 Q Q Item ORO Item judgement to OR31 Item31 judge judgement ment Expres Exp 0 judgement to EXP 31 judgement sion judge ment OR output You can set the output conditions for the OK ON or NG ON default System p 202 OR signal and for output signals to which judgements are assigned Output mode You can set the output mode for the OR One shot output Level output

FQ2-CH Optical Character Recognition Sensor User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents